624119
549
Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/550
Nächste Seite
OOWWNNEERR''SS MMAANNUUAALL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
The information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, the right to amend specifications without notice or obligation to
incorporate such amendments into vehicles already produced is reserved.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions
and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result,
some of the equipment operating descriptions referred to may not apply to
the particular vehicle with which this manual is supplied.
Please refer to the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer for information
regarding current standard and optional equipment levels.
EL(FL) UK FOREWORD.QXP 12/17/2014 1:23 PM Page 1
F2
Modification to the original vehicle specification may invalidate the manufacturers warranty and may
adversely affect the safety and durability of the vehicle.
Components which are subject to modification or are added to the original vehicle specification with-
out the express approval of the manufacturer and result in consequential loss or damage are not cov-
ered by the vehicle manufacturers warranty.
Particular attention is drawn to the fitment of replacement road wheels having a different specification
to those installed in production. The electronic power assisted steering system is specifically pro-
grammed to operate only with the road wheels fitted during production. The installation of alternative
specification road wheels may result in the replacement road wheels fouling the vehicle body result-
ing in tyre damage and compromised safety. The installation of after market wheels on vehicles
equipped with TPMS may result in wheel balancing difficulties or malfunction of the TPMS system.
Please refer to the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer before non original specification road wheels
are installed.
This vehicle is fitted with electronically controlled fuel injection or other micro processor controlled
equipment.
It is possible for incorrectly installed two way radio equipment including mobile telephones to adverse-
ly affect these systems.
Before radio equipment of this kind is installed, please contact your Hyundai authorised repairer for
recommendation regarding the suitability of the particular radio equipment concerned and the recom-
mended method of installation and equipment location. Incorrectly installed or unsuitable equipment
which gives rise to incorrect functioning of or damage to electronic vehicle components will not fall
within the scope of the vehicle manufacturers warranty.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO ORIGINAL VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
TWO WAY RADIO INSTALLATION
EL(FL) UK FOREWORD.QXP 12/17/2014 1:23 PM Page 2
F3
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the
caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
EL(FL) UK FOREWORD.QXP 12/17/2014 1:23 PM Page 3
F4
FOREWORD
Hyundai Motor Company wish to take this opportunity to thank you for purchasing a Hyundai product and to welcome you to the
ever increasing number of discriminating motorists who drive Hyundai vehicles.The advanced engineering and construction meth-
ods employed during both design and production of the Hyundai marque are something of which we are proud, and this commit-
ment to providing a high quality product is supported by a comprehensive after sales and warranty service of which we are equal-
ly proud.
This owner's manual will introduce the operating and maintenance requirements for the vehicle and it is recommended that it is
carefully read to ensure that the maximum performance and durability along with safe and satisfactory operation are obtained.The
recommended routine maintenance servicing along with any running repairs that may be required should be entrusted to a
Hyundai authorised repairer to ensure that only the latest methods and genuine Hyundai replacement parts are used for the con-
tinued reliability, safety and performance of the vehicle.
The manufacturer also recommends that service and maintenance on your vehicle be performed by a HYUNDAI authorised repair-
er.
Note : This owners manual should be considered as part of the vehicle and should be kept in the vehicle at all times for ease of
reference.
In the event of the vehicle being sold please ensure that this manual is left in the vehicle for the reference of the new owner.
Copyright 2015 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval
system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai
specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the
Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
EL(FL) UK FOREWORD.QXP 12/17/2014 1:23 PM Page 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
table of contents
EL(FL) UK FOREWORD.QXP 12/17/2014 1:23 PM Page 5
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
• Petrol engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
• Diesel engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle break-In process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster. . . . . 1-6
1
EL(FL) UK 1.QXP 12/16/2014 8:50 PM Page 1
Introduction
21
This Owners Manual is designed to help
vehicle users derive the greatest possi-
ble amount of enjoyment and satisfaction
from driving the HYUNDAI vehicle. It is
strongly recommended that the entire
manual is read in order that all of the fea-
tures, safety systems and maintenance
requirements are understood.
To minimise the RISK of death or injury,
the "WARNING" and "CAUTION" state-
ments must be read and understood
before operating the vehicle.
Illustrations are used throughout the
manual to complement written descrip-
tions intended to best explain how to
enjoy using the vehicle.
Reading this manual will assist the vehi-
cle user to learn about and understand
the features, important safety informa-
tion, and driving recommendations.
The general layout of the manual is pro-
vided in the Table of Contents.The index
has an alphabetical listing of all the infor-
mation contained in the manual. The
manual has eight sections plus an index.
Each section begins with a brief list of
contents to easily identify at a glance if
that section contains the information
being sought.
"WARNING", "CAUTION", and "NOTICE"
information is provided to enhance the
personal safety of the vehicle user. This
information must be carefully read and
followed.
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-
ful information is being provided.
Petrol engine
Unleaded
For the optimal vehicle performance, we
recommend you use unleaded petrol
which has an octane rating of RON
(Research Octane Number) 95 / AKI
(Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher. (Do not
use methanol blended fuels.)
You may use unleaded petrol with an
octane rating of RON 91~94/AKI 87~90
but it may result in slight performance
reduction of the vehicle.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental to
the catalytic converter and will
damage the engine control sys-
tem’s oxygen sensor and affect
emission control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (We rec-
ommend that you consult a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer for
details.)
EL(FL) UK 1.QXP 12/16/2014 8:50 PM Page 2
13
Introduction
Petrol containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of petrol and ethanol
(also known as grain alcohol), and petrol
or gasohol containing methanol (also
known as wood alcohol) are being mar-
keted along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded petrol.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use petrol or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system,
engine control system and emission con-
trol system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability problems
may not be covered by the manufactur-
er’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Petrol or gasohol containing methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
Other fuels
Using fuels such as;
- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
- MMT (Manganese, Mn) contained fuel,
- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
- Other metalic additives contained fuels,
may cause vehicle and engine damage
or cause plugging, misfiring, poor accel-
eration, engine stalling, catalyst melting,
abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction,
etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or perform-
ance problem caused by the use of these
fuels may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Use of MTBE
HYUNDAI recommends avoiding fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content
2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may
reduce vehicle performance and produce
vapour lock or hard starting.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-
hol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-
formance and damage components of
the fuel system, engine control system
and emission control system.
WARNING
Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refuelling.
Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs dri-
vability.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance prob-
lems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol or fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
EL(FL) UK 1.QXP 12/16/2014 8:50 PM Page 3
Introduction
41
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
unleaded petrol which has an octane rat-
ing of RON (Research Octane Number)
95 / AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher
(for Europe) or Octane Rating of RON
(Research Octane Number) 91 / AKI
(Anti-Knock Index) 87 or higher (except
Europe).
For customers who do not use good
quality petrols including fuel additives
regularly, and have problems starting or
the engine does not run smoothly, one
bottle of additives added to the fuel tank
at every 10,000 miles (15,000 km).
Additives are available from your
HYUNDAI authorised repairer along with
information on how to use them. Do not
mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
Drivers of vehicles which are to be oper-
ated in foreign countries must satisfy
themselves that:
The vehicle meets all local regulations
with respect to insurance, specifica-
tions etc..
The correct types and grades of fuel
are available for satisfactory operation
of the vehicle.
Diesel engine
Diesel fuel
Diesel engine must be operated only on
commercially available diesel fuel that
complies with EN 590 or comparable
standard (EN stands for "European
Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel,
heating oils, or non-approved fuel addi-
tives, as this will increase wear and
cause damage to the engine and fuel
system. The use of non-approved fuels
and / or fuel additives will result in a limi-
tation of your warranty rights.
Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is used in
your vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel
are available, use summer or winter fuel
properly according to the following tem-
perature conditions.
Above -5°C(23°F) ... Summer type
diesel fuel.
Below -5°C(23°F) ... Winter type diesel
fuel.
Watch the fuel level in the tank very care-
fully : If the engine stops through fuel fail-
ure, the circuits must be completely
purged to permit restarting.
CAUTION
Do not allow petrol or water to enter
the fuel tank. If this happens, the
tank should be completely drained
and the fuel lines must all be
cleaned out to prevent the fuel
pump from becoming contaminat-
ed.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
It is recommended to use the regu-
lated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)
and unspecified additives, it can
cause the DPF system to be dam-
aged and white smoke can be emit-
ted.
EL(FL) UK 1.QXP 12/16/2014 8:50 PM Page 4
15
Introduction
Biodiesel
Commercially supplied Diesel blends of
no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly
known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in
your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214
or equivalent specifications. (EN stands
for "European Norm"). The use of biofu-
els exceeding 7%, made from rapeseed
methyl ester (RME), fatty acid methyl
ester (FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester
(VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding
7% with biodiesel will cause increased
wear or damage to the engine and fuel
system. Repair or replacement of worn or
damaged components due to the use of
non approved fuels will not be covered by
the manufactures warranty.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure
to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control, an accident or
vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (higher
ground clearance, track, etc.) give this
vehicle a higher centre of gravity than
other types of vehicles. In other words
they are not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as conventional 2-wheel
drive vehicles. Avoid sharp turns or
abrupt manoeuvres. Again, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control, an accident or vehicle
rollover. Be sure to read the “Reducing
the risk of a rollover” driving guide-
lines, in section 5 of this manual.
No special run-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
Do not race the engine.
Whilst driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly run-in the engine.
Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-
cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-
erly.
Don't tow a trailer/caravan during the
first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of opera-
tion.
CAUTION
Never use any fuel, whether
diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise,
that fails to meet the latest petro-
leum industry specification.
Never use any fuel additives or
treatments that are not recom-
mended or approved by the vehi-
cle manufacturer.
VEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
VEHICLE RUN-IN PROCESS
EL(FL) UK 1.QXP 12/16/2014 8:50 PM Page 5
Introduction
61
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Engine oil pressure warning
light
Seat belt warning light
Door and tailgate open position
light
High beam indicator
Light on indicator*
Turn signal indicator
ABS warning light
Parking brake & Brake fluid
warning light
4WD system warning light*
4WD LOCK indicator*
Malfunction indicator*
Air bag warning light
Cruise SET indicator*
Low fuel level warning light
Charging system warning light
Door ajar warning light
Glow indicator (Diesel only)
Fuel filter warning light
(Diesel only)
Cruise indicator*
ESC indicator*
ESC OFF indicator*
Immobiliser indicator*
Shift pattern indicator*
Front fog light indicator*
Rear fog light indicator*
Low beam indicator*
Electric power steering (EPS)
system warning light*
Key out warning*
KEY
OUT
DBC indicator*
Tailgate open warning light
Sunroof open warning light
Engine oil level warning light*
Manual transaxle shift indicator*/
Auto transaxle shift indicator*
EL(FL) UK 1.QXP 12/16/2014 8:50 PM Page 6
17
Introduction
Low tyre pressure position
telltale*
ECO indicator*
ECO
*: if equipped
: For more detailed explanations, refer
to section 4, “Instrument cluster”.
Engine coolant temperature
warning light
Auto stop for ISG system
indicator*
Low tyre pressure telltale*
EL(FL) UK 1.QXP 12/16/2014 8:50 PM Page 7
Your vehicle at a glance
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2
EL(FL) UK 2.QXP 2/11/2015 4:16 PM Page 1
Your vehicle at a glance
22
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Door lock/unlock button ........................4-16
2. Power window switches*........................4-21
3. Central door lock switch* ......................4-16
4. Power window lock switch* ....................4-24
5. Outside rearview mirror control
switch*....................................................4-44
6. Outside rearview mirror folding
button*....................................................4-45
7. Fuel filler lid release lever......................4-27
8. Instrument panel illumination
control switch* ......................................4-47
9. 4WD Lock button*..................................5-29
10.
Idle Stop and Go system OFF
button* ..................................................5-17
11. Heated steering wheel button* ............4-35
12. DBC button* ........................................5-46
13. ESC OFF button* ................................5-41
14. Fuse box ..............................................7-44
15. Steering wheel ....................................4-34
16. Seat........................................................3-2
17. Brake pedal..........................................5-35
18. Accelerator pedal
19. Bonnet release lever............................4-25
* : if equipped
OEL013001R-1
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
EL(FL) UK 2.QXP 2/11/2015 4:16 PM Page 2
23
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Light control/Turn signals..............4-100
2. Steering wheel audio controls* ....4-146
3. Bluetooth phone controls* ....4-179, 232
4. Instrument cluster ..........................4-46
5. Horn ................................................4-36
6. Driver’s front air bag........................3-50
7. Wiper/Washer................................4-106
8. Auto cruise controls* ......................5-50
9. Engine start/stop button* ..................5-9
10.Digital clock and Audio/AVN*
....................................................4-140
11. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
indicator*........................................3-47
12. Hazard warning flasher switch......4-98
13. Climate control system*......4-115, 124
14. Seat warmer*................................3-11
15. Smart parking assist system ON/OFF
button* ..........................................4-92
16. 4WD Lock button* ........................5-29
17. Parking assist system ON/OFF
button* ..........................................4-81
18. Cigarette lighter* ........................4-137
19. AUX, USB*..................................4-140
20. Power outlet* ..............................4-139
21. Shift lever ............................5-19, 5-22
22. Passenger’s front air bag* ............3-50
23. Glove box....................................4-134
* : if equipped
OEL013002R-1
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
EL(FL) UK 2.QXP 2/11/2015 4:17 PM Page 3
Your vehicle at a glance
42
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OEL070301R
1. Engine coolant reservoir..................7-17
2. Engine oil filler cap ..........................7-15
3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir.............7-19
4. Air cleaner .......................................7-23
5. Fuse box..........................................7-44
6. Negative battery terminal ................7-30
7. Positive battery terminal ..................7-30
8. Radiator cap ....................................7-18
9. Engine oil dipstick............................7-15
10. Windscreen washer fluid
reservoir.........................................7-20
* : if equipped
Petrol Engine (1.6L)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
EL(FL) UK 2.QXP 2/11/2015 4:17 PM Page 4
25
Your vehicle at a glance
OEL073300R
1. Engine coolant reservoir..................7-17
2. Engine oil filler cap ..........................7-15
3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir.............7-19
4. Air cleaner .......................................7-23
5. Fuse box..........................................7-44
6. Negative battery terminal ................7-30
7. Positive battery terminal ..................7-30
8. Radiator cap ....................................7-18
9. Engine oil dipstick............................7-15
10. Windscreen washer fluid
reservoir.........................................7-20
* : if equipped
Petrol Engine (2.0L) - MPI/GDI
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
EL(FL) UK 2.QXP 2/11/2015 4:17 PM Page 5
26
Your vehicle at a glance
OEL070302R
1. Engine coolant reservoir ..................7-17
2. Fuse box ..........................................7-44
3. Fuel filter ..........................................7-21
4. Engine oil dipstick ............................7-15
5. Engine oil filler cap ..........................7-15
6. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir ............7-19
7. Air cleaner........................................7-23
8. Negative battery terminal ................7-30
9. Positive battery terminal ..................7-30
10. Radiator cap ..................................7-18
11. Windscreen washer fluid
reservoir ........................................7-20
* : if equipped
Diesel Engine (1.7L)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
EL(FL) UK 2.QXP 2/11/2015 4:17 PM Page 6
27
Your vehicle at a glance
OLM079002R
1. Engine coolant reservoir ..................7-17
2. Fuse box ..........................................7-44
3. Fuel filter ..........................................7-21
4. Engine oil dipstick ............................7-15
5. Engine oil filler cap ..........................7-15
6. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir ............7-19
7. Air cleaner........................................7-23
8. Negative battery terminal ................7-30
9. Positive battery terminal ..................7-30
10. Radiator cap ..................................7-18
11. Windscreen washer fluid
reservoir ........................................7-20
* : if equipped
Diesel Engine (2.0L)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
EL(FL) UK 2.QXP 2/11/2015 4:17 PM Page 7
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
• Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
• Pre-tensioner seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Air bag - supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . 3-43
• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
• Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
• Air bag warning and indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
• Why didn’t my air bag go off in a collision?
(Inflation and non-inflation conditions of
the air bag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
• Additional safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
• Adding equipment to or modifying your
air bag-equipped vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:54 PM Page 1
Safety features of your vehicle
23
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer*
(6) Head restraint
Rear seat
(7) Seatback folding
(8) Head restraint
(9) Armrest
(10) Seat warmer*
* if equipped
SEAT
OEL039001R
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:54 PM Page 2
33
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Driver’s seat
Never attempt to adjust seat
whilst the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap por-
tion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back as
possible from the steering wheel
whilst maintaining comfortable
control of the vehicle. It is recom-
mended that your chest is at least
10 inches (250 mm) away from
the steering wheel.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly and be sure
there are no other occupants
around the seat. If the seatback is
returned without being held and
controlled, the back of the seat
could spring forward resulting in
accidental injury to a person struck
by the seatback.
WARNING - Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for front seat pas-
senger
Riding in a vehicle with a front seat-
back reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
front seat is reclined during an
accident, the occupant’s hips may
slide under the lap portion of the
seat belt applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the front
passenger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and passenger. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap por-
tion of the seat belt during an acci-
dent or a sudden stop. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result
because the seat belt can't operate
normally.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:54 PM Page 3
Safety features of your vehicle
43
WARNING - Rear seatbacks
The rear seatback must be
securely latched. If not, passen-
gers and objects could be thrown
forward resulting in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
Luggage and other cargo should
be laid flat in the cargo area. If
objects are large, heavy, or must
be piled, they must be secured.
Under no circumstances should
cargo be piled higher than the
seatbacks. Failure to follow these
warnings could result in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop, collision or rollover.
No passenger should ride in the
cargo area or sit or lie on folded
seatbacks whilst the vehicle is
moving. All passengers must be
properly seated in seats and
restrained properly whilst riding.
When resetting the seatback to
the upright position, make sure it
is securely latched by pushing it
forward and reverse.
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked into
place by attempting to move the
seat forward or reverse without
using the lock release lever.
Sudden or unexpected movement
of the driver's seat could cause you
to lose control of the vehicle result-
ing in an accident.
WARNING
Do not adjust the seat whilst
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat cushion forward may cause
strong pressure on the abdomen.
Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
whilst the seat is moving.
Do not put a cigarette lighter on
the floor or seat. When you oper-
ate the seat, gas may gush out of
the lighter and cause fire.
If there are occupants in the rear
seats, be careful whilst adjusting
the front seat position.
Use extreme caution when pick-
ing small objects trapped under
the seats or between the seat and
the centre console. Your hands
might be cut or injured by the
sharp edges of the seats mecha-
nism.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:54 PM Page 4
35
Safety features of your vehicle
Front seat
Manual adjustment
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up
and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
Adjusting the seatback recliner
To recline the seatback, rotate the knob
forward or rearward to the desired angle.
Seat cushion height
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
To change the height of the seat cushion,
push the lever upwards or downwards.
To lower the seat cushion, push down
the lever several times.
To raise the seat cushion, pull up the
lever several times.
OEL039003/H OEL039004/HOEL039002/H
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:54 PM Page 5
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
moving the lever on the side of seatback.
Pivoting the lever increases or decreases
lumbar support.
Automatic adjustment (if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by using
the control switches located on the out-
side of the seat cushion. Before driving,
adjust the seat to the proper position so
as to easily control the steering wheel,
pedals and switches on the instrument
panel.
WARNING
The power seat is operable with the
ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should never be
left unattended in the vehicle.
CAUTION
The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is complet-
ed. Excessive operation may
damage the electrical equipment.
When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount of
electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power seat
longer than necessary whilst the
engine is not running.
Do not operate two or more power
seat control switches at the same
time. Doing so may result in
power seat motor or electrical
component malfunction.
OEL039005/H
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:54 PM Page 6
37
Safety features of your vehicle
Forward and backward
Push the control switch forward or back-
ward to move the seat to the desired
position. Release the switch once the
seat reaches the desired position.
Seatback angle
Push the control switch forward or back-
ward to move the seatback to the desired
angle. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seat height (for driver’s seat)
Pull the control switch up to raise or
down to lower the seat cushion. Release
the switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
OLM039007/H OLM039008/HOLM039006/H
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:54 PM Page 7
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Lumbar support (for drivers seat)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the button.
Head restraint
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a head restraint for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The head restraint not only provides
comfort for the driver and front passen-
ger, but also helps protect the head and
neck in the event of a collision.
OLM039303N
WARNING
For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the head
restraint should be adjusted so
the middle of the head restraint is
at the same height of the centre
of gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the centre of gravity of
most people's head is similar
with the height of the top of their
eyes. Also, adjust the head
restraint as close to your head as
possible. For this reason, the use
of a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not
recommended.
Do not operate the vehicle with
the head restraints removed as
severe injury to the occupants
may occur in the event of an acci-
dent. Head restraints may provide
protection against neck injuries
when properly adjusted.
Do not adjust the head restraint
position of the driver's seat
whilst the vehicle is in motion.
OLM039009/H
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:54 PM Page 8
39
Safety features of your vehicle
Active head restraint (if equipped)
The active head restraint is designed to
move forward and upward during a rear
impact. This helps prevent the driver's
and front passenger’s heads from mov-
ing backward and thus helps minimise
neck injuries.
Adjusting the angle (if equipped)
The head restraint angle may be adjust-
ed by pulling or pushing the lower part of
the head restraint. Adjust the head
restraint so that it properly supports the
head and neck.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint, pull it up to
the desired position (1). To lower the
head restraint, push and hold the release
button (2) on the head restraint support
and lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
OEL039010 OEL039011
WARNING
Excessive pulling or pushing may
damage the head restraint.
HNF2041-1/H
WARNING
A gap between the seat and the
head restraint release button may
appear when seating on the seat or
when you push or pull the seat. Be
careful not to get your finger, etc.
caught in the gap.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:54 PM Page 9
Safety features of your vehicle
103
Removal
To remove the head restraint:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever or switch (1).
2. Raise head restraint as far as it can go.
3. Press the head restraint release button
(3) whilst pulling the head restraint up (4).
Reinstall
To reinstall the head restraint :
1. Put the head restraint poles (2) into the
holes whilst pressing the release
buton (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever or switch (3).
3. Adjust the head restraint to the appro-
priate height.
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a seat
with the head restraint removed.
OEL034303R
OLM034305R
Type A
Type B
OYFH034205
CAUTION
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the Head restraint and
seat cushion raised, the Head
restraint may come in contact with
the sunvisor or other parts of the
vehicle.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 10
311
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
front seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's
seat or the front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
"OFF" position.
The temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
OLM039013R
OFF HIGH ( ) LOW ( )
CAUTION
When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
petrol. Doing so may damage the
surface of the heater or seats.
To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers whilst the seat
warmer is in operation.
Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could
occur.
Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer or
airventilation system.
WARNING
Always make sure the head restraint
locks into position after reinstalling
and adjusting it properly.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 11
Safety features of your vehicle
123
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s and driver’s
seatbacks.
Rear seat
Head restraint
The rear seat(s) is equipped with head
restraints in all the seating positions for
the occupant's safety and comfort.
The head restraint not only provides
comfort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the event of
a collision.
OLM039304N
*
* if equipped
OEL039015
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pockets. In an acci-
dent they could come loose from
the pocket and injure vehicle occu-
pants.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time. In particular,
the driver must exercise extreme
care for the following types of pas-
sengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or hand-
icapped persons, or hospital out-
patients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 12
313
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint, pull it up to
the desired position (1). To lower the
head restraint, push and hold the release
button (2) on the head restraint support
and lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it as
far as it can go then press the release
button (1) whilst pulling the head restraint
up (2).
To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint poles (3) into the holes
whilst pressing the release button (1).
Then adjust it to the appropriate height.
OEL039018
WARNING
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position after adjusting it to
properly protect the occupants.
WARNING
For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the head
restraint should be adjusted so
the middle of the head restraint is
at the same height of the centre
of gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the centre of gravity of
most people's head is similar
with the height of the top of their
eyes. Also adjust the head
restraint as close to your head as
possible. For this reason, the use
of a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not
recommended.
Do not operate the vehicle with
the head restraints removed.
Severe injury to an occupant may
occur in the event of an accident.
Head restraints may provide pro-
tection against severe neck
injuries when properly adjusted.
OEL039017
CAUTION
When there is no occupant in the
rear seats, adjust the height of the
head restraint to the lowest posi-
tion.The rear seat head restraint can
reduce the visibility of the rear area.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 13
Safety features of your vehicle
143
Armrest
To use the armrest, pull it forward from
the seatback.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
rear seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm rear seats.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
"OFF" position.
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
CAUTION
When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
petrol. Doing so may damage the
surface of the heater or seats.
To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers whilst the seat
warmer is in operation.
Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer or
airventilation system.
OLM039020OLM039019
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 14
315
Safety features of your vehicle
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to facil-
itate carrying long items or to increase
the luggage capacity of the vehicle.
1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the
pocket between the rear seatback and
cushion, and insert the rear seat belt
webbing in the guide to prevent the
seat belt from being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
3.Lower the rear head restraints to the
lowest position.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time. In particular,
the driver must exercise extreme
care for the following types of pas-
sengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or hand-
icapped persons, or hospital out-
patients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
WARNING
The purpose of the fold-down rear
seatbacks is to allow you to carry
longer objects that could not be
accommodated in the cargo area.
Never allow passengers sit on top
of the folded down seatback whilst
the vehicle is moving. This is not a
proper seating position and no seat
belts are available for use. This
could result in serious injury or
death in case of an accident or sud-
den stop. Objects carried on the
folded down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of the
front seatbacks. This could allow
cargo to slide forward and cause
injury or damage during sudden
stops.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 15
Safety features of your vehicle
163
4.Pull on the seatback folding lever, then
fold the seat toward the front of the
vehicle.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the
seatback backward. Pull the seatback
firmly until it clicks into place. Make
sure the seatback is locked in place.
6. Return the rear seat belt to the proper
position.
7.When the seatback is completely
installed, check the red label of seat-
back folding lever again.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after being
folded down:
Be careful not to damage the seat
belt webbing or buckle. Do not
allow the seat belt webbing or
buckle to get caught or pinched in
the rear seat. Ensure that the seat-
back is completely locked into its
upright position by pushing on the
top of the seatback. Otherwise, in
an accident or sudden stop, the
seat could fold down and allow
cargo to enter the passenger com-
partment, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly. If the seatback
is returned without holding it, the
back of the seat could spring for-
ward resulting in injury caused by
being struck by the seatback.
OEL039022OEL039021
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 16
317
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park)
or the manual transaxle is in R
(Reverse) or 1st, and the parking
brake is securely applied whenever
loading or unloading cargo. Failure
to take these steps may allow the
vehicle to move if shift lever is inad-
vertently moved to another posi-
tion.
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision and caus-
ing injury to the vehicle occupants.
Special care of objects should be
taken when placing them in the rear
seats, since those may hit the front
seat occupants in a frontal colli-
sion.
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear seatbacks
to the upright position, remember
to return the rear shoulder belts to
their proper position. Routing the
seat belt webbing through the rear
seat belt guides will help keep the
belts from being trapped behind or
under the seats.
CAUTION - Damaging rear
seat belt buckles
When you fold the rear seatback or
put luggage on the rear seat cush-
ion, insert the buckle in the pocket
between the rear seatback and
cushion. Doing so can prevent the
buckle from being damaged by the
rear seatback or luggage.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 17
Safety features of your vehicle
183
Seat belt restraint system
SEAT BELTS
(Continued)
Never wear a seat belt over frag-
ile objects. If there is a sudden
stop or impact, the seat belt can
damage it.
Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt can't do its job as
well. In a collision, it could even
cut into you. Be sure the belt
webbing is straight and not twist-
ed.
Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged, replace it.
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or the
pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section
of the belt across the abdominal
area must be avoided.
(Continued)
WARNING
For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the car
is moving.
Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
Children age 12 and younger
must always be properly
restrained in the rear seat. Never
allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat. If a child over 12
must be seated in the front seat,
he/she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as
far back as possible.
Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across your
collarbone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and par-
ticularly battery acid.
Cleaning may safely be carried out
using mild soap and water.The belt
should be replaced if webbing
becomes frayed, contaminated or
damaged. It is essential to replace
the entire assembly after it has
been worn in a severe impact even
if damage to the assembly is not
obvious. Belts should not be worn
with straps twisted. Each belt
assembly must only be used by one
occupant; it is dangerous to put a
belt around a child being carried on
the occupant's lap.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 18
319
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt warning
Type A
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately
6 seconds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened after
the ignition switch is ON, the seat belt
warning light blinks again for approxi-
mately 6 seconds.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned ON or
if it is unfastened after the ignition switch
is ON, the seat belt warning chime will
sound for approximately 6 seconds. At
this time, if the seat belt is fastened, the
chime will stop at once. (if equipped)
Type B
(1) Driver’s seat belt warning light
(2) Front passenger’s seat belt warning
light
As a reminder to the driver and front pas-
senger, the driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt warning lights will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch ON regardless of
belt fastening.
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
belt is not fastened when the ignition
switch is turned ON or if it is disconnect-
ed after the ignition switch is turned ON,
the corresponding seat belt warning light
will illuminate until the belt is fastened.
1GQA2083
WARNING
No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from oper-
ating to remove slack, or prevent
the seat belt assembly from being
adjusted to remove slack.
When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt
in buckles of other seat. It's very
dangerous and you may not be
protected by the seat belt proper-
ly.
Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the
seat belt repeatedly whilst driv-
ing. This could result in loss of
control, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are
hard or can break easily.
Make sure there is nothing in the
buckle. The seat belt may not be
fastened securely.
OEL033060R
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 19
Safety features of your vehicle
203
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 5mph (9km/h), the
illuminated warning light will start to blink
until you drive under 3mph (6km/h).
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 12mph (20km/h) the
seat belt warning chime will sound for
approximately 100 seconds and the cor-
responding warning light will blink.
NOTICE
You can find the front passenger’s
seat belt warning light on the centre
fascia panel.
Although the front passenger seat is
not occupied, the seat belt warning
light will blink or illuminate for 6 sec-
onds.
The front passenger's seat belt warn-
ing may operate when luggage is
placed on the front passenger seat.
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt por-
tion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will be
able to pull the belt out smoothly.
B180A01NF/H
1
2
WARNING
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the front passen-
ger's seat belt warning system. It is
important for the driver to instruct
the passenger as to the proper
seating instructions as contained
in this manual.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 20
321
Safety features of your vehicle
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of 4 positions for max-
imum comfort and safety.
If the height of the adjusting seat belt is
too near your neck, you will not be getting
the most effective protection. The shoul-
der portion should be adjusted so that it
lies across your chest and midway over
your shoulder nearest the door and not
your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) whilst press-
ing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
OLM039026
Front seat
WARNING
Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appro-
priate height. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or
face. Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious injuries
in an accident.
Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to per-
sonal injury or death. Replace
your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
B200A01NF/H
WARNING
You should place the lap belt por-
tion as low as possible and snugly
across your hips, not on your waist.
If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a
collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one
should be over and the other under,
as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm nearest the door.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 21
Safety features of your vehicle
223
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (1) in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should auto-
matically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
3 Point rear centre belt (if equipped)
To fasten the rear centre belt
1. Extract the tongue plate from the hole
on the belt assembly cover and slowly
pull the tongue plates out from the
retractor.
2. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the
open end of the buckle (C) until an
audible “click" is heard, indicating the
latch is locked. Make sure the belt is
not twisted.
B210A01NF/H
1
1KMB3441
CAUTION - Cargo
Be sure that the cargo is securely
loaded in the rear cargo area. Doing
not so may damage the rear centre
safety belt in sudden stop or certain
collisions.
OLM039056L
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 22
323
Safety features of your vehicle
3. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert the
tongue plate (B) into the open end of
the buckle (D) until an audible “click” is
heard, indicating the latch is locked.
Make sure the belt is not twisted.
There will be an audible “click” when the
tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt
automatically adjusts to the proper length
only after the lap belt is adjusted manu-
ally so that it fits snugly around your hips,
if you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let you
move around. If there is a sudden stop or
impact, the belt will lock into position. It
will also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
To unfasten the rear centre belt
1.Press the release button on the buckle
(D) and remove the tongue plate (B)
from the buckle (D).
1KMB3443
CAUTION
When using the rear centre seat
belt, the buckle with the “CENTER”
mark must be used.
WARNING
When using the rear seat centre
belt, you must lock all tongue
plates and buckles. If any tongue
plate or buckle is not locked, it will
increase the chance of injury in the
event of collision.
1KMB3451
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 23
Safety features of your vehicle
243
2.To retract the rear centre seatbelt,
insert the buckle into the web release
hole (C). Pull up on the seat belt web
(A) and allow the webbing to retract
automatically.
3.Insert the tongue plate (A) into the hole
on the belt assembly cover.
Stowing the rear seat belt
The rear seat belt buckles can be stowed
in the pocket between the rear seatback
and cushion when not in use.
OLM039057L
1KMB3453
OLM039029L
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 24
325
Safety features of your vehicle
Routing the seat belt webbing through
the rear seat belt guides will help keep
the belts from being trapped behind or
under the seats.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten the
belt webbing by pulling it up.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in crashes where
the frontal collision is severe enough.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions,
the pre-tensioner will activate and pull
the seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive seat belt
tension on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt. (if equipped)
CAUTION
When using the seat belt, use it
after taking it out of the guides.
If you pull the seat belt when it is
stored in the guides, it may damage
the guides and/or belt webbing.
OED030300/H
OLM039031
WARNING
For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or twisted
and always sit properly on your
seat.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:55 PM Page 25
Safety features of your vehicle
263
The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-
sists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustra-
tion:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly
(driver side, if equipped)
NOTICE
When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal oper-
ating conditions and are not haz-
ardous.
Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged peri-
ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-
oughly after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-
ed.
Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pre-
tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument panel
will illuminate for approximately 6
seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned to the "ON" position, and
then it should turn off.
8KMB3311/H
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1.The seat belt must be worn cor-
rectly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow
all of the important information
and precautions about your vehi-
cle’s occupant safety features –
including seat belts and air bags
– that are provided in this manu-
al.
2. Be sure you and your passen-
gers always wear seat belts prop-
erly.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 26
327
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After acti-
vation, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts,
of any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. We recommend
that the system be serviced by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat belt
system in any manner.
(Continued)
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, this warning light
will illuminate even if there is no
malfunction of the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illuminat-
ing for approximately 6 seconds, or
if it illuminates whilst the vehicle is
being driven, we recommend that
the system be inspected by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
(Continued)
Improper handling of the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tension-
er seat belt assemblies may lead
to improper operation or inadver-
tent activation and serious injury.
Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehi-
cle.
If the vehicle or pre-tensioner
seat belt must be discarded, we
recommend that you contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
CAUTION
Body work on the front area of the
vehicle may damage the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt system. Therefore,
we recommend that the system be
serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 27
Safety features of your vehicle
283
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. For
more information about the use of these
restraints, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tem” in this section.
NOTICE
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly
restrained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the require-
ments of the Safety Standards of your
country. Before buying any child
restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets Safety
Standards of your country. The restraint
must be appropriate for your child's
height and weight. Check the label on
the child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants
could be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the
vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and occu-
pant seat contained in this manual.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and chil-
dren. Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a vehi-
cle. The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child
against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 28
329
Safety features of your vehicle
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts.The lap portion should
be fastened and snugged on the hips
and as low as possible. Check belt fit
periodically. A child's squirming could put
the belt out of position. Children are
afforded the most safety in the event of
an accident when they are restrained by
a proper restraint system in the rear seat.
If a larger child (over age 12) must be
seated in the front seat, the child should
be securely restrained by the available
lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position. Children
age 12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a
child age 12 and under in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-
es the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the centre of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
Pregnant women
The use of a seat belt is recommended
for pregnant women.The seat belt should
be worn as low and snugly as possible
across the hips, not across the abdomen.
A qualified Medical Practitioner should
be consulted for further information.
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face whilst the vehicle is in
motion.
If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is
a risk of death or serious injury.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen
where the fetus is located or above
the abdomen where the belt could
crush the fetus during an impact.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 29
Safety features of your vehicle
303
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported. For
specific recommendations, the advice of
a qualified Medical Practioner should be
sought.
One person per belt
The seat belts are designed to be used
by one seat occupant only. The use of a
seat belt by more than one person
increases the levels of injury which may
be sustained in the event of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve max-
imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-
tem, all passengers should be sitting up
and the front seats should be in an
upright position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper protec-
tion if the person is lying down in the rear
seat or if the front seat is in a reclined
position.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt assemblies must never be dis-
assembled or modified in any way. In
addition, care should be exercised to
ensure that the belt assemblies do not
become damaged by being trapped in
seat mechanisms, door shuts etc.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a col-
lision or sudden stop. The protec-
tion of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against
your hips and chest to work proper-
ly. The more the seatback is
reclined, the greater the chance
that an occupant's hips will slide
under the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occupant's
neck could strike the shoulder belt.
Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their seats,
properly belted, and with the seat-
backs upright.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after the rear
seatback was folded down, be care-
ful not to damage the seat belt web-
bing or buckle. Be sure that the
webbing or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear seat.
A seat belt with damaged webbing
or buckle will not be as strong and
could possibly fail during a colli-
sion or sudden stop, resulting in
serious injury. If the webbing or
buckles are damaged, get them
replaced immediately.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 30
331
Safety features of your vehicle
Periodic inspection
It is recommended that all seat belts be
inspected periodically for wear or dam-
age of any kind. Parts of the system that
are damaged should be replaced as
soon as possible. Under no circum-
stances must any part of the seat belt
assemblies be dismantled or repaired.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned using a mild soap solution and
warm water. Bleach, dye, strong deter-
gents or abrasives should not be used
since the fabric may become damaged
and weakened.
When to replace seat belts
The entire seat belt assembly or assem-
blies should be inspected by an autho-
rised repairer if the vehicle has been
involved in an accident even if no dam-
age is evident. We recommend addition-
al questions concerning seat belt opera-
tion be directed to a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 31
Safety features of your vehicle
323
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimise the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
manoeuvre. According to accident statis-
tics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat belts
provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be prop-
erly placed and installed in the rear seat.
You must use a commercially available
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Safety Standards of
your country. Child restraint systems are
designed to be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a tether anchor
and/or ISOFIX anchors (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
WARNING
A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger side air bag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant
or child seat. Thus only use a
child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
A seat belt or child restraint sys-
tem can become very hot if it is
left in a closed vehicle on a sunny
day, even if the outside tempera-
ture does not feel hot. Be sure to
check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the lug-
gage area or fasten it with a seat
belt so that it will not be thrown
forward in case of a sudden stop
or an accident.
Children may be seriously injured
or killed by an inflating air bag.
All children, even those too large
for child restraints, must ride in
the rear seat.
WARNING
To reduce the chance or serious or
fatal injuries:
Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passen-
ger seat can be forcefully struck
by an inflating air bag resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.
Always follow the instructions for
installation and use of the child
restraint maker.
Always make sure the child seat
is secured properly in the car and
your child is securely restrained
in the child seat.
Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
Never put a seat belt over your-
self and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into the
child causing serious internal
injuries.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 32
333
Safety features of your vehicle
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required.This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the man-
ufacturer's instructions. For safety rea-
sons, we recommend that the child
restraint system be used in the rear
seats.
(Continued)
Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle – not even for a short
time. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in serious
injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadver-
tently cause the vehicle to move,
entangle themselves in the win-
dows, or lock themselves or oth-
ers inside the vehicle.
Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
Children often squirm and repo-
sition themselves improperly.
Never let a child ride with the
shoulder belt under their arm or
behind their back. Always prop-
erly position and secure children
in rear seat.
Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floorboard of
a moving vehicle. During a colli-
sion or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicles interior, resulting in
serious injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate security in an acci-
dent.
Seat belts can become very hot,
especially when the car is parked
in direct sunlight. Always check
seat belt buckles before fasten-
ing them over a child.
After an accident, we recommend
that the system be checked by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint system
because of the driver's seat,
install the child restraint system
in the rear left seat.
CRS09
OUN026150
Rearward-facing child restraint system
Forward-facing child restraint system
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 33
Safety features of your vehicle
343
Installing a child restraint system by
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or centre rear seats, do the fol-
lowing:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, follow-
ing the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-
bing is not twisted.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the vehicle and the child is not
properly restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
If the seat belt does not operate
as described in this section, we
recommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint system and the instruc-
tions provided with the child
restraint system could increase
the chance and/or severity of
injury in an accident.
If the vehicle head restraint pre-
vents proper installation of a
child seat (as described in the
child seat system manual), the
head restraint of the respective
seating position shall be read-
justed or entirely removed.
WARNING
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that an
inflating passenger-side air bag
could impact the rear-facing child
restraint and kill the child.
E2MS103005
WARNING
When using the rear centre seat
belt, you should also refer to “3
point rear centre seat belt” in this
chapter.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 34
335
Safety features of your vehicle
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat
belt to take up any slack. After installa-
tion of the child restraint system, try to
move it in all directions to be sure the
child restraint system is securely
installed.
If you need to tighten the belt, pull more
webbing toward the retractor. When you
unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to
retract, the retractor will automatically
revert back to its normal seated passen-
ger emergency locking usage condition.
OEN036101
OEN036104
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 35
Safety features of your vehicle
363
Child Seat Restraint Suitability For Seat Position using the Seat Belt - For Europe
Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your
children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.
U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
U* : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
(Seat position : foremost, Seat back : upright)
Age Group
Seating Position
Front passenger Rear outboard Rear centre
0 : Up to 10 kg
(0 - 9 months)
U* U U
0+ : Up to 13 kg
(0 - 2 years)
U* U U
I : 9 kg to 18 kg
(9 months - 4 years)
U* U U
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg
(4 - 12 years)
U* U U
WARNING
We recommend that a child
restraint seat be installed in the
rear seat, even if the front passen-
ger's air bag ON/OFF switch is set
to the OFF position. To ensure the
safety of your child, the front pas-
senger’s air bag must be deactivat-
ed when it should be necessary to
install a child restraint seat on the
front passenger seat in exceptional
circumstances.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 36
337
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint seat with
“Tether Anchor” system (if equipped)
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the back of the rear seats.
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head
restraint, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the
head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the seat.
OEL039034
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether or to a
single lower anchorage point. The
increased load caused by multiple
seats may cause the tethers or
anchorage points to break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not prop-
erly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
OEL039033
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 37
Safety features of your vehicle
383
Securing a child restraint system
with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether
Anchorage” system (if equipped)
ISOFIX is a standardised method of fit-
ting child seats that eliminates the need
to use the standard adult seat belt to
secure the seat in the vehicle. This
enables a much more secure and posi-
tive location with the added benefit of
easier and quicker installation.
An ISOFIX-seat may only be installed if it
has vehicle-specific or universal approval
in accordance with the requirements of
ECE-R 44.
There are ISOFIX symbols located on
the lower portion of each side of the rear
seatbacks. These symbols indicate the
position of the lower anchors for child
restraints so equipped.
OLM039035R OLM039036N
ISOFIX Anchor
ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint sys-
tem is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or separate
causing death or serious injury.
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 38
339
Safety features of your vehicle
Both rear outboard seats are equipped
with a pair of ISOFIX anchorages as well
as a corresponding top tether anchorage
on the back side of the back rest. The
ISOFIX anchorages are located between
seat cushion and back rest, marked with
the ISOFIX icon.
For installation, CRS ISOFIX connecters
have to engage with the vehicles ISOFIX
anchorages (listen for a CLICK, check
potential visual indicators on the CRS
and cross-check by pulling).
CRS with universal approval to ECE-R
44 need to be fixed additionally with a top
tether strap connected to the correspon-
ding top tether anchorage point in the
back rest.
The installing and the use of a child-seat
has to be done according to the
installing-manual, which is added to the
ISOFIX-seat.
WARNING
Install the child restraint seat fully
rearward against the seatback with
the seatback reclined two positions
from the most upright latched posi-
tion.
OLM039053N
WARNING
When using the vehicle's
"ISOFIX" system to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat,
all unused vehicle rear seat belt
metal latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt web-
bing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent the
child from reaching and taking
hold of unretracted seat belts.
Unlatched metal latch plates or
tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
Do not place anything around the
lower anchors. Also make sure
that the seat belt is not caught in
the lower anchors.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 39
Safety features of your vehicle
403
To secure the child restraint seat
1. To engage the child restraint seat to
the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child
restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX
anchor. Listen for the audible “click”
sound.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
child restraint hook holder and tighten
to secure the seat. (Refer to the previ-
ous page.)
(Continued)
Do not mount more than one
child restraint to a child restraint
lower anchorage point. The
improper increased load may
cause the anchorage points or
tether anchor to break, causing
serious injury or death.
Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-
patible child restraint seat only to
the appropriate locations shown
in the illustration.
Always follow the installation and
use instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child
restraint.
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt web-
bing to get scratched or pinched by
the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX
anchor during installation.
WARNING
Do not install a child restraint
seat at the centre of the rear seat
using the vehicle's ISOFIX
anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are
only provided for the left and
right outboard rear seating posi-
tions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX
anchors by attempting to attach a
child restraint seat in the middle
of the rear seat to the ISOFIX
anchors.
In a crash, the child restraint seat
ISOFIX attachments may not be
strong enough to secure the child
restraint seat properly in the cen-
tre of the rear seat and may
break, causing serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 40
341
Safety features of your vehicle
Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions - For Europe
F ISO/L1 - X X -
G ISO/L2 - X X -
E ISO/R1 - IUF IUF -
E ISO/R1 - IUF IUF -
D ISO/R2 - IUF IUF -
C ISO/R3 - IUF IUF -
D ISO/R2 - IUF IUF -
C ISO/R3 - IUF IUF -
B ISO/F2 - IUF IUF -
B1 ISO/F2X - IUF IUF -
A ISO/F3 - IUF IUF -
Rear Outboard
(Passenger side)
Rear Outboard
(Driver side)
Front Passenger
FixtureSize ClassMass Group
Carrycot
0 : UP to 10kg
0+ : UP to 13kg
I : 9 to 18kg
Rear Centre
vehicle ISOFIX positions
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal
category approved for use in the mass group.
IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems (CRS) given
in the attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the "specific
vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in
this mass group and/or this size class.
* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the foremost
position of the passenger seat.
* ISOFIX child restraint system size classes and fixtures
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height
650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape
Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing CRS
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 41
Safety features of your vehicle
423
Recommended child restraint systems – For Europe
CRS Manufacturer information
FAIR S.r.l http://www.fairbimbofix.com
Britax Römer http://www.britax.com
Mass Group Name Manufacturer Type of Fixation
ECE-R44
Approval No.
Group 0-1
FAIR G0/1 S FAIR S.r.l
rearward facing with vehicle
E4 04443718
(0-18kg)
specific ISOFIX platform type “D”
Baby Safe Plus Britax Römer with vehicle 3-point safety seatbelt E1 04301146
FAIR G0/1 S FAIR S.r.l
forward facing with vehicle
E4 04443718
specific ISOFIX platform type “A”
Britax Römer
vehicle ISOFIX lower anchorage
E1 04301133
Duo Plus + Top Tether
Britax Römer with vehicle 3-point safety seatbelt E1 04301133
Group 1
(9-18kg)
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 42
343
Safety features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag*
(3) Side air bag*
(4) Curtain air bag*
(5) Front passenger’s air bag ON/OFF
switch*
* : if equipped
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers must
always wear the safety belts pro-
vided in order to minimise the
risk and severity of injury in the
event of a collision or rollover.
SRS and pretensioners contain
explosive chemicals.
If scraping a vehicle without
removing SRS and pretensioners
from a vehicle, it may cause fire.
Before scraping a vehicle, we rec-
ommend that you contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Keep the SRS parts and wirings
away from water or any liquid. If
the SRS components are inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or
liquids, it may cause fire or
severe injury.
OEL033301R/OYN039026R
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 43
Safety features of your vehicle
443
How does the air bag system
operate
Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON or START position.
Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
serious frontal or side collision (if
equipped with side air bag or curtain air
bag) in order to help protect the occu-
pants from serious physical injury.
There is no single speed at which the air
bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a colli-
sion and its direction. These two factors
determine whether the sensors produce
an electronic deployment/ inflation sig-
nal.
Air bag deployment depends on a num-
ber of factors including vehicle speed,
angles of impact and the density and
stiffness of the vehicles or objects which
your vehicle hits in the collision. The
determining, factors are not limited to
those mentioned above.
The front air bags will completely inflate
and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see the
air bags inflate during an accident. It is
much more likely that you will simply see
the deflated air bags hanging out of their
storage compartments after the collision.
In addition to inflating in serious side col-
lisions, vehicles equipped with a rollover
sensor, side and curtain air bags will
inflate if the sensing system detects a
rollover.
When a rollover is detected, curtain air
bags will remain inflated longer to help
provide protection from ejection, espe-
cially when used in conjunction with the
seat belts.
In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must inflate
rapidly.The speed of air bag inflation is a
consequence of extremely short time in
which a collision occurs and the need to
get the air bag between the occupant
and the vehicle structures before the
occupant impacts those structures. This
speed of inflation reduces the risk of seri-
ous or life-threatening injuries in a severe
collision and is thus a necessary part of
air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also causes
the air bags to expand with a great deal
of force.
There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steer-
ing wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
WARNING
To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possible
(at least (10 inches) 250 mm
away).The front passenger should
always move their seat as far
back as possible and sit back in
their seat.
• Air bag inflates instantly in an
event of a collision, passengers
may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
a proper position.
Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or bodily
abrasions, injuries from broken
glasses or burns.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 44
345
Safety features of your vehicle
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the igni-
tion of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-
comfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible
after impact in order to reduce dis-
comfort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat, etc.). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with cold water
immediately and consult the doctor if the
symptom persists.
Do not install a child restraint on the
front passenger seat
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof rails
above the front and rear doors are
very hot. To prevent injury, do not
touch the air bag storage areas
internal components immediately
after an air bag has inflated.
1JBH3051
OJD032059
OYDESA2042
Type A
Type B
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 45
Safety features of your vehicle
463
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
the front passenger's seat other than that
explained in section - Passenger's front air
bag ON/OFF switch (if equipped). If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing
child restraint, causing serious or fatal
injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraints in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
If your vehicle is equipped with the passen-
ger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch, you can
activate or deactivate the front passenger’s
air bag when necessary.
For more details, please refer to 3-53 page.
Air bag warning and indicator
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert you of
a potential problem with your air bag -
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the warning light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
The light comes on whilst the vehicle is
in motion.
The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
WARNING
NEVER use a rearward facing
child restraint on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of
it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to
the CHILD can occur.
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it!
Never put a child restraint in the
front passenger's seat other than
that as mentioned in section -
Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped). If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it
would cause serious or fatal
injuries.
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags, be sure to install the
child restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and securely lock the child
restraint system in position.
Inflation of side and/or curtain air
bags could cause serious injury
or death to an infant or child.
W7-147
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 2/11/2015 4:18 PM Page 46
347
Safety features of your vehicle
Passenger’s front air bag
ON indicator (if equipped)
The passenger's front air bag ON indica-
tor illuminates for approximately 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
The passenger's front air bag ON indica-
tor also comes on when the passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the
ON position and goes off after approxi-
mately 60 seconds.
Passenger’s front air bag
OFF indicator (if equipped)
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator illuminates for about 4 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator also comes on when the passen-
ger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch is set
to the OFF position and goes off when
the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the ON position.
OEL039061
CAUTION
If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch malfunctions, the
passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator will not illuminate (The pas-
senger's front air bag ON indicator
comes on and goes off after
approximately 60 seconds) and the
passenger’s front air bag will inflate
in a frontal impact even if the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the OFF position.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be inspected by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
OEL039052
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 47
Safety features of your vehicle
483
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following com-
ponents:
1. Driver's front air bag module*
2. Front impact sensors*
3. Passenger's front air bag module*
4. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies*
5. Side impact sensors*
6. Curtain air bag modules*
7. Side air bag modules*
8. SRS control module (SRSCM)
9. Air bag warning light
10. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly*
(driver side)
11. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch*
12. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
indicator*
*: if equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all ele-
ments whilst the ignition switch is ON to
determine if a frontal, near-frontal impact
or side impact is severe enough to
require air bag deployment or pre-ten-
sioner seat belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for about
6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, after which the
air bag warning light should go out.
The front air bag modules are located
both in the centre of the steering wheel
and in the front passenger's panel above
the glove box. When the SRSCM detects
a sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically deploy
the front air bags.
WARNING
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS.We recommend that the
system be inspected by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
The light stays on after illuminat-
ing for approximately 6 seconds.
The light comes on whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
B240B01L/H
Driver’s front air bag (1)
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 48
349
Safety features of your vehicle
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other con-
trols.
B240B02L/H B240B03L/H
Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)
B240B05L/H
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
Do not install or place any acces-
sories (drink holder, cassette
holder, sticker, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box in a vehicle with a pas-
senger's air bag. Such objects
may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
When installing a container of liq-
uid air freshener inside the vehi-
cle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the
instrument panel surface.
It may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 49
Safety features of your vehicle
503
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System
and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver
and passenger seating positions.
WARNING
If an air bag deploys, there may
be a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle.
These conditions are normal and
are not hazardous - the air bags
are packed in this fine powder.
The dust generated during air
bag deployment may cause skin
or eye irritation as well as aggra-
vate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
The SRS can function only when
the ignition key is in the "ON"
position. If the SRS air bag warn-
ing light does not illuminate, or
continuously remains on after
illuminating for about 6 seconds
when the ignition key is turned to
the ON position, or after the
engine is started, comes on
whilst driving, the SRS is not
working properly. If this occurs,
we recommend that the system
be inspected by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Before you replace a fuse or dis-
connect a battery terminal, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the ignition
key. Never remove or replace the
air bag related fuse(s) when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS air bag warn-
ing light to illuminate.
OEL039037R
OEL039038R
Driver’s front air bag
Passenger’s front air bag
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 50
351
Safety features of your vehicle
The indications of the system's presence
are the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on
the air bag pad cover on the steering
wheel and the passenger's side front
panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the centre of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
in the front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity.
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every time,
everyone! Air bags inflate with
considerable force and in the blink
of an eye. Seat belts help keep
occupants in proper position to
obtain maximum benefit from the
air bag. Even with air bags, improp-
erly and unbelted occupants can be
severely injured when the air bag
inflates. Always follow the precau-
tions about seat belts, air bags and
occupant safety contained in this
manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maxi-
mum safety benefit from your
restraint system:
Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat. NB
See section - Passenger's front
air bag ON/OFF switch (if
equipped).
ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age to
ride.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Front and side air bags can injure
occupants improperly positioned
in the front seats.
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air bags,
whilst still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned drivers and passen-
gers can be severely injured by
inflating air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
centre console – always sit in an
upright position.
No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 51
Safety features of your vehicle
523
(Continued)
Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-
impact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat.
The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident. NB See section -
Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped).
Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental deployment of the air bags
or by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
If the SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated whilst the
vehicle is being driven, we rec-
ommend that the system be
inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
Air bags can only be used once –
we recommend that the system
be replaced by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer immediately after
deployment.
The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and
when the impact angle is less
than 30° from the forward longitu-
dinal axis of the vehicle.
Additionally, the air bags will only
deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
(Continued)
(Continued)
For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occu-
pants including the driver should
always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position
to minimise the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-
sarily close to the air bag whilst
the vehicle is in motion.
Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat
back in an upright position, cen-
tred on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 52
353
Safety features of your vehicle
Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped)
The passenger's front air bag can be
deactivated by the passenger's front air
bag ON/OFF switch.When switched off a
rearward facing child seat can be
installed in this seating position. When
using this facility the seat must always be
put in its most rearward position.
NB. For safety reasons, when installing
child seats within the vehicle the back
seat positions are preferred, such prac-
tice for installing a child seat in the front
passenger seat (with the Air Bag switch
positioned OFF) should only be used in
exceptional circumstances.
In addition the air bag can also be deac-
tivated if the front passenger's seat is
unoccupied by a person.
To deactivate or reactivate the passen-
ger’s front air bag:
To deactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the master key into the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch
and turn it to the OFF position. The pas-
senger’s front air bag OFF indicator ( )
will illuminate and stay on until the pas-
senger’s front air bag is reactivated.
To reactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the master key into the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch
and turn it to the ON position. The pas-
senger’s front air bag OFF indicator will
go out and the passenger’s front air bag
ON indicator ( ) will illuminate for
approximately 60 seconds.
(Continued)
The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an occu-
pant is out of position because of
not wearing a seat belt, the air
bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
OLM039052LOEL039054R
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 53
Safety features of your vehicle
543
NOTICE
When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the ON position,
the passenger’s front air bag is activated
and child or infant seat should not be
installed on the front passenger seat.
When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF posi-
tion, the passenger’s front air bag is
deactivated.
CAUTION
• If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is not working
properly, the air bag warning light
()
on the instrument panel will
illuminate.
And, the passenger's front air bag
OFF indicator
()
will not illumi-
nate (The passenger's front air
bag ON indicator comes on and
goes off after approximately 60
seconds), the SRS Control
Module reactivate the passen-
ger’s front air bag and the pas-
senger’s front air bag will inflate
in frontal impact crashes even if
the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF
position.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be inspected by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the SRS air bag warning light
does not illuminate when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the ON
position, or if it illuminates whilst
the vehicle is being driven, we
recommend that the system be
inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
WARNING
On some models, the front air bag
ON/OFF switch could turn by using
a similar small rigid device. Always
check the status of the front air bag
ON/OFF switch and passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF indicator.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 54
355
Safety features of your vehicle
Side air bag (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front seat. The
purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt alone.
(Continued)
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF switch, do
not install a child restraint sys-
tem in the front passenger's seat.
A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat
other than that explained in sec-
tion - Passenger's front air bag
ON/OFF switch (if equipped).
Children who are too large for
child restraint systems should
always occupy the rear seat and
use the available lap/shoulder
belts. Children are afforded the
most safety in the event of an
accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint
system in the rear seat.
As soon as the child seat is no
longer needed on the front pas-
senger's seat, reactivate the front
passenger's air bag.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for the
proper position of the passen-
ger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch.
Deactivate the passenger's front
air bag only when the ignition
switch is switched off, or the mal-
function may occur in the SRS
Control Module.
And there may be a danger that
the driver's and/or front passen-
ger’s and/or side and curtain air
bag may fail to trigger, or not trig-
ger correctly during a collision.
Never install a rearward facing
child seat on the front passen-
ger's seat unless the passenger's
front air bag has been deactivat-
ed. The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident.
(Continued)
OEL039039
OLM032310N
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 55
Safety features of your vehicle
563
The side air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
The side air bags do not only deploy on
the side of the impact but also on the
opposite side.
(Continued)
Use of seat covers could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness of
the system.
Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side air bag.
Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself.
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental side air
bag inflates.
To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side air bag that may
result in personal injury, avoid
impact to the side impact sensor
when the ignition key is on.
If seat or seat cover is damaged,
we recommend that the system
be serviced by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer. Inform that your
vehicle is equipped with side air
bags.
WARNING
The side air bag is supplemental
to the driver's and the passen-
ger's seat belt systems and is not
a substitute for them. Therefore
your seat belts must be worn at
all times whilst the vehicle is in
motion. The air bags deploy only
in certain side impact conditions
severe enough to cause signifi-
cant injury to the vehicle occu-
pants.
For best protection from the side
air bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air
bag, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright position
with the seat belt properly fas-
tened. The driver's hands should
be placed on the steering wheel
at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions.
The passenger's arms and hands
should be placed on their laps.
Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
(Continued)
WARNING
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors,
put their arms on the doors, stretch
their arms out of the window, or
place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 56
357
Safety features of your vehicle
Curtain air bag (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-
tain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact colli-
sions, depending on the crash severity,
angle, speed and point of impact.
The curtain air bags do not only deploy
on the side of the impact but also on
the opposite side.
For vehicles equipped with a rollover
sensor the side and curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle may deploy if a
rollover or possible rollover is detected.
The curtain air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact or rollover situ-
ations.
WARNING
In order for side and curtain air
bags to provide the best protec-
tion, both front seat occupants
and both outboard rear occu-
pants should sit in an upright
position with the seat belts prop-
erly fastened. Importantly, chil-
dren should sit in a proper child
restraint system in the rear seat.
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system.
Make sure to put the child
restraint system as far away from
the door side as possible, and
secure the child restraint system
in a locked position.
(Continued)
OXM039055
OLM032311N
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 57
Safety features of your vehicle
583
(Continued)
Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. We recommend
that the system be serviced by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Failure to follow the above men-
tioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle occu-
pants in an accident.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 58
359
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag system operation (deploy-
ment/non deployment)
There are many types of situations in
which an air bag would not provide
additional protection to the vehicle
occupants.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, low speed impacts, offset
collisions and vehicle roll over.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor (if equipped)
OLM039040R/OLM039041/H/OEL033061/H/OEL039044
1
2
3
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 59
Safety features of your vehicle
603
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensi-
ty, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
WARNING
Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air bag
or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors.We recommend that
the system be serviced by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the
front bumper, body or B pillar and
C pillars where side collision sen-
sors are installed. We recom-
mend that the system be serviced
by a HYUNDAI authorised repair-
er.
Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-gen-
uine parts may adversely affect
your vehicles collision and air
bag deployment performance.
1VQA2084/H
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:56 PM Page 60
361
Safety features of your vehicle
Side and curtain air bags (if equipped)
Side and/or curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of colli-
sions if the front impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact. Side impact and curtain
air bags are designed to inflate only in
side impact collisions or rollover situa-
tions (if equipped with rollover sensor),
but they may inflate in other collisions if
the side impact sensors detect a suffi-
cient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads
or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on sur-
faces not designed for vehicle traffic to
prevent unintended air bag deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
1VQA2086/H
OVQ036018N
OLM032311N
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:57 PM Page 61
Safety features of your vehicle
623
Air bags are not designed to inflate in
rear collisions, because occupants are
moved backward by the force of the
impact. In this case, inflated air bags
would not be able to provide any addi-
tional benefit.
Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
However, if equipped with side and
curtain air bags, the air bags may
inflate depending on the intensity, vehi-
cle speed and angles of impact.
In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional bene-
fit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
1VQA2089OVQ036018NOUN036087/H
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:57 PM Page 62
363
Safety features of your vehicle
Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be signifi-
cantly replaced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
NOTICE - if equipped with
rollover sensor
Front air bags do not inflate in rollover
accidents. However, side impact and
curtain air bags may inflate in a
rollover, when it is detected by the
rollover sensor.
NOTICE - without rollover
sensor
Air bags do not inflate in rollover acci-
dents because vehicle can not detect
rollover accident. However, side impact
and/or curtain air bags may inflate
when the vehicle is rolled over after side
impact collision.
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not deliv-
ered to the sensors.
1VQA2090 1VQA2091 1VQA2092
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:57 PM Page 63
Safety features of your vehicle
643
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and so there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate, or con-
tinuously remains on, we recommend
that the system be inspected by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
WARNING
Modification to SRS components
or wiring, including the addition
of any kind of badges to the pad
covers or modifications to the
body structure, can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to inflate.
If the air bags inflate, we recom-
mend that the system be
replaced by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental inflation of the air bags or
by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
If components of the air bag sys-
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed. We recommend that
you contact a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer for these precau-
tions and necessary information.
Failure to follow these precau-
tions and procedures could
increase the risk of personal
injury.
If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on
flooring, you shouldn't try to start
the engine; we recommend that
you contact a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:57 PM Page 64
365
Safety features of your vehicle
Additional safety precautions
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat. All occupants should
sit upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
Passengers should not move out of
or change seats whilst the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not wear-
ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-
gency stop can be thrown against the
inside of the vehicle, against other
occupants, or out of the vehicle.
Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more than
one person uses the same seat belt,
they could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
Passengers should not place hard
or sharp objects between them-
selves and the air bags. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap or in
your mouth can result in injuries if an
air bag inflates.
Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor. If occupants are too close to the
air bag covers, they could be injured if
the air bags inflate.
Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or
side air bag covers could interfere with
the proper operation of the air bags.
Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring har-
nesses.
Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in the event of a
crash. All infants and children should
be properly restrained in appropriate
child safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
Adding equipment to or modify-
ing your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior struc-
ture or be thrown from the vehicle
resulting in serious injury or
death.
Always sit upright with the seat-
back in an upright position, cen-
tred on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and your feet on
the floor.
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:57 PM Page 65
Safety features of your vehicle
663
Air bag warning label (if equipped)
Air bag warning labels are attached to
alert driver and passengers (including
children) of potential risk of air bag sys-
tem.
Note that these government warnings
focus on the risk to children, we also
wants you to be aware of the risks which
adults are exposed to. Those have been
described in previous pages.
Type B
OLM039050
Type A
OLM039050L
EL(FL) UK 3.QXP 12/16/2014 8:57 PM Page 66
Features of your vehicle
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Immobiliser system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• Remote keyless entry system operations. . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
• Smart key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
• Door lock/unlock in an emergency situation . . . . . . 4-12
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-15
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-16
• Deadlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
• Child-protector rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
• Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
• Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Closing the bonnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Panorama sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Electric power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
• Flex steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 1
4
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
• LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
• Information Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
• User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
• Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
• Trip Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
• Warnings and indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
• Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
• Rear parking assist system type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
• Front/Rear parking assist system type . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Smart parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
• Operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• Non-operational conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• Operation way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
• System cancellation whilst parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Additional introductions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• System malfunction warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Hazard warning flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Headlight escort function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Headlight welcome function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
• High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
• Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
• Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
• Headlight levelling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
• Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
• Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 2
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant
and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Windscreen defrosting and defogging . . . . . . . 4-131
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Centre console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Aux, USB and iPod
®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
• Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Cargo security screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
4
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 3
Features of your vehicle
44
Record your key number
The key code number is
stamped or printed on
the key code tag
attached to the key set.
Should you lose your
keys, we recommend that you contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the code number and
keep it in a safe and handy place, but not
in the vehicle.
Key operations
Used to start the engine.
Used to lock and unlock the doors.
Used to lock and unlock the glove box.
(if equipped)
KEYS
WARNING - Ignition key
(Smart key)
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key (Smart
key) is dangerous even if the key is
not in the ignition or start button is
ACC or ON position.
Children copy adults and they
could place the key in the ignition
or press the start button.
The ignition key (Smart key) would
enable children to operate power
windows or other controls, or even
make the vehicle move, which
could result in serious bodily injury
or even death.
Never leave the keys in your vehicle
with unsupervised children, when
the engine is running.
WARNING
We recommend that you use parts
for replacement from a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer. If an aftermar-
ket key is used, the ignition switch
may not return to ON after START.
If this happens, the starter will con-
tinue to operate causing damage to
the starter motor and possible fire
due to excessive current in the
wiring.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 4
45
Features of your vehicle
Immobiliser system
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
electronic engine immobiliser system to
reduce the risk of unauthorised vehicle
use.
Your immobiliser system is comprised of
a small transponder in the ignition key
and electronic devices inside the vehicle.
With the immobiliser system, whenever
you insert your ignition key into the igni-
tion switch and turn it to ON, it checks
and determines and verifies if the ignition
key is valid or not.
If the key is determined to be valid, the
engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid, the
engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobiliser sys-
tem:
Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-
der and turn it to the ON position.
To activate the immobiliser system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
The immobiliser system activates auto-
matically. Without a valid ignition key for
your vehicle, the engine will not start.
NOTICE
The immobiliser system detects the
presence of a key in the ignition switch.
To ensure the system performs correct-
ly, the keys should be separated after
delivery of the vehicle so that only one
key is near the ignition switch when
using the vehicle. The engine may not
start or may stop shortly after starting if
more than one key is near the ignition
switch.
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose your
keys, we recommend that you consult a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobiliser password is a cus-
tomer unique password and should
be kept confidential. Do not leave
this number anywhere in your vehi-
cle.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
The engine may not start for the
metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal from normally
transmitting.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 5
Features of your vehicle
64
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobiliser system. It is designed
to give years of trouble-free service,
however you should avoid expo-
sure to moisture, static electricity
and rough handling. Immobiliser
system malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobiliser system because it
could cause the immobiliser sys-
tem to malfunction. We recommend
that the system be serviced by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the immobiliser system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 6
47
Features of your vehicle
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Type A
To unfold the key, press the release but-
ton then the key will unfold automatically.
To fold the key, fold the key manually
whilst pressing the release button.
Type B
To remove the mechanical key, press and
hold the release button and remove the
mechanical key.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a click
sound is heard.
Lock (1)
All doors (and tailgate) are locked if the
lock button is pressed. If all doors are
closed, the hazard warning lights blink
once to indicate that all doors are locked.
However, if any door remains open, the
hazard warning lights will not blink.
Close the door and try again to lock the
doors.
Unlock (2)
All doors are unlocked if the unlock but-
ton is pressed.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that all doors are unlocked.
After depressing this button, the doors
will be locked automatically unless you
open any door within 30 seconds.
Tailgate unlock (3) (if equipped)
The tailgate is unlocked if the button is
pressed for more than 1 second.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.
However, after pressing this button, the
tailgate will lock automatically unless you
open the tailgate within 30 seconds.
Also, once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock auto-
matically.
NOTICE
The word "HOLD" is written on the
button to inform you that you must
press and hold the button.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without press-
ing the release button. This may
damage the key.
OLMB043003
Type B (if equipped)
OHG040001L/Q
Type A (if equipped)
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 7
Features of your vehicle
84
Transmitter precautions
NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
The ignition key is in ignition switch.
You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 30 feet [10 m]).
The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the ignition key. If you have a problem
with the transmitter, we recommend
that you contact a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the transmitter is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the transmitter could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/
receiving emails. Avoid placing the
transmitter and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the transmitter gets damp
(due to drinks or moisture), or is
heated, internal circuit may mal-
function, excluding the car from the
warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 8
49
Features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
Transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery
which will normally last for several years.
When replacement is necessary, use the
following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-
tly pry open the transmitter centre
cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery positive.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
For transmitter replacement, we recom-
mend that you contact a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
CAUTION
The keyless entry system trans-
mitter is designed to give you
years of trouble-free use, howev-
er it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use your
transmitter or replace the battery,
we recommend that you contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter to malfunc-
tion. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
To avoid damaging the transmit-
ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or
expose it to heat or sunlight.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed bat-
tery can be harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
Type B
OLM042302
Type A
OLM043439
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 9
Features of your vehicle
104
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock
a door (and tailgate) and even start the
engine without inserting the key.
The functions of the buttons on a smart
key are similar to the remote keyless
entry. (Refer to the “Remote keyless
entry” in this section.)
Smart key functions
Carrying the smart key, you may lock and
unlock the vehicle doors (and tailgate).
Also, you may start the engine. Refer to
the following, for more details.
Locking
Pressing the button of the front outside
door handles with all doors (and tailgate)
closed and any door unlocked, locks all
the doors (and tailgate). The hazard
warning lights will blink once to indicate
that all doors (and tailgate) are locked.
The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m)
from the outside door handle. If you want
to make sure that a door has locked or
not, you should check the door lock but-
ton inside the vehicle or pull the outside
door handle.
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
OLM049007/HOLMB043005
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 10
411
Features of your vehicle
Even though you press the button, the
doors will not lock and the chime sounds
3 seconds if any of the following occurs:
The smart key is in the vehicle.
The engine start/stop button is in the
ACC or ON position.
Any door except the tailgate is opened.
Unlocking
Pressing the button of the front outside
door handles with all doors (and tailgate)
closed and locked, unlocks all the doors
(and tailgate). The hazard warning lights
will blink twice to indicate that all doors
(and tailgate) are unlocked. The button
will only operate when the smart key is
within 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the out-
side door handle.
When the smart key is recognized in the
area of 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the front
outside door handle, other people can
also open a door without possession of
the smart key.
Tailgate unlocking
If you are within 28 ~ 40 in. (0.7 ~ 1 m)
from the outside tailgate handle, with
your smart key in possession, the tail-
gate will unlock and open when you
press the tailgate handle switch.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.
Also, once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock auto-
matically.
Start-up
You can start the engine without inserting
the key. For detailed information refer to
“Starting the engine with a smart key” in
section 5.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 11
Features of your vehicle
124
Smart key precautions
NOTICE
If, for some reason, you happen to lose
your smart key, you will not be able to
start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if
necessary. We recommend that you
contact a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, you should immedi-
ately take the vehicle and key and we
recommend that you contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
The smart key will not work if any of
the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile two-
way radio system or a mobile phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
properly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the smart key, we rec-
ommend that you contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the smart key could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/
receiving emails. Avoid placing the
smart key and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
Door lock/unlock in an emer-
gency situation
If the smart key does not operate normal-
ly, you can lock or unlock the doors by
using the mechanical key.
1.Depress and hold the release button
(1) and remove the mechanical key (2).
2.Insert the key into hole of the outside
door handle. Turn the key toward the
rear of the vehicle to unlock and toward
the front of the vehicle to lock.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a
click sound is heard.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the smart key gets damp
(due to drinks or moisture), or is
heated, internal circuit may mal-
function, excluding the car from the
warranty.
OEL043305
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from elec-
tromagnetic materials that blocks
electromagnetic waves to the key
surface.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 12
413
Features of your vehicle
This system is designed to provide pro-
tection from unauthorised entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-
gered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
Armed stage
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the igni-
tion switch or turn off the engine.
2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate)
and the engine bonnet are closed and
latched.
3. Lock the doors by depressing the
door lock button on the transmitter
(or smart key).
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door, tailgate remains open, the
hazard warning lights won’t operate
and theft-alarm will not arm. Close
the door and try again to lock the
doors.
Lock the doors by pressing the button
of the front outside door handles with
the smart key in your possession.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door (and tailgate) remains
open, the hazard warning lights won’t
operate and theft-alarm will not arm.
Close the door and try again to lock
the doors.
If engine bonnet remains open, the
hazard warning lights won’t operate
and theft-alarm will not arm. Close
the engine bonnet. The hazard warn-
ing lights blink once and theft-alarm
arms.
Do not arm the system until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed whilst a passen-
ger(s) remains in the vehicle, the
alarm may be activated when the
remaining passenger(s) leave the
vehicle. If any door, tailgate or
engine bonnet is opened within 30
seconds after entering the armed
stage, the system is disarmed to
prevent unnecessary alarm.
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 13
Features of your vehicle
144
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs whilst the system is
armed.
A front or rear door is opened without
using transmitter (or smart key).
The tailgate is opened without using
transmitter (or smart key).
The engine bonnet is opened.
The siren will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
27 seconds, unless the system is dis-
armed. To turn off the system, unlock the
doors with the transmitter. (or smart key)
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when:
Transmitter
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The engine is started.
- The ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion for 30 seconds or more.
Smart key
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door is
pressed whilst carrying the smart key.
- The engine is started.
After the doors are unlocked, the hazard
warning lights will blink twice to indicate
that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if any
door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
NOTICE - Immobiliser system
If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the
ignition switch and start the engine.
Then the system will be disarmed.
If you lose your keys, we recommend
that you consult a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
theft-alarm system because it could
cause the theft-alarm system to
malfunction. We recommend that
the system be serviced by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the theft-alarm system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:02 PM Page 14
415
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
Turn the key toward rear of vehicle to
unlock and toward front of vehicle to
lock.
If you lock/unlock the door with a key,
all vehicle doors will lock/unlock auto-
matically. (if equipped)
Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter key (or
smart key).
Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
To lock a door without the key, push the
inside door lock button (1) to the “Lock”
position and close the door (2).
If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch, all vehicle doors will
lock automatically.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when leav-
ing your vehicle unattended.
DOOR LOCKS
OLM043008/H
Lock
Unlock
OEL049009R
WARNING
If you don't close the door
securely, the door may open
again.
Be careful that someone's body
and hands are not trapped when
closing the door.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 15
Features of your vehicle
164
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door lock button
To unlock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The
red mark (2) on the button will be visi-
ble.
To lock a door, push the door lock but-
ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door
is locked properly, the red mark (2) on
the door lock button will not be visible.
To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
If the inner door handle of all doors are
pulled when the door lock button is in
the lock position, the button will unlock
and the door will open. (if equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch and
any front door is opened.
Doors cannot be locked if the smart
key is in the vehicle and any door is
opened.
With central door lock switch
Operate by depressing the central door
lock switch.
When pushing down on the front por-
tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will lock.
When pushing down on the rear por-
tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will unlock.
However, if any door (and tailgate) is
open, the doors will not lock even
though the front portion (1) of central
door lock switch is pressed.
However, if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle and any door is open, the doors will
not lock even though the front portion
(1) of central door lock switch is
pressed.
OLM049010R
Lock
Unlock
OLM049011R
Driver’s door
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 16
417
Features of your vehicle
Deadlocks (if equipped)
Some vehicles are equipped with a
deadlocking system. Deadlocks prevent
opening of a door from either inside or
outside the vehicle once the deadlocks
have been activated providing an addi-
tional measure of vehicle security.
To lock the vehicle using the deadlock
function, the doors must be locked using
the (Smart) key or the Remote Keyless
Entry transmitter. To unlock the vehicle,
the (Smart) key or the transmitter must
again be used.
WARNING - Doors
The doors should always be fully
closed and locked whilst the
vehicle is in motion to prevent
accidental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discour-
age potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows.
Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcy-
cles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
WARNING
Do not lock the doors with the
(smart) key or the transmitter with
anybody left in the vehicle.The pas-
senger in the vehicle cannot unlock
the doors with the door lock button.
For example, if the door is locked
with the transmitter, the passenger
in the vehicle cannot unlock the
door without the transmitter.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle whilst you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehi-
cle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possi-
bly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 17
Features of your vehicle
184
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will be automatically locked
after the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h.
And all doors will be automatically
unlocked when you turn the engine off or
when you remove the ignition key. (if
equipped)
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally open-
ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehi-
cle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located on
the rear edge of the door to the “Lock”
position. When the child safety lock is
in the “Lock ( )” position, rear door
will not open even though the inner
door handle is pulled inside the vehi-
cle.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle.
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle (1) until rear door child
safety lock is unlocked.
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors whilst the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and be
severely injured or killed. To pre-
vent children from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear door
safety locks should be used when-
ever children are in the vehicle.
OLM049012
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 18
419
Features of your vehicle
Opening the tailgate
The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or unlocked
with the key, transmitter (or smart key)
or central door lock switch.
If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the handle and pulling it
up.
When all doors are lock if the tailgate
unlock button on the smart key is
pressed for more than 1 second, the
tailgate is unlocked. Once the tailgate
is opened and then closed, the tailgate
is locked automatically.
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock and
door mechanisms may not work proper-
ly due to freezing conditions.
Closing the tailgate
To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that
the tailgate is securely latched.
TAILGATE
WARNING
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when open-
ing the tailgate.
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the tail-
gate before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
tailgate lift cylinders and attaching
hardware if the tailgate is not
closed prior to driving.
WARNING
Make sure your hands,feet and other
parts of your body are safely out of
the way before closing the tailgate.
CAUTION
Make sure nothing is near the tail-
gate latch and striker whilst closing
the tailgate. It may damage the tail-
gate's latch.
OLM043013 OLM043014
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 19
Features of your vehicle
204
Emergency tailgate safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with the emer-
gency tailgate safety release lever locat-
ed on the bottom of the tailgate. When
someone is inadvertently locked in the
luggage compartment, the tailgate can
be opened by pushing the release lever
and pushing open the tailgate.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the tailgate open,
you will draw dangerous exhaust
fumes into your vehicle which can
cause serious injury or death to
vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate
open, keep the air vents and all win-
dows open so that additional out-
side air comes into the vehicle.
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in the
rear cargo area where no restraints
are available. To avoid injury in the
event of an accident or sudden
stops, occupants should always be
properly restrained.
WARNING
For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emergency
tailgate safety release lever in the
vehicle and how to open the tail-
gate if you are accidentally
locked in the luggage compart-
ment.
No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment
of the vehicle at any time. The
luggage compartment is a very
dangerous location in the event
of a crash.
Use the release lever for emer-
gencies only. Use with extreme
caution, especially whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
OLM043015
WARNING - Tailgate gas
lifters
High pressure, Do not open, Do not
heat.
Observe disposal instructions.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 20
421
Features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power win-
dow switch
(3) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (left) power window switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up*/down*
(7) Power window lock switch
*: if equipped
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OLM049020R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 21
Features of your vehicle
224
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door’s window. The driv-
er has a power window lock switch which
can block the operation of rear (or front)
passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the igni-
tion key is removed or turned to the ACC
or LOCK position. However, if the front
doors are opened, the power windows
cannot be operated even within the 30
seconds period. The driver’s door has a
master power window switch that con-
trols all the windows in the vehicle.
NOTICE
Whilst driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equipped)
in an open (or partially open position),
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
buffeting or pulsation noise. This
noise is a normal occurrence and can be
reduced or eliminated by taking the fol-
lowing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows down,
partially lower both front windows
approximately one inch. If you experi-
ence the noise with the sunroof open,
slightly reduce the size of the sunroof
opening.
Window opening and closing
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corre-
sponding switch to the first detent posi-
tion (5).
Auto down window (if equipped)
(Driver’s window)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent posi-
tion (6) completely lowers the driver’s
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position whilst the window is in
operation, pull up the switch momentarily
to the opposite direction of the window
movement.
OLM049021R OLM049022R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 22
423
Features of your vehicle
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
(Driver's window)
Pressing or pulling up the power window
switch momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers or lifts the
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position whilst the window is in
operation, pull up or press down and
release the switch.
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power window
system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Close the driver’s window and contin-
ue pulling up the driver’s power win-
dow switch for at least 1 second after
the window is completely closed.
Automatic reversal (if equipped)
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 12 in. (30
cm) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
whilst the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approxi-
mately 1 in. (2.5 cm). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when the
“auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway posi-
tion on the power window switch.
OLM049023R OUN026013/H
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 0.16 in. (4 mm) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper win-
dow channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resist-
ance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 23
Features of your vehicle
244
Power window lock button
The driver can disable the power window
switches on the rear passengers' doors
by pressing the power window lock
switch to the lock position (pressed).
When the power window lock switch is
pressed :
The driver's master control can oper-
ate the front passenger's power win-
dow but cannot operate the rear pas-
sengers' power windows.
The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's power
window.
The rear passengers' control cannot
operate the rear passengers' power
window.
OLM049024R
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do not
open or close two windows or
more at the same time. This will
also ensure the longevity of the
fuse.
Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
WARNING - Windows
NEVER leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren, when the engine is running.
NEVER leave any child unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Even very
young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entan-
gle themselves in the windows,
or otherwise injure themselves or
others.
Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a win-
dow.
Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the dri-
ver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(depressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by the child.
Do not extend face or arms out-
side the window whilst driving.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 24
Opening the bonnet
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
bonnet. The bonnet should pop open
slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
bonnet slightly, pull the secondary
latch (1) inside of the bonnet centre
and lift the bonnet (2).
3.Pull out the support rod.
4.Hold the bonnet opened with the sup-
port rod.
BONNET
OLM049025R OLM049027
WARNING - Hot parts
Grasp the support rod in the area
wrapped in rubber. The plastic will
help prevent you from being burned
by hot metal when the engine is
hot.
WARNING
Open the bonnet after turning off
the engine on a flat surface, shift-
ing the shift lever to the P(Park)
position for automatic transaxle
and to the 1st(First) gear or
R(Reverse) for manual transaxle,
and setting the parking brake.
425
Features of your vehicle
OEL043700
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 25
Features of your vehicle
264
Closing the bonnet
1. Before closing the bonnet, check the
following:
All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the bonnet until it is about 12 in.
(30 cm) above the closed position and
let it drop. Make sure that it locks into
place.
WARNING - Bonnet
Before closing the bonnet,
ensure that all obstructions are
removed from the bonnet open-
ing. Closing the bonnet with an
obstruction present in the bonnet
opening may result in property
damage or severe personal
injury.
Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING
Always double check to be sure
that the bonnet is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the bonnet could fly
open whilst the vehicle is being
driven, causing a total loss of vis-
ibility, which might result in an
accident.
The support rod must be inserted
completely into the hole whenev-
er you inspect the engine com-
partment. This will prevent the
bonnet from falling and possibly
injuring you.
Do not move the vehicle with the
bonnet raised. The view will be
blocked and the bonnet could fall
or be damaged.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 26
427
Features of your vehicle
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel-filler lid must be opened from
inside the vehicle by pulling up the fuel-
filler lid opener.
NOTICE
If the fuel-filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the lid to break the ice
and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid.
If necessary, spray around the lid with
an approved de-icer fluid (do not use
radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle
to a warm place and allow the ice to
melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the fuel
filler lid opener up.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
open.
4. To remove the cap (2), turn the fuel
tank cap counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks”.This indicates that the cap is
securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-
ly and make sure that it is securely
closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
OSA047022R
OLM049028
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 27
Features of your vehicle
284
WARNING - Refuelling
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and thus subject you to the risk
of fire and burns. Always remove
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.
If the cap is venting fuel or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refuelling.
Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuelling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fab-
ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static elec-
tricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapours resulting
in rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other petrol
source.
When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure to
place the container on the
ground prior to refuelling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapours
causing a fire. Once refuelling
has begun, contact with the vehi-
cle should be maintained until
the filling is complete.
(Continued)
WARNING - Refuelling
dangers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refuelling, please
note the following guidelines care-
fully. Failure to follow these guide-
lines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
Read and follow all warning post-
ed at the gas station facility.
• Before refuelling note the loca-
tion of the Emergency Petrol
Shut-Off, if available, at the gas
station facility.
Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 28
429
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
Use only portable plastic fuel
containers designed to carry and
store petrol.
Do not use mobile phones whilst
refuelling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from
mobile phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapours causing a fire.
When refuelling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel
vapours causing a fire. Once
refuelling is complete, check to
make sure the filler cap and filler
door are securely closed, before
starting the engine.
DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle whilst at
a gas station especially during
refuelling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If a fire breaks out during refu-
elling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately contact
the manager of the gas station
and then contact the local fire
department. Follow any safety
instructions they provide.
CAUTION
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel require-
ments" suggested in section 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, we recommend that
you use parts for replacement
from a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer. An incorrect fuel filler
cap can result in a serious mal-
function of the fuel system or
emission control system.
Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
After refuelling, make sure the
fuel cap is installed securely to
prevent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 29
Features of your vehicle
304
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control lever located on the over-
head console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
If the driver removes the ignition
key(Smart key : turns off the engine) and
opens the driver-side door when the sun-
roof is not fully closed, the warning chime
will sound for approximately 7 seconds
and
- Type A : Sunroof Open Warning Light
illuminate or blink for approxi-
mately 7 seconds.
- Type B : Sunroof open image will
appear on the LCD display.
Close the sunroof securely when leaving
your vehicle.
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freez-
ing conditions.
After a vehicle is washed or in a rain-
storm be sure to wipe off any water
that is on the sunroof before operating
it.
PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
OLM049030
CAUTION
Do not continue to move the sun-
roof control lever after the sunroof
is fully opened, closed, or tilted.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.
Make sure the sunroof is closed
fully when leaving your vehicle
attended. If the sunroof is open,
rain or snow may leak through the
sunroof and wet the interior as
well as cause theft.
Type B Type A
WEL-400/OLM043420
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:03 PM Page 30
431
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE
The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in the
slide position but can be slid whilst in a
tilt position.
Sliding the sunroof
Before opening or closing the sunroof,
open the roller blind.
To open the sunroof, pull the sunroof
control lever backward.
To close the sunroof, push or pull the
sunroof control lever with the safety
switch (1) forward or downward.
To open the sunroof automatically:
Pull the sunroof control lever backward to
the second detent position and then
release it. The sunroof will slide all the
way open.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
To close the sunroof automatically:
Push the sunroof control lever forward to
the second detent position and then
release it. The sunroof will automatically
close all the way.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
OLM049031
WARNING
Never adjust the sunroof or roller
blind whilst driving. This could
result in loss of control and an
accident that may cause death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
If you would like to carry items on
the roof rack using a cross bar,
do not operate the sunroof.
When carrying cargo on the roof
rack, do not load heavy items
above the sunroof or glass roof.
Do not allow children to operate
the sunroof.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 31
Features of your vehicle
324
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detect-
ed whilst the sunroof is closing automat-
ically, it will reverse the direction, and
then stop.
The auto reverse function does not work
if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding
glass and the sunroof sash. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof before
closing it.
Tilting the sunroof
Before opening or closing the sunroof,
open the roller blind.
To open the sunroof, push the sunroof
control lever upward.
To close the sunroof, pull the sunroof
lever with the safety switch (1) downward
until the sunroof moves to the desired
position.
OLM049032
WARNING
Never try pinching any part of
your body intentionally to acti-
vate the Automatic reversal func-
tion.
The Automatic reversal function
may not work if something gets
caught just before the sunroof
fully closes.
OXM049029
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 32
433
Features of your vehicle
Roller blind
The roller blinds are installed inside of
the sunroof and glass roof.
Open or close it manually when you need
to.
Before opening or closing the sunroof,
open the roller blind.
NOTICE
It is normal for wrinkles to form on the
blind because of its material character-
istic.
Resetting the sunroof
Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the fol-
lowings)
- Battery is discharged or disconnected
or the related fuse has been replaced
or disconnected
- The one-touch sliding function of the
sunroof does not normally operate
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Open the roller blind.
3. Close the sunroof.
4. Release the sunroof control lever.
5. Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close (about 10 sec-
onds) until the sunroof is moved a lit-
tle. Then, release the lever.
6. Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close until the sun-
roof operates as follows;
TILT OPEN SLIDE OPEN
SLIDE CLOSE
Then, release the lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof sys-
tem has been reset.
OXM049031
WARNING - Sunroof
Be careful that no head, hands
and body parts are obstructed by
a closing sunroof.
Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sunroof
whilst driving.
Make sure your hands and head
are safely out of the way before
closing a sunroof.
CAUTION
Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be dam-
aged.
Do not leave the roller blind
closed whilst the sunroof is
opened.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 33
Features of your vehicle
344
Electric power steering
(if equipped)
Power steering uses the motor to assist
you in steering the vehicle. If the engine
is off or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, the vehicle may
still be steered, but it will require
increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is con-
trolled by the power steering control unit
which senses the steering wheel torque
and vehicle speed to command the
motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed
decreases for better control of the steer-
ing wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steering during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend that
the system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur dur-
ing normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not illumi-
nate.
• The steering effort is high immediately
after turning the ignition switch on.
This happens as the system performs
the EPS system diagnostics. When the
diagnostics is completed, the steering
wheel will return to its normal condi-
tion.
A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON or LOCK position.
Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed.
The steering effort increases if the
steering wheel is rotated continuously
when the vehicle is not in motion.
However, after a few minutes, it will
return to its normal conditions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the Electric Power Steering System
does not operate normally, the warn-
ing light will illuminate on the instru-
ment cluster. The steering wheel may
become difficult to control or operate
abnormally. We recommend that the
system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
When you operate the steering wheel
in low temperature, abnormal noise
could occur. If temperature rises, the
noise will disappear. This is a normal
condition.
STEERING WHEEL
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 34
435
Features of your vehicle
Tilt steering
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust
the steering wheel before you drive. You
can also raise it to give your legs more
room when you exit and enter the vehicle
(if equipped).
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
whilst permitting you to see the instru-
ment panel warning lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock release lever (1), adjust
the steering wheel to the desired angle
(2) and height (3, if equipped), then pull
up the lock-release lever to lock the
steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust
the steering wheel to the desired position
before driving.
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, pressing the heated steering
wheel button warms the steering wheel.
The indicator on the button will illuminate.
To turn the steering wheel off, press the
button once again. The indicator on the
button will turn off.
It will turn off automatically approximate-
ly 30 minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
If you turn on the ignition again after turn
off your engine in half an hour (after
operating heater button), the heating sys-
tem will be maintained in its 'on' condi-
tion.
WARNING
Never adjust the angle and height
of steering wheel whilst driving.
You may lose your steering con-
trol and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
OLM049033R OEL043300R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 35
Features of your vehicle
364
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn sym-
bol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area indi-
cated by the horn symbol on your steer-
ing wheel (see illustration). The horn
will operate only when this area is
pressed.
OLM049034
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharp-
pointed object.
CAUTION
Do not install any grip to operate
the steering wheel. This causes
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
When cleaning the heated steering
wheel, do not use an organic sol-
vent such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and petrol. Doing so
may damage the surface of the
steering wheel.
If the surface of steering wheel is
damaged by sharp object, damage
to the heated steering wheel com-
ponents could occur.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 36
437
Features of your vehicle
Flex steering wheel
(if equipped)
The flex steering wheel controls steering
effort as driver's preference or road con-
dition.
You can select the desired steering mode
by pressing the steering mode button.
When the steering mode button is
pressed, the selected steering mode will
appear on the LCD display.
If the steering mode button is pressed
within 4 seconds, the steering mode will
change as above pictures.
If the steering wheel mode button is not
pressed for about 4 seconds, the LCD
display will change to the previous
screen.
Normal mode
The normal mode offers medium steer-
ing effort.
OLM043353 OLM043354OEL043365R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 37
Features of your vehicle
384
omfort mode
The steering wheel becomes lighter. The
comfort mode is usually used when driv-
ing in downtown or parking the vehicle.
Also, the comfort mode helps weak peo-
ple to drive easily.
Sport mode
The steering wheel becomes heavier.
The sport mode is usually used when
driving in highway.
OLM043355 OLM043356
CAUTION
For your safety, if you press the
steering mode button whilst oper-
ating the steering wheel, the LCD
display will change, but the steer-
ing effort will not change immedi-
ately. After operating the steering
wheel, the steering effort will
change automatically to the
selected mode.
Be careful when changing the
steering mode whilst driving.
When the electronic power steer-
ing is not working properly, the
flex steering wheel will not work.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 38
439
Features of your vehicle
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror to centre on
the view through the rear window. Make
this adjustment before you start driving.
Day/night rearview mirror
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and whilst the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with RCD (if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automatical-
ly controls the glare from the headlights
of the car behind you in nighttime or low
light driving conditions. The sensor
mounted in the mirror senses the light
level around the vehicle, and automati-
cally controls the headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into
reverse (R), the mirror will automatically
go to the brightest setting in order to
improve the drivers view behind the vehi-
cle.
MIRRORS
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision out the
rear window.
OEL049035
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the liq-
uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-
ing.
Day
Night
WARNING
Do not adjust the rearview mirror
whilst the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident which could cause
death, serious injury or property
damage.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror and
do not install a wide mirror. It could
result in injury, during an accident
or deployment of the air bag.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 39
Features of your vehicle
404
To operate the electric rearview mirror
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the
automatic dimming function on. The mir-
ror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
automatic dimming function off. The mir-
ror indicator light will turn off.
The mirror defaults to the ON position
whenever the ignition switch is turned on.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with
compass
1. Feature Control Button
2. Status Indicator LED
3. Rear Light Sensor
4. Display Window
Automatic dimming rear view mirror con-
trols automatically the glare of headlights
of the vehicle behind you when it turned
on by pressing and holding the button for
more than 3 but less than 6 seconds. It is
turned off by pressing and holding the
button for same time once more.
1. To operate Compass feature
Press and release the button, then the
vehicle's directional heading will be dis-
played.Pressing and releasing the button
again will turn off the display.
Heading display
- E : East
- W : West
- S : South
- N : North
ex) NE : North East
2. Calibration procedure
Press and hold the button for more than
9 but less than 12 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared a "C" will
appear in the display.
- Driving the vehicle in a circle at less
than 5 mph (8km/h) 2 times or until the
compass heading appears.
- Driving in a circle in right-handed direc-
tion and opposite direction are possible,
and if the calibration is completed, the
compass heading will appear.
- Keep driving in a circle until a compass
heading appears.
OLM049036L
OEL044036
Indicator
Sensor
Rearview display
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 40
441
Features of your vehicle
Campasss Zone
OUN046101L
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 41
Features of your vehicle
424
3. Setting the compass zone
1. Find your current location and vari-
ance zone number on the zone map.
2. Press and hold the button for more
than 6 but less than 9 seconds. The
current zone number will appear in the
display.
3. Press the button until the new zone
number appears in the display. After
you stop pressing the button in, the
display will show a compass direction
within a few seconds.
4. Changing Mirror Angle setting
(if equipped):
Due to mirror positions being angled
towards the driver, the compass mirror
can also compensate for drivers seated
on the Left Hand side of the vehicle
(steering wheel on the LH side of the
vehicle) or Right Hand side of the vehicle
(steering wheel on the RH side of the
vehicle).
To adjust the Left Hand, “L or Right
Hand, “R”, setting:
1. Press and hold the button for more
than 12 seconds.
2. Release then press the button to tog-
gle between “L” and “R”.
NOTICE
This procedure also causes the compass
to be de-calibrated.
3. To re-calibrate the compass, drive the
vehicle in 2 complete circles at less
than 5mph (8km/h).
CAUTION
1.Do not install the ski rack, anten-
na, etc. which are attached to the
vehicle by means of a magnet.
They affect the operation of the
compass.
2.If the compass deviates from the
correct indication soon after
repeated adjustment, we recom-
mend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI
delaer.
3.The compass may not indicate
the correct compass point in tun-
nels or whilst driving up or down
a steep hill.
(The compass returns to the cor-
rect compass point when the
vehicle moves to an area where
the geomagnetism is stabilized.)
4.When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mir-
ror housing.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 42
443
Features of your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both left-
hand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch.The mir-
ror heads can be folded back to prevent
damage during an automatic car wash or
when passing in a narrow street.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radi-
ator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors whilst the vehicle
is moving.This could result in loss
of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
WARNING - Rearview mir-
rors
The right outside rearview mirror
is convex. In some countries, the
left outside rearview mirror is
also convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to deter-
mine the actual distance of fol-
lowing vehicles when changing
lanes.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 43
Features of your vehicle
444
Remote control
Electric type (if equipped)
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors.To
adjust the position of either mirror, move
the lever (1) to R (Right) or L (Left) to
select the right side mirror or the left side
mirror, then press a corresponding point
on the mirror adjustment control to posi-
tion the selected mirror up, down, left or
right.
After adjustment, put the lever into neu-
tral position to prevent the inadvertent
adjustment.
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the
housing of mirror and then fold it toward
the rear of the vehicle.
OLM049039R
CAUTION
The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate whilst the switch is
depressed. Do not depress the
switch longer than necessary, the
motor may be damaged.
Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the parts.
OLM049042/H
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 44
445
Features of your vehicle
Electric type (if equipped)
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
depress the button.
To unfold it, depress the button again.
OLM049041R
CAUTION
In case it is an electric type outside
rearview mirror, don’t fold it by
hand. It could cause motor failure.
CAUTION
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
ignition switch is in the OFF posi-
tion. However, to prevent unneces-
sary battery discharge, do not
adjust the mirrors longer than nec-
essary whilst the engine is not run-
ning.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 45
Features of your vehicle
464
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
6. Odometer/Trip computer (if equipped)
7. LCD display
OEL043308R/OEL044307R
* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details refer to the "Gauges" in
the next pages.
Type A
Type B
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 46
447
Features of your vehicle
Instrument panel illumination
(if equipped)
When the vehicle’s parking lights or
headlights are on, press the illumination
control button to adjust the instrument
panel illumination intensity.
The brightness of the instrument panel
illumination is displayed.
If the brightness reaches to the maxi-
mum or minimum level, an alarm will
sound.
LCD Display Control (if equipped)
The LCD display modes can be changed
by using the control buttons on the crash
pad.
(1) : MODE button for changing
modes
(2) : SELECT/RESET button
For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
OLM049052R
OEL043306/OLM043401E
Type A
Type B
OEL043702/Q
WARNING
Never adjust the instrument cluster
whilst driving. This could result in
loss of control and lead to an acci-
dent that may cause death, serious
injury, or property damage.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 47
Features of your vehicle
484
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the forward
speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in miles
per hour and/or kilometers per hour.
OEL049309/OEL049310/OEL049307/OEL049308
Type A (km/h)
Type B (km/h)
Type A (MPH)
Type B (MPH)
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 48
449
Features of your vehicle
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approxi-
mate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
The tachometer pointer may move slight-
ly when the ignition switch is in ACC or
ON position with the engine OFF. This
movement is normal and will not affect
the accuracy of the tachometer once the
engine is running.
Engine temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
OEL049311
ODMEMM2352
Type A
Type B
OEL049305/Q/OEL049306/Q
Diesel
Type B
Petrol
Diesel
Type A
Petrol
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 49
Features of your vehicle
504
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. The fuel tank capacity is given in
section 8. The fuel gauge is supplement-
ed by a low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly
empty.
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier than
usual due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
” position, it indicates over-
heating that may damage the
engine.
OEL049312
ODMEMM2351
Type A
Type B
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addition-
al fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
O (Empty) level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire damag-
ing the catalytic converter.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 50
451
Features of your vehicle
Odometer
The odometer Indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driven
and should be used to determine when
periodic maintenance should be per-
formed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 kilome-
ters or miles.
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current outside
air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).
- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 60°C
(-40°F ~ 140°F)
The outside temperature on the display
may not change immediately like a gen-
eral thermometer to prevent the driver
from being inattentive.
The temperature unit (from °C to °F or
from °F to °C) can be changed by using
the “User Settings” mode of the LCD dis-
play.
For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
Icy Road Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driver
the road may be icy.
When the following conditions occur, the
warning light (including Outside
Temperature Gauge) blinks 10 times and
then illuminates, and also warning chime
sounds 3 times.
- The temperature on the Outside
Temperature Gauge is below approxi-
mately 4°C (39.2°F)
- The ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON
OEL049127L
OEL043306
Type A
OEL042127L
OLM043060
Type B
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 51
Features of your vehicle
524
NOTICE
If the icy road warning light appears
whilst driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud-
den braking or sharp turning, etc.
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator displays which automatic
transaxle shift lever is selected.
•Park :P
Reverse : R
Neutral : N
•Drive :D
Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator
(if equipped, For Europe)
In the Sports Mode, this indicator informs
which gear is desired whilst driving to
save fuel.
• Shifting up :
2,
3,
4,
5,
6
• Shifting down :
1,
2,
3,
4,
5
OVF041049 OEL043701
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 52
453
Features of your vehicle
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th, 5th, or 6th
gear).
When the system is not working properly,
the indicator is not displayed.
Manual Transaxle Shift Indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator informs which gear is
desired whilst driving to save fuel.
Shifting up :
2,
3,
4,
5,
6
Shifting down :
1,
2,
3,
4,
5
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th, 5th, or 6th
gear).
When the system is not working properly,
the indicator is not displayed.
OEL043701
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 53
Features of your vehicle
544
LCD DISPLAY
LCD Modes (if equipped)
For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
Modes
Symbol
Explanation
Type B
Trip Computer
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Information
This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and warning messages relat-
ed to TPMS or washer fluid.
User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 54
455
Features of your vehicle
Information Mode
Service Interval
Service in
It calculates and displays when you need
a scheduled maintenance service
(mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time reaches
1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30 days, "Service
in" message is displayed for several sec-
onds each time you set the ignition
switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to the
ON position.
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serviced
according to the already inputted service
interval, “Service required” message is
displayed for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position. (The
mileage and time changes to "---")
To reset the service interval to the mileage
and days you inputted before:
- Activate the reset mode by pressing the
[]
button for more than 5 seconds,
then press the
[]
button again for more
than 1 second. (Europe)
- Press the
[]
button for more than 1
second (Except Europe).
NOTICE
If any of the following conditions occurs,
the mileage and days may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
OLM043405EOLMB043453R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 55
Features of your vehicle
564
User Settings Mode
Description
On this mode, you can change setting of
the doors, lamps, and so on.
Door
Auto Door Lock (if equipped)
Off:
The auto door lock operation will be
deactivated.
Speed:
All doors will be automatically locked
when the vehicle speed exceeds
15km/h (9.3mph).
Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically locked if
the automatic transaxle shift lever is
shifted from the P (Park) position to the
R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive)
position.
Auto Door Unlock (if equipped)
Off:
The auto door unlock operation will be
cancelled.
Key Out or Power Off:
All doors will be automatically unlocked
when the ignition key is removed from
ignition switch or Engine Star/Stop
Button is set to the OFF position.
Driver Door Unlock:
All doors will be automatically unlocked
if the driver's door is unlocked.
Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically unlocked
if the automatic transaxle shift lever is
shifted to the P (Park) position.
OEL044406E
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 56
457
Features of your vehicle
Horn Feedback (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the horn feedback
operation will be activated.
After locking the door by pressing the
lock button on the transmitter, if you
press the lock button again within 4 sec-
onds, the warning sound will operate
once to indicate that all doors are locked.
Lamp
Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the headlamp
delay and headlamp welcome function
will be activated.
Settings
Language (if equipped)
Choose the language you prefer within
the LCD display.
SPAS Voice (if equipped)
Adjust the volume of SPAS voice infor-
mation.
Temperature Unit
Convert the temperature unit from °C to
°F or from °F to °C.
AVG Fuel Eco Reset
Auto Reset:
The average fuel economy will reset
automatically when refuelling.
Manual Reset:
The average fuel economy will not
reset automatically whenever refu-
elling.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer”
in this chapter.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 57
Features of your vehicle
584
Service Interval (Except Europe)
On this mode, you can activate the serv-
ice interval function with mileage (km or
mi.) and period (months).
NOTICE
If it is not available to set service inter-
val on your vehicle, we recommend that
you consult a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Warning Messages (if equipped)
Shift to "P" position (for smart key
system and automatic transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If you
press the Engine Start/Stop Button
once more, it will turn to the ON posi-
tion).
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
the battery of the smart key is dis-
charged when the Engine Start/Stop
Button changes to the OFF position.
OLM043407E OLM043413E OLM043410E
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:04 PM Page 58
459
Features of your vehicle
Press start button whilst turn steer-
ing (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
the steering wheel does not unlock
normally when the Engine Start/Stop
Button is pressed.
• It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button whilst turning
the steering wheel right and left.
Steering wheel unlocked
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
the steering wheel does not lock when
the Engine Start/Stop Button changes
to the OFF position.
Check steering wheel lock
system (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
the steering wheel does not lock nor-
mally when the Engine Start/Stop
Button changes to the OFF position.
OLM043500N OLM043502N OLM043503N
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 59
Features of your vehicle
604
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and automatic
transaxle)
This warning message illuminates if the
Engine Start/Stop Button changes to
the ACC position twice by pressing the
button repeatedly without depressing
the brake pedal.
It means that you should depress the
brake pedal to start the engine.
Press clutch pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and manual
transaxle)
This warning message illuminates if the
Engine Start/Stop Button changes to
the ACC position twice by pressing the
button repeatedly without depressing
the clutch pedal.
It means that you should depress the
clutch pedal to start the engine.
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
the smart key is not in the vehicle when
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button.
It means that you always have the
smart key with you.
OLM043415E OLM043416E OLM043408E
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 60
461
Features of your vehicle
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
the smart key is not detected when you
press the Engine Start/Stop Button.
Press start button again
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a prob-
lem with the Engine Start/Stop Button
system.
It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine Start/
Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each time
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button, we recommend that you have
the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Press start button with smart key
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
you press the Engine Start/Stop Button
whilst the warning message “Key not
detected” is illuminating.
At this time, the immobiliser indicator
light blinks.
OLM043409E OLM043411E OLM043412E
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 61
Features of your vehicle
624
Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH"
(for smart key system and automatic
transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates if
the brake switch fuse is disconnected.
It means that you should replace the
fuse with a new one. If that is not pos-
sible, you can start the engine by
pressing the Engine Start/Stop Button
for 10 seconds in the ACC position.
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
(for smart key system and automatic
transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to start the engine with the shift
lever not in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
position.
NOTICE
You can start the engine with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position. But, for
your safety, we recommend that you start
the engine with the shift lever in the P
(Park) position.
Door Open
It means that any door is open.
OLM043417E OLM043414E OLM043418
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 62
463
Features of your vehicle
Tailgate Open
It means that the tailgate is open.
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
It means that the sunroof is open.
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)
This warning message illuminates on
the service reminder mode if the wash-
er fluid level in the reservoir is nearly
empty.
It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
OLM043419 OLM043420 OLM043501N
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 63
Features of your vehicle
644
Overview
Description
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information system that
displays information related to driving.
NOTICE
Some driving information stored in the
trip computer (for example Average
Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is
disconnected.
Trip Modes
Trip mode is changed as below whenev-
er pushing the button shortly.
- Type A : TRIP button
- Type B :
[]
Type A (if equipped)
* : if equipped
TRIP COMPUTER
OEL043703
OEL043702
Type A
Type B
TRIP
Elapsed time
Distance
to empty *
Average
vehicle speed
Average fuel
economy *
Instant fuel
economy *
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 64
465
Features of your vehicle
Type B (if equipped)
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
Type A
TRIP : Tripmeter
Type B
TRIP A :
Tripmeter A
: Mode changed
TRIP B :
Tripmeter B
:
Order changed
The tripmeter is the total driving dis-
tance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km or
mi.
To reset the tripmeter, press Trip button
(Type A : TRIP, Type B :
)
for more
than 1 second when the tripmeter is
displayed.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
The average vehicle speed is calculat-
ed by the total driving distance and
driving time since the last average
vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 km/h or MPH
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the trip button (Type A : TRIP,
Type B :
)
for more than 1 second
when the average vehicle speed is dis-
played.
Distance to empty /
Average fuel economy /
Instant fuel economy
Tripmeter B /
Average vehicle speed B /
Elapsed time B
Tripmeter A /
Average vehicle speed A /
Elapsed time A
For controlling the LCD modes, refer
to "LCD Display Control" in this chap-
ter.
OLM049320/OEL049325/
OEL049326/OLM044403TU
Type A Type B
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 65
Features of your vehicle
664
NOTICE
The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less
than 300 meters (0.186 miles) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average vehicle speed keeps going
whilst the engine is running.
Elapsed Time (3)
The elapsed time is the total driving
time since the last elapsed time reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
To reset the elapsed time, press the
trip button (Type A : TRIP, Type B :
)
for more than 1 second when the
elapsed time is displayed.
NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
elapsed time keeps going whilst the
engine is running.
Fuel Economy
Distance To Empty (1)
The distance to empty is the estimated
distance the vehicle can be driven with
the remaining fuel.
- Distance range: 50 ~ 9999 km or 30 ~
9999 mi.
If the estimated distance is below 50 km
(30 mi.), the trip computer will display “--
-” as distance to empty.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupt-
ed, the distance to empty function may
not operate correctly.
The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as it
is an estimate of the available driving
distance.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 litres (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi-
cle.
The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based on
driving conditions, driving habits, and
condition of the vehicle.
OLM049321/OEL049323/
OEL049324/OLM043402E
Type A Type B
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 66
467
Features of your vehicle
Average Fuel Economy (2)
The average fuel economy is calculat-
ed by the total driving distance and fuel
consumption since the last average fuel
economy reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
L/100km or MPG
The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automatically.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy manu-
ally, press the trip button (Type A : TRIP,
Type B :
)
for more than 1 second
when the average fuel economy is dis-
played.
Automatic reset
The average fuel economy will be
cleared to zero (---) when the vehicle
speed exceeds 1 km/h after refuelling
more than 6 litres (1.6 gallons).
NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not dis-
played for more accurate calculation if
the vehicle does not drive more than 10
seconds or 50 meters (0.03 miles) since
the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is turned to ON.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few seconds
when the vehicle speed is more than
10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
- Fuel economy range:
Type A : 0 ~ 99.9 L/100 km or MPG
Type B : 0 ~ 30 L/100 km or 0 ~ 50
MPG
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 67
Features of your vehicle
684
Warnings and indicators
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). If any light does not illuminate,
we recommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention. When releasing the
parking brake, the brake system warning
light should go off. The fuel warning light
will stay on if the fuel level is low.
ECO Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When you activate the active ECO sys-
tem by pressing the ACTIVE ECO button.
For more details, refer to “Active ECO
System” in chapter 5.
Air bag warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
This light also comes on when the SRS
is not working properly. If the AIR BAG
warning light does not come on, or con-
tinuously remains on after operating for
about 6 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position or start-
ed the engine, or if it comes on whilst
driving, we recommend that the system
be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
ECO
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 68
469
Features of your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
(if equipped)
This light illuminates if the ignition switch
is turned to ON and goes off in approxi-
mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-
ing normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on whilst driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that there may be a problem with the
ABS.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer. The normal braking
system will still be operational, but with-
out the assistance of the anti-lock brake
system.
Electronic brake
force distribution
(EBD) system
warning light
If two warning lights illuminate at the
same time whilst driving, your vehicle
may have a malfunction with ABS and
EBD system.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. We rec-
ommend that the system be checked by
a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
NOTICE
If the ABS warning light or EBD warn-
ing light is on and stays on, the
speedometer or odometer/tripmeter
may not work. Also, the EPS warning
light may illuminate and the steering
effort may increase or decrease. In this
case, we recommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
WARNING
If the both ABS and Brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehi-
cle’s brake system will not work
normally. So you may experience
an unexpected and dangerous situ-
ation during sudden braking. In this
case, avoid high speed driving and
abrupt braking.
We recommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 69
Features of your vehicle
704
Seat belt warning and
chime (if equipped)
Seat belt warning light
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink or illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch ON regardless of
belt fastening.
For details, refer to the seat belt on chap-
ter 3.
Turn signal indicator lights
The blinking green arrows on the instru-
ment panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
a malfunction in the turn signal system is
indicated. If this occurs, we recommend
that the system be checked by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
This indicator also blinks when the haz-
ard warning switch is turned on.
Low Beam Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates when the
headlights are on.
High beam indicator
This indicator illuminates when the head-
lights are on and in the high beam posi-
tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light on indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator illuminates when the tail
lights or headlights are ON.
Front fog light indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator illuminates when the front
fog lights are ON.
Rear fog light indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator illuminates when the rear
fog lights are ON.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 70
471
Features of your vehicle
Engine oil pressure warn-
ing
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates whilst driv-
ing:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, we rec-
ommend that you call a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
Engine oil level warning
light (if equipped)
The engine oil level warning light illumi-
nates when the engine oil level should be
checked.
If the warning light comes on, check the
engine oil level as soon as possible and
add engine oil as required.
Slowly pour the recommended oil little by
little into a funnel. (Oil refill capacity :
approximately 0.6 ~ 1.0 l)
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to "Recommended lubricants and capac-
ities" in section 8.)
Do not overfill the engine oil to ensure
the oil level is not above F mark on the
dipstick.
CAUTION
If the oil pressure warning light
stays on whilst the engine is run-
ning, serious engine damage may
result. The oil pressure warning
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is
started. If the oil pressure warning
light stays on whilst the engine is
running, there is a serious malfunc-
tion.
If this happens, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so, turn off
the engine and check the oil level. If
the oil level is low, fill the engine oil
to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on
with the engine running, turn the
engine off immediately. In any
instance where the oil light stays on
when the engine is running, we rec-
ommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
CAUTION
If the engine is not stopped immedi-
ately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated, severe
damage could result.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 71
Features of your vehicle
724
NOTICE
• If you travel approximately 50~100
km after the engine warms up, after
adding the engine oil, the warning
light will go off.
Cycle the ignition from OFF to ON 3
times within 10 seconds, the warning
light will go off immediately. However,
when you turn off the warning light
without adding the engine oil, the light
will come on again after travelling
approximately 50~100 km after the
engine warms up.
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly. We
recommend that you contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-
nal braking systems.This means you still
have braking on two wheels even if one
of the dual systems should fail. With only
one of the dual systems working, more
than normal pedal travel and greater
pedal pressure are required to stop the
car. Also, the car will not stop in as short
a distance with only a portion of the
brake system working. If the brakes fail
whilst you are driving, shift to a lower
gear for additional engine braking and
stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, we rec-
ommend that the system be serv-
iced by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
CAUTION
If the light comes on continuously
after adding the engine oil and trav-
elling approximately 50~100 km
after the engine warms up, we rec-
ommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Even if this light doesn't come on
after the engine has started, the
engine oil should be checked and
supplied periodically.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 72
473
Features of your vehicle
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System) indicator (if equipped)
Low tyre pressure telltale
Low tyre pressure position
telltale
The low tyre pressure telltale comes on
for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the "ON" position.
The low tyre pressure and position tell-
tales illuminate when one or more of your
tyres is significantly underinflated.
The low tyre pressure telltale will illumi-
nate after it blinks for approximately one
minute when there is a problem with the
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
For details, refer to the TPMS on chapter 6.
Auto stop indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator will illuminate when the
engine enters the Idle Stop mode of the
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system.
When the automatic starting occurrs, the
auto stop indicator on the cluster will
blink for 5 seconds.
For more details, refer to the ISG (Idle
Stop and Go) system on the front of
chapter 5.
NOTICE
When the engine automatically starts by
the ISG system, some warning lights
(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking
brake warning light) may turn on for a
few seconds.
This happens because of the low battery
voltage. It does not mean the system is
malfunctioning.
WARNING - Safe stopping
The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tyre damage
caused by external factors.
If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes
gradually and with light force,
and slowly move to a safe posi-
tion off the road.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 73
Features of your vehicle
744
Charging system warning
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on whilst the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the genera-
tor drive belt for looseness or break-
age.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-
lem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. We recommend that
the system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Door ajar warning light
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely with the igni-
tion switch in any position.
Tailgate open warning light
This warning light illuminates when the
tailgate is not closed securely with the
ignition switch in any position.
Door open position indicator
(including tailgate)
This indicator illuminates when a door or
tailgate is not closed securely.
The indicator displays which door or tail-
gate is opened.
Sunroof open warning light
(if equipped)
If the driver removes the ignition key
(Smart key : turns off the engine) and
opens the driver-side door when the sun-
roof is not fully closed, the warning chime
will sound for approximately 7 seconds
and Sunroof Open Warning Light illumi-
nate or blink for approximately 7 sec-
onds.
Close the sunroof securely when leaving
your vehicle.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 74
475
Features of your vehicle
Immobiliser indicator
(if equipped)
Without smart key system
This indicator illuminates when the
immobiliser key is inserted and turned to
the ON position to start the engine.
At this time, you can start the engine.The
indicator goes out after the engine is run-
ning.
If this indicator blinks when the ignition
switch is in the ON position before start-
ing the engine, we recommend that the
system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
With smart key system
If any of the following occurs in a vehicle
equipped with the smart key, the immo-
biliser indicator illuminates, blinks or
goes off.
When the battery of the smart key is
weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start the
engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart key.
(For more details, refer to “Starting
the Engine” in section 5).
If the indicator illuminates only for 2
seconds and goes out when the
ENGINE START/STOP button is
turned to ON position with the smart
key in the vehicle, we recommend that
the system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
When the battery is weak, if the
ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed, the indicator will blink and you
are not able to start the engine.
However, you are able to start the
engine by pressing the engine
start/stop button with the smart key.
Also, if the smart key system related
parts have a problem, the indicator will
blink.
Low fuel level warning
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “E” can cause
the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 75
Features of your vehicle
764
CAUTION -
Diesel engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light blinks,
some error related to the injection
quantity adjustment occurs which
could result in loss of engine
power, combustion noise and poor
emission. We recommend that the
system be inspected by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL) (check engine light)
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates whilst driving, it indi-
cates that a potential problem has been
detected somewhere in the emission
control system.
This light will also illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion, and will go out in a few seconds
after the engine is started. If it illuminates
whilst driving, or does not illuminate
when the ignition key is turned to the ON
position, we recommend that the system
be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
CAUTION - Diesel engine
(if equipped with DPF)
When the malfunction indicator
light is blinks, it may stop blinking
after driving the vehicle at more
than 37 mph (60km/h) or at more
than second gear with 1500 ~ 2000
engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
If the malfunction indicator light
continues to blink in spite of the
procedure, we recommend that the
system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
If you continue to drive with the
malfunction indicator light blinking
for a long time, the DPF system can
be damaged and fuel consumption
can be worsen.
CAUTION
Prolonged driving with the
Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-
nated may cause damage to the
emission control systems which
could effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION -
Petrol engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-
nates, potential catalytic converter
damage is possible which could
result in loss of engine power. We
recommend that the system be
inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 76
477
Features of your vehicle
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illumi-
nates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3 sec-
onds and then goes off.
When there is a malfunction with the
ESC system.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
This indicator light blinks:
Whilst the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) OFF Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illumi-
nates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3 sec-
onds and then goes off.
When you deactivate the ESC system
by pressing the ESC OFF button.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
Cruise indicator
(if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
control system is enabled.
The cruise indicator in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the cruise
control ON-OFF button on the steering
wheel is pushed.
The indicator goes off when the cruise
control ON-OFF button is pushed again.
For more information about the use of
cruise control, refer to “Cruise control
system” in section 5.
Cruise SET indicator
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
control switch (-SET or RES+) is ON.
The cruise SET indicator in the instru-
ment cluster is illuminated when the
cruise control switch (-SET or RES+) is
pushed.
The cruise SET indicator does not illumi-
nate when the cruise control switch
(CANCEL) is pushed or the system is
disengaged.
SET
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 77
Features of your vehicle
784
DBC (Downhill brake con-
trol) indicator (if equipped)
The DBC indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 sec-
onds.
The DBC indicator will illuminate when
the DBC button is pressed and the sys-
tem is on.
When driving down a steep hill at a
speed under 22 mph (35 km/h), the DBC
will operate and the DBC indicator will
blink to indicate the DBC is operating.
If the red indicator illuminates, the DBC
system may have malfunctioned. We rec-
ommend that the system be checked by
a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
KEY OUT indicator
(if equipped)
When the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC or ON position, if any door
is open, the system checks for the smart
key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle,
the indicator will blink, and if all doors are
closed, the chime will also sound for
about 5 seconds.The indicator will go off
whilst the vehicle is moving. Keep the
smart key in the vehicle.
Key reminder warning chime
(if equipped)
If the driver’s door is opened whilst the
ignition key is left in the ignition switch
(ACC or LOCK position), the key
reminder warning chime will sound. This
is to prevent you from locking your keys
in the vehicle.The chime sounds until the
key is removed from the ignition switch or
the driver’s door is closed.
KEY
OUT
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 78
479
Features of your vehicle
Glow indicator
(Diesel engine)
The indicator light illuminates when the
ignition switch is placed at the ON posi-
tion. The engine can be started after the
preheat indicator light goes off. The illu-
minating time varies with the water tem-
perature, air temperature and battery
condition.
NOTICE
If the engine was not started within 10
seconds after the preheating is complet-
ed, turn the ignition key once more to
the LOCK position during 10 seconds,
and then to the ON position, in order to
preheat again.
Fuel filter warning light
(Diesel engine)
This warning light illuminates for 3 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is set to the
ON position and then it will go out. If it
lights up whilst the engine is running, it
indicates that water has accumulated
inside the fuel filter. If this happens,
remove the water from the fuel filter. For
more Information, refer to “Fuel filter” in
section 7.
4WD system warning light
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the 4WD indicator will illumi-
nate and then go off in a few seconds.
If the 4WD system warning light
illuminates, this indicates that there is a
malfunction in the 4WD system. If this
occurs, we recommend that the system
be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
CAUTION
When the fuel filter warning light is
illuminated, engine power (vehicle
speed & idle speed) may decrease.
If you keep driving with the warning
light on, you can damage your vehi-
cle's engine parts and injection sys-
tem of the Common Rail. If this
occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
CAUTION
If the preheat indicator continues to
illuminate or flash on and off after
the engine has warmed up or whilst
driving, we recommend that the
system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 79
Features of your vehicle
804
4WD LOCK indicator
(if equipped)
The 4WD LOCK indicator light is illumi-
nated when the 4WD LOCK button is
pushed. The purpose of this 4WD LOCK
mode is to increase the drive power
when driving on wet pavement, snow-
covered roads and/or off-road.The 4WD
LOCK indicator light is turned off by
pushing the button again.
Engine coolant tempera-
ture warning light
(if equipped)
The warning light illuminates if the tem-
perature of the engine coolant is above
120±3°C (248±5.4°F).
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “Overheating” in section 6.
NOTICE
If the engine coolant temperature warn-
ing light illuminates, it indicates over-
heating that may damage the engine.
Electronic power steering
(EPS) system warning
light (if equipped)
This indicator light comes on after the
ignition key is turned to the ON position
and then it will go out.
This light also comes on when the EPS
has some troubles. If it comes on whilst
driving, we recommend that the system
be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
CAUTION
Do not use 4WD LOCK mode on dry
paved roads or motorway, it can
cause noise, vibration or damage of
4WD related parts.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 80
481
Features of your vehicle
This is the parking assist system to warn
the driver of object which are detected by
front, rear and side sensors with range of
distance of sensors operation as warning
sound or indicator (LCD) when the vehi-
cle is moved back or forward.
This system is a supplemental system
and it is not intended to nor does it
replace the need for extreme care and
attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limited.
Whenever getting forward or backing-up,
pay as much attention to what is front or
behind you as you would in a vehicle
without a parking assist system.
Rear parking assist system type
(if equipped)
The rear sensor detects the distance
between vehicle and object. The rear
parking assist system assists the driver
during backward movement of the vehi-
cle by chiming if any object is sensed
within a distance of 120 cm (47 in.)
behind the vehicle. This system is a sup-
plemental system and it is not intended
to nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the back sensors are limit-
ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as much
attention to what is behind you as you
would in a vehicle without a rear parking
assist system.
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OEL049223R
WARNING
The parking assist system should
only be considered as a supple-
mentary function. The driver must
check the front and rear view. The
operational function of the parking
assist system can be affected by
many factors and conditions of the
surroundings and can not be oper-
ated normally, so the responsibility
rests always with the driver.
OLM043080
OEL043246E
Rear sensors
Front/Side sensors
SS
SS
ee
ee
nn
nn
ss
ss
oo
oo
rr
rr
ss
ss
FF
FF
rr
rr
oo
oo
nn
nn
tt
tt
SS
SS
ee
ee
nn
nn
ss
ss
oo
oo
rr
rr
ss
ss
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 81
Features of your vehicle
824
Operating condition
This system will activate when backing
up with the ignition switch ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed over
10 km/h (6 mph), the system may not
be activated correctly.
This system will activate when the indi-
cator on the rear parking assist OFF
button is not illuminated. If you desire
to deactivate the rear parking assist
system, press the rear parking assist
OFF button again. (The indicator on
the button will illuminate.) To turn the
system on, press the button again.
(The indicator on the button will go off.)
The sensing distance whilst the rear
parking assist system is in operation is
approximately 120 cm (47 in.).
When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
When an object is 120 cm to 61 cm
(47.2 in. to 24 in.) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps intermittently.
When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm (23.6
in. to 12.2 in.) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps more frequently.
When an object is within 30 cm (11.8
in.) of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
WARNING
The rear parking assist system is a
supplementary function only. The
operation of the rear parking assist
system can be affected by several
factors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before and
whilst backing up.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 82
483
Features of your vehicle
Non-operational conditions
The rear parking assist system may not
operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when the moisture
has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate
normally when the material is removed
or the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces.
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-
ent)
4. Objects generating excessive noise
(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes) are within
range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6.Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing.
9. The place light the fluorescent lamp.
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is stained with foreign mat-
ter such as snow or water. (The sens-
ing range will return to normal when
removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
The following objects may not be recog-
nized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the sen-
sor frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m
(40 in.) in height and narrower than 14
cm (6 in.) in diameter.
Rear parking assist system precau-
tions
The rear parking assist system may
not sound sequentially depending on
the speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has been
modified or damaged. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor per-
formance.
The sensor may not recognize objects
less than 30 cm (11.8 in.) from the sen-
sor, or it may sense an incorrect dis-
tance. Use caution.
When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-
sor. Sensor damage could occur.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 40 in.
(1 m) in height and narrower than 6 in.
(14 cm) in diameter.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 83
Features of your vehicle
844
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects with-
in the range and location of the sensors;
It can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, such as poles or
objects located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the vehi-
cle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabili-
ties and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-
tently when shifting the gear to the R
(Reverse) position, this may indicate a
malfunction in the rear parking assist
system. If this occurs, we recommend
that the system be checked by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehi-
cle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the object’s
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visu-
al inspection to make sure the vehi-
cle is clear of all obstructions
before moving the vehicle in any
direction.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 84
485
Features of your vehicle
Front/Rear parking assist system
type (if equipped)
The front/rear parking assist system
detects the object distance by using the
front/rear sensor and front side sensor.
When you select the smart parking assist
system*, the front/rear parking assist
system will be operated.
When it is the step controlling the steer-
ing wheel if you cancel the front/rear
parking assist system, the smart parking
assist system will be cancelled.
Operating condition
• This parking assist system activates
and the indicator on the button illumi-
nates when the parking assist button
( ) is pressed with the ignition
switch ON. And it operates in forward,
reverse and neutral position of the shift
lever.
The parking assist button turns on
automatically and activates the parking
assist system when you shift the gear
to the R (Reverse) position. If you drive
the vehicle above 10km/h, the warning
will not activate.
When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, warning indi-
cator is displayed all.
When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be warned by warning sound.
Whilst backing up, if the front and rear
sensor recognizes an object at the
same distance, the rear will be warned
first.
The warnings by side sensors are
operated when the shift lever is in R
(Reverse) position.
Types of warning sound
When driving forward
When an object is 100 cm to 61 cm
(39 in. to 24 in.) from the bumper:
Buzzer beeps intermittently.
When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm (23
in. to 12 in.) from the bumper:
Buzzer beeps more frequently.
When an object is within 30 cm (15 in.)
of the bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
When driving rearward or the shift lever
is in N position
When an object is 120 cm to 61 cm
(47.2 in. to 24 in.) from the bumper:
Buzzer beeps intermittently.
When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm (23
in. to 12 in.) from the bumper:
Buzzer beeps more frequently.
When an object is within 30 cm (11 in.)
of the bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
OLM042247R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 85
Features of your vehicle
864
Self-diagnosis
When the front/rear parking assist sys-
tem has a malfunction, if you operate the
system, the warning sound sounds 3
times. In this time, the indicator on switch
will blink and the warning on the cluster
will blink.However, the warning regarding
object will not sound.
In this time, we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehi-
cle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the object's
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visual
inspection to make sure the vehicle
is clear of all obstructions before
moving the vehicle in any direction.
CAUTION
This system can only sense
objects within the range and loca-
tion of the sensors;
It can not detect objects in other
areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim
objects, such as poles or objects
located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check front or
behind the vehicle when getting
forward or backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of
the vehicle that may be unfamiliar
with the system regarding the
systems capabilities and limita-
tions.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants related to a parking assist
system. Always drive safely and
cautiously.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 86
487
Features of your vehicle
The smart parking assist system allows
you to park the vehicle to search a space
by sensors. This system is a supplemen-
tal system that shows message and
gives auditory warning by controlling the
steering wheel.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limited.
Whenever moving pay as much attention
to what is in front and behind of you as
you would in a vehicle without a parking
assist system.
The rear parallel parking is only possible
in this smart parking assist system.
Use this smart parking assist system in
parking lot or parking space.
If there are no vehicles in front of space
that you want to park the vehicle, the
smart parking assist system is not sup-
ported. Also the diagonal line parking is
not supported.
After parking the vehicle, the parking sit-
uation may be not desired parking posi-
tion by arrangement situation between
vehicle and vehicle or between wall and
vehicle.
By necessity, turn off the smart parking
assist system and park the vehicle by
manual parking.
If you select this system, the warning
sound always let you know whether there
are the objects or not by distance with
operating the front/rear parking assist
system.
Whilst operating this system, if you turn
off the front/rear parking assist system
after searching parking space, the smart
parking assist system is also turned off.
SMART PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF041306R
WARNING
The smart parking assist system
can not be operated normally by
surround situations and other
conditions. The driver always
needs to confirm the objects.
This system is for parking assist,
do not depend on this system
only. By surrounding conditions,
park the vehicle carefully and
safely like applying the brake
pedal.
If the vehicle is necessary to con-
trol wheel alignment, this system
is not operated normally. We rec-
ommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
If you change the genuine tyres
to other tyres type and size, the
parking ability may change.When
you change the tyres, use the
same tyres and size.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 87
Features of your vehicle
884
Operating condition
Use the smart parking assist system as
follows when all conditions are satisfied.
This system helps you park the vehicle to
centre or rear of parked vehicle through
steering wheel control with each informa-
tion.
When the parking space is straight line
When the parallel parking required
When the parked vehiclces are located
When there is enough space moving
the vehicle with the smart parking
assist system
Non-operational conditions
Never use the smart parking assist sys-
tem as follows because of the system
ability decrease, off or danger of crash.
When the parking space is curved
Inclined road
When loading long or wide cargo com-
pared to vehicle
Diagonal line parking
If there is trash, grass or barriers in
parking space
When snowing or raining heavily
Pole is close to parking line
• Being equipped with snow chain or
spare tyre
Low or High tyre pressure
Being connected to trailer
Surface of road is slippery or not clear
If there is bumpy road
If there is truck or bus in parking space
The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked
Moisture is frozen to the sensor.
If there is motorcycle or bicycle in park-
ing space
If there is the waste bin or barrier
Heavy wind
If the tyre is changed to unauthorised
tyre
If there is a problem with wheel align-
ment
The parking place next to flower bed or
bush
OVF041307R
Parallel parking
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 88
489
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
In following conditions, when smart
parking assist system is operated,
the unexpected result may occur
and it could result in serious injury.
Do not use the smart parking assist
system.
1. Slope road parking
When the smart parking assist sys-
tem is operated in slope road, driv-
er needs to apply to accelerator
and brake pedal by himself. If driv-
er is unfamiliar with controlling the
pedal, the crash accident may
occur.
(Continued)
OLM041290
(Continued)
2. Parking in snowed space
Following amount of snow cover,
the sensing ability could be low.
When the vehicle is slipped during
parking by smart parking assist
System, system can be cancelled, If
driver is unfamiliar with controlling
the accelerator and brake pedal, the
crash accident may occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
3. Narrow parking space
When the space for parking is not
enough, space searching may not
operate in narrow road. Even if
space searching is sensed, be care-
ful.
(Continued)
OLM041292
OSL040144
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 89
Features of your vehicle
904
(Continued)
4. Diagonal line parking
The smart parking assist system is
a supplemental system for parallel
parking. Diagonal line parking is
not applied. Even if vehicle could
enter the space, do not operate the
smart parking assist system.
Because the smart parking assist
system tries parallel parking.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5. Parking in uneven road
When vehicle is parked in uneven
road, driver needs to properly con-
trol the pedal (clutch, accelerator or
brake) by himself. If not, unexpect-
ed result may occur.
The system may cancel when the
vehicle slips. If driver is unfamiliar
with controlling the pedal, the
crash accident may occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6. Parking behind a truck
When vehicle is parked behind a
vehicle of which storage compart-
ment is high like truck, the fender-
bender may occur.
(Continued)
OVF041308R OLM041291
OLM041274
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 90
491
Features of your vehicle
Operation way
Before operating the smart parking assist
system, confirm the condition that is pos-
sible to use. For safety, always operate it
by applying the brake pedal under any
condition, for example before each step,
whilst pressing the ON/OFF button of this
system or shifting the lever, etc.
When vehicle is parked by using the
smart parking assist system, general
steps are followings
1.The smart parking assist system select
2.Parking mode select
3.Parking space search : Direct way driv-
ing
4.Search complete : Automatic search by
sensor
However, before parking, real parking
environment confirmations are needed
for driver.
5.Steering wheel support (Rear Parking
type)
(1) Operate shift lever by display in
cluster
(2) Always drive slowly with applying to
brake
6.Smart parking assist system complete
7.If required, move vehicle to manual
operation
According to parking space, select
mode, and surrounding environment, the
sequence of display or situation could be
changed. Refer to next operation way.
(Continued)
7. If there is an object in parking
space
Even if there are barriers, the smart
parking assist system may detect
the parking space. In this case, if
you try to park the vehicle, the acci-
dent may occur. Do not use the
smart parking assist system.
In any cases, do not depend on the
smart parking assist system. Take
the necessary action regarding
safety with confirming all situa-
tions.
OVF041309R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:05 PM Page 91
Features of your vehicle
924
1. Smart parking assist system
select
Select the smart parking assist system
by pushing the button. Instruction display
of instrument cluster is displayed and the
indicator on button of this system and
front/rear parking assist system button
are illuminated.
During operating system, warning sound
is operated when objects are detected.
To turn off this system, push the button
( ) of system choice over 2 seconds.
After engine is off, if engine is turned on,
this system is on position of turning off.
If needed, push this button.
2. Parking mode select
With applying the brake shift the
transaxle to N or D and select the
desired parking mode by pushing the
button ( ).
When system is selected, it is automati-
cally selected right side - parallel mode.
If you push the switch continuously, the
left side-parallel mode is selected. If you
push again, you can get out the smart
parking assist system mode.
3. Parking space search
As pictures, keep distance between
parked vehicles in 0.5-1.5m constantly.
Drive slowly to desired parking space.
The parking space is searched from side
sensor automatically. If the speed is over
30km/h, notice the warning message to
driver. If the speed is over 40kn/h, the
system turns off.
When there are a lot of vehicles near
vehicle, turn on the hazard warning flash-
er to let other vehicles not be close.
If parking space is narrow, drive slowly to
desired parking space.
However, this step searches for a parking
space if your vehicle has enough space
to move except for parking space. If sat-
isfied, this system searches for parking
space.
OEL043248R OLM043428E/OLM043429E
Right side
- parallel mode
Left side
-parallel mode
OLM043430E/OLM043431E
Right side
- parallel mode
Left side
-parallel mode
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 92
493
Features of your vehicle
4. Searching completion
Whilst driving slowly, when the parking
space searching is completed, the park-
ing space searching completion is indi-
cated in the cluster with buzzer beeps
sound. After stop, shift the transaxle to R.
CAUTION
Whilst driving the vehicle with
searching for the parking space, it
is impossible to search for the
parking space if any of following
occurs:
(1) If there is no parked vehicle
(2) If there is empty space after
your vehicle passed
(3) If there is empty space in front
of your vehicle before passing
As followings, the smart parking
assist system may normally not
operate.
(1) When the sensors are frozen
(2) When the sensors are dirty
(3) Heavy snowing or raining
(4) By the pillar or objects
Use the smart parking assist sys-
tem after confirming the safety
securely even if the parking
searching is completed.
CAUTION -
When the park-
ing space is searched
For parallel parking, when the park-
ing space is searched, keep the 50-
150cm distance with parked vehicle
and drive slowly.
If the vehicle closes to the parked
vehicle under 50cm or over 150cm,
the parking space is not exactly
detected.
OVF041310R
50~150 cm
CAUTION
Drive slowly with applying to
brake.
• If not enough parking space is
detected, the system may be can-
celled in support step of steering
wheel control.
Such as not enough parking
space, do not park the vehicle.
OLM043432E/OLM043433E
Right side
- parallel mode
Left side
-parallel mode
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 93
Features of your vehicle
944
CAUTION
If you go forward or backward
without notice like warning mes-
sage, the parking state may be
not good.
However, if the 3rd warning sound
(continuous sound) occurs, drive
the vehicle reverse direction
slowly after confirming surround-
ing objects.
When parking the vehicle, care-
fully go forward or backward with
depressing the brake pedal after
completing steering wheel con-
trol support.
If the speed of vehicle is high, the
crash accident may occur.
Whilst parking the vehicle, if the
3rd warning sound (continuous
sound) occurs, it means the vehi-
cle is close to objects. Check the
surround objects by yourself.
5. Steering wheel control support
(Rear Parking type)
When the transaxle is shifted to R, the
steering wheel is automatically controlled
with the notice in cluster.
In this time, if you put your hands to
space of steering wheel, it may result in
damage to your hands. So do not left
your hands to space of steering wheel.
If you crab the steering wheel firmly
not to support parking, the system
turns off.
However, the driver needs to confirm the
surround situation before releasing the
brake pedal. Drive slowly always.
When the brake pedal is released, if
the vehicle does not move backward,
depress the accelerator pedal careful-
ly after checking the surround
objects.
However, do not pass 7km/h. If neces-
sary, depress the brake pedal and
stop. If the speed of vehicle is over
7km/h, the system turns off.
OLM043426E
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 94
495
Features of your vehicle
System cancellation whilst park-
ing
Push the smart parking assist system or
turn the steering wheel left side or right
side.
5-1. Gear shifting whilst control-
ling the steering wheel
By parking circumstance, if the buzzer
beep sounds with warning messages,
shift the transaxle to desired gear on
cluster, park the vehicle with using brake.
Be sure to check the front and rear view
before releasing the brake pedal. Stop
the vehicle when the speed of your vehi-
cle is high and stop immediately by
depressing the brake pedal if necessary.
OLM043434E/OLM043435E
OLM043422E
WARNING
Whilst parking the vehicle, unex-
pected vehicles or pedestrians may
be close to vehicle, be careful for
the accident.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 95
Features of your vehicle
964
CAUTION
Park the vehicle by yourself as fol-
lowing because the system will be
cancelled;
1.Whilst searching for the parking
space
- When the ABS/ESC is operated
- When the vehicle speed is over
40km/h
- When you click the smart parking
assist system button
(The front and rear parking assist
system is normally operated)
- When you shift the transaxle to R
2.Whilst controlling the steering
wheel
- When the ABS/ESC is operated
- When the vehicle speed is over
7km/h
- When you click the smart parking
assist system button
(The front and rear parking assist
system is normally operated.)
- When you shift the transaxle to D
before entering the parking
space
- When you grab the steering
strongly
6. Smart parking assist system
completion
Even if the vehicle is parked by smart
parking assist system, the driver needs
to control the brake pedal by himself.
According to message on cluster, finish
the parking the vehicle. By surrounding
circumstance, finish the parking the vehi-
cle with using the steering wheel.
After finishing the smart parking assist
system, check the front and rear distance
from front and rear vehicle and control
your vehicle.
Additional introductions
When the smart parking assist system
operated, the message may indicate on
cluster regardless information sequence.
Other messages may indicate on cluster
by circumstance.
When the system operated, control the
vehicle with the notice. Regarding safety
action, the driver needs to be careful.
OLM043427E OLM043425E/OLM043423E
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 96
497
Features of your vehicle
System malfunction warning
When problems occur in the smart park-
ing assist system, if you turn on the sys-
tem, the warning message occurs and
the indicator on button. The buzzer beep
sounds 3 times.
In this time, do not use the smart parking
assist system. We recommend that the
system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
OLM043424E
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 97
Features of your vehicle
984
The rearview camera will activate when
the back-up light is ON with the ignition
switch ON and the shift lever in the R
(Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental system
that shows behind the vehicle through the
rearview display mirror whilst backing-up.
Type B
The rearview camera may be turned off
by pressing the ON/OFF button when the
rearview camera is activated.
To turn the camera on again, press the
ON/OFF button again when the ignition
switch is on and the shift lever in R
(Reverse). Also, the camera will turn on
automatically whenever the ignition
switch is turned off and on again.
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the car in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emer-
gency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pushing in the hazard switch. This
causes all turn signal lights to blink. The
hazard warning lights will operate even
though the key is not in the ignition
switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsibil-
ity of the driver to always check
the inside/outside rearview mirror
and the area behind the vehicle
before and whilst backing up
because there is a dead zone that
can't see through the camera.
Always keep the camera lens
clean. If lens is covered with for-
eign matter, the camera may not
operate normally.
OEL043081
OLM049084
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
OEL049083R
Type B
OEL049082R
Type A
Rear view display
Rear view display
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 98
499
Features of your vehicle
Battery saver function
The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver removes the ignition key and
opens the driver- side door.
With this feature, the parking lights will
be turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed, per-
form the following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Headlight escort function
(if equipped)
IThe headlights (and/or taillights) remain
on for approximately 5 minutes after the
ignition key is removed or turned to the
ACC or LOCK position. However, if the
driver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlights are turned off after 15 sec-
onds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmit-
ter (or smart key) twice or turning off the
light switch from the headlight or Auto
light position.
Headlight welcome function
(if equipped)
When the headlight switch is in the ON or
AUTO position and all doors (and tail-
gate) are closed and locked, if you press
the door unlock button on the transmitter
(or smart key), the headlights will come
on for about 15 seconds.
If the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position, the function can only operate at
night.
At this time, if you press the door unlock
button again or door lock button on the
transmitter (or smart key), the headlights
will turn off immediately.
LIGHTING
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except dri-
ver’s door), the battery saver func-
tion does not operate and the head-
light escort function does not turn
off automatically. Therefore, it caus-
es the battery to be discharged. In
this case, make sure to turn off the
lamp before getting out of the vehi-
cle.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 99
Features of your vehicle
1004
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the fol-
lowing positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the parking
light position, the tail, position, license
and instrument panel lights are ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position the head, tail, position, license
and instrument panel lights are ON.
NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
OBK049047NOBK049046NOBK049045N
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 100
4 101
Features of your vehicle
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position, the taillights and headlights will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light outside
the vehicle.
High - beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it back
for low beams.
The high-beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched
on.
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on for a
prolonged time whilst the engine is not
running.
OBK049050N
CAUTION
Never place anything over the
sensor (1) located on the instru-
ment panel, this will ensure better
auto-light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleaner may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the
front windscreen, the Auto light
system may not work properly.
OBK049048N
WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high
beam could obstruct the other dri-
ver's vision.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 101
Features of your vehicle
1024
Flashing headlights
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low-beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
Turn signals and lane change sig-
nals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). Green arrow indicators on the instru-
ment panel indicate which turn signal is
operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is com-
pleted. If the indicator continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever to
the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-
tion when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
One-touch lane change function
(if equipped)
To activate an one-touch lane change
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3 times.
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, bulb may be burned out or have
a poor electrical connection in the cir-
cuit.
OBK049051NOBK049049N
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 102
4 103
Features of your vehicle
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,
rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn
on when the fog light switch (1) is turned
on after the parklight is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog light
switch (1) to the OFF position.
Rear fog light (if equipped)
To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the
headlight switch to the headlight on posi-
tion and turn the rear fog light switch (1)
to the on position.
The rear fog lights turn on when the rear
fog light switch is turned on after the front
fog light switch (if equipped) is turned on
and the headlight switch is in the park-
light position.
To turn the rear fog lights off, turn the rear
fog light switch to the on position again or
turn the headlight switch off or front fog
light switch off.
NOTICE
To turn on the rear fog light switch, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position.
OED040806
Type B
OAM049046L
Type A
OBK049052N
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 103
Features of your vehicle
1044
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make
it easier for others to see the front of your
vehicle during the day. DRL can be help-
ful in many different driving conditions,
and it is especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system will make the head-
lights turn OFF when:
1. The parklight switch is ON.
2. Engine stops.
Headlight levelling device
(if equipped)
To adjust the headlight beam level
according to the number of the passen-
gers and the loading weight in the lug-
gage area, turn the beam levelling switch.
The higher the number of the switch
position, the lower the headlight beam
level. Always keep the headlight beam at
the proper levelling position, or head-
lights may dazzle other road users.
Listed below are the examples of proper
switch settings. For loading conditions
other than those listed below, adjust the
switch position so that the beam level
may be the nearest as the condition
obtained according to the list.
Loading condition Switch position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front passenger 0
Full passengers
(including driver)
1
Full passengers (including
driver) + Maximum permis-
sible loading
2
Driver + Maximum permis-
sible loading
3
OLM049211R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 104
4 105
Features of your vehicle
Automatic type
It automatically adjusts the headlight
beam level according to the number of
passengers and loading weight in the
luggage area.
And it offers proper headlight beam
under various conditions.
WARNING
If it does not work properly even
though your car is inclined back-
ward according to passenger's
posture, or the headlight beam is
irradiated to the high or low posi-
tion, we recommend that you have
your vehicle inspected by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the wiring yourself.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 105
Features of your vehicle
1064
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· – Single wipe
· O – Off
· --- – Intermittent wipe
AUTO* – Auto control wipe
· 1 – Low wiper speed
· 2 – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*
D : Rear wiper/washer control*
· – Continuous wipe
· --- – Intermittent wipe
(if equipped)
· O – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes* (rear)
* : if equipped
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windscreen wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer
OXM049230L/OAM049048L
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 106
4 107
Features of your vehicle
Windscreen wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
: For a single wiping cycle, move the
lever to this position and release it.
The wipers will operate continuous-
ly if the lever is held in this position.
O : Wiper is not in operation
--- : Wiper operates intermittently at the
same wiping intervals.Use this mode
in light rain or mist.To vary the speed
setting, turn the speed control knob.
1 : Normal wiper speed
2 : Fast wiper speed
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windscreen, defrost the
windscreen for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windscreen wipers to
ensure proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or ice
before using the wiper and washer, it
may damage the wiper and washer sys-
tem.
Auto control (if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper end
of the windscreen glass senses the
amount of rainfall and controls the wiping
cycle for the proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper operates.When
the rain stops, the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode
when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper
will operate once to perform a self-check
of the system. Set the wiper to OFF posi-
tion when the wiper is not in use.
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON and
the windscreen wiper switch is
placed in the AUTO mode, use cau-
tion in the following situations to
avoid any injury to the hands or
other parts of the body:
Do not touch the upper end of the
windscreen glass facing the rain
sensor.
Do not wipe the upper end of the
windscreen glass with a damp or
wet cloth.
Do not put pressure on the wind-
screen glass.
OEL049900
Rain sensor
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 107
Features of your vehicle
1084
Windscreen washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever gently
toward you to spray washer fluid on the
windscreen and to run the wipers 1-3
cycles.
Use this function when the windscreen is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will con-
tinue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropri-
ate non-abrasive windscreen washer
fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
driver side.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windscreen with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
the windscreen and obscure your
vision.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set the
wiper switch in the OFF position to
stop the auto wiper operation.
The wiper may operate and be dam-
aged if the switch is set in the AUTO
mode whilst washing the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windscreen glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in winter,
set the wiper switch in the OFF
position. Otherwise, wipers may
operate and ice may damage the
windscreen wiper blades. Always
remove all snow and ice and defrost
the windscreen properly prior to
operating the windscreen wipers.
OXM049048E
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windscreen, do not
operate the wipers when the
windscreen is dry.
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use petrol,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:06 PM Page 108
4 109
Features of your vehicle
Headlight washer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the head-
light washer it will operate at the same
time when you operate the windscreen
washer. It will operate when the headlight
low beam is turned on and the ignition
switch or engine start/stop button is in
the ON position.
The washer fluid will be sprayed on to the
headlights.
NOTICE
Check the headlight washers periodi-
cally to confirm that the washer fluid
is being sprayed properly onto the
headlight lenses.
The headlight washer can be operated
15 minutes after being operated last
time.
Rear window wiper and washer
switch
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the wiper
and washer switch lever. Turn the switch
to the desired position to operate the rear
wiper and washer.
- Normal wiper operation
--- - Intermittent wiper operation
(if equipped)
O - Wiper is not in operation
Push the lever away from you to spray
rear washer fluid and to run the rear
wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiper
operation will continue until you release
the lever. (if equipped)
OXM049103E OXM049125L
(Continued)
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers and washer system,
use anti-freezing washer fluids in
the winter season or cold weath-
er.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:07 PM Page 109
Features of your vehicle
1104
Map lamp (if equipped)
Push the lens (1) to turn the map lamp on
or off.
: The light (with room lamp) stays
on at all times.
: The light (with room lamp) comes
on when any door (except tail-
gate) is opened regardless of the
ignition switch position. When
doors (except tailgate) are
unlocked by the transmitter (or
smart key), the light (with room
lamp) comes on for approximate-
ly 30 seconds as long as any door
(except tailgate) is not opened.
Also, the light (with room lamp)
goes out gradually after approxi-
mately 30 seconds if the door
(except tailgate) is closed.
However, if the ignition switch is
ON or all doors (except tailgate)
are locked, the light will turn off
immediately.
If a door (except tailgate) is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ACC or LOCK position, the
light (with room lamp) stays on for
about 20 minutes. However, if a
door (except tailgate) is opened
with the ignition switch in the ON
position, the light (with room lamp)
stays on continuously.
: The lights turn off even if a door is
opened.
When the lamp is turned ON by
pressing the lens (1), the lamp
does not turn off even if the
switch (2) is in the OFF posi-
tion.
INTERIOR LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
OEL049100
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. Accidents could
happen because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:07 PM Page 110
4 111
Features of your vehicle
Room lamp
Press the button to turn the light on or off.
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
: The lamp will turn on if this but-
ton is pressed.
: The lamp will turn off if this but-
ton is pressed.
Luggage room lamp (if equipped)
The luggage room lamp comes on when
the boot lid is opened.
OLM049105/H OLM049103OEL049101
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp (if equipped)
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor
is closed without the lamp off, it
may discharge the battery or
damage the sunvisor.
Turn off the lamp before return
the sunvisor to its original posi-
tion.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:07 PM Page 111
Features of your vehicle
1124
Glove box lamp (if equipped)
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
The parking lights or headlights must be
ON for the glove box lamp to function.
OLM049102/H
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:07 PM Page 112
4 113
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog on the
front windscreen, refer to “Windscreen
Defrosting and Defogging” in this sec-
tion.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
interior and exterior of the rear window,
whilst engine is running.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the centre facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before oper-
ating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 20 minutes
or when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster, press the rear
window defroster button again.
DEFROSTER
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
OLM049109
Type B
OLM049110
Type A
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:07 PM Page 113
Features of your vehicle
1144
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the out-
side mirror defrosters, they will operate at
the same time you turn on the rear win-
dow defroster.
Wiper deicer (if equipped)
Without smart key
The engine must be running to enable
this feature. To activate the front wiper
deicer, press the front wiper deicer but-
ton. The indicator on the button illumi-
nates when the deicer is ON.
The front wiper deicer automatically
turns off after 20 minutes or when the
ignition switch is turned off.To turn off the
deicer, press the front wiper deicer but-
ton again.
With smart key
If your vehicle is equipped with the wiper
deicer, it will operate at the same time
you turn on the rear window defroster.
OLM049104R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:07 PM Page 114
4 115
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OEL049111/OEL049111U
1. Fan speed control knob
2. MAX defroster button (Front windscreen
defroster)
3. MAX A/C selection button (if equipped)
4. Temperature control knob
5. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
6. Mode selection button
7. Air intake control button
Type A
Type B
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position
could cause the battery to dis-
charge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:07 PM Page 115
Features of your vehicle
1164
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system (if equipped)
on.
OEL049120R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:07 PM Page 116
4 117
Features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection buttons controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
If you push the button once, the corre-
sponding switch will turn on, and if you
push the button again, the switch will turn
off.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windscreen with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defroster.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windscreen.
Also you may select 2~3 modes at the
same time for desired air flow.
- face ( ) + floor ( ) mode
- face ( ) + defrost ( ) mode
- floor ( ) + defrost ( ) mode
- face ( ) + floor ( ) + defrost ( )
mode
MAX A/C-Level (B, D) (if equipped)
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the
inside of the vehicle faster.
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and the
recirculated air position will be selected
automatically.
OEL049112 OEL049113
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:07 PM Page 117
Features of your vehicle
1184
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you
to control the temperature of the air flow-
ing from the ventilation system. To
change the air temperature in the pas-
senger compartment, turn the knob to
the right position for warm and hot air or
left position for cooler air.
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to select
the outside (fresh) air position or recircu-
lated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
press the control button.
OEL049114R OEL049115 OEL049116
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:07 PM Page 118
4 119
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated
air position selected,
air from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the
heating system and
heated or cooled
according to the func-
tion selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected,
air enters the vehicle
from outside and is
heated or cooled
according to the func-
tion selected.
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fogging
of the windscreen and side windows and
the air within the passenger compart-
ment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the recirculated air posi-
tion selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system. To change
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right
for higher speed or left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to the
“0” position turns off the fan.
WARNING
Continue using the climate con-
trol system in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure
visibility.
Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating sys-
tem on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temper-
ature.
Continue using the climate con-
trol system in the recirculated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control
to the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible whilst driv-
ing.
OEL049117
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:07 PM Page 119
Features of your vehicle
1204
To turn off the blowers
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the "0" position.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-
ditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate). Press the button again to turn
the air conditioning system off.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
If the windscreen fogs up, set the mode
to the
or position.
OEL049118OYFA043118A
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 120
4 121
Features of your vehicle
Operation Tips
To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the vehicle through the venti-
lation system, temporarily set the air
intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irrita-
tion has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windscreen. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
screen, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired temperature.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the extreme
left position (press the MAX A/C posi-
tion selection button (if equipped)) then
set the fan speed control to the highest
speed.
NOTICE
When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely whilst driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be used
with the windows closed.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 121
Features of your vehicle
1224
Air conditioning system operation tips
If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehi-
cle by operating the air conditioning
system.
During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system opera-
tion characteristic.
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windscreen even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the climate
control air filter be replaced by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 122
4 123
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air fil-
ter inspections and changes are
required.
When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-
ence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the system be
inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
NOTICE
It is important when servicing the air
conditioning system that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the com-
pressor and abnormal system operation
may occur.
WARNING
Improper service may cause seri-
ous injury to the person performing
the service. For more detailed infor-
mation, we recommend that you
contact a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 123
Features of your vehicle
1244
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OEL049121R
1. AUTO (automatic control) button
2. Driver's temperature control button
3. A/C display
4. Passenger's temperature control
button
5. Dual temperature control selection
button
6. OFF button
7. Front windscreen defroster button
8. Air conditioning button*
9. Fan speed control button
10. Air intake control button
11. Mode selection button
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position
could cause the battery to dis-
charge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 124
4 125
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air condi-
tioning
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled auto-
matically by setting the temperature.
2. Set the temperature button to the
desired temperature.
NOTICE
To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windscreen defroster button
(Press the button one more time to
deselect the front windscreen
defroster function. The AUTO sign
will illuminate on the information
display once again.)
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually whilst other func-
tions operate automatically.
For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate control,
use the AUTO button and set the tem-
perature to 22°C/71°F.
NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating and
cooling system.
OLM049154OEL049122R
OEL043125R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 125
Features of your vehicle
1264
Manual heating and air condition-
ing
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pressing buttons
or turning knob(s) other than the AUTO
button. In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons or knob(s) selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to con-
vert to full automatic control of the sys-
tem.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
Refer to the illustration in the “Manual cli-
mate control system”.
If you push the button once, the corre-
sponding switch will turn on, and if you
push the button again, the switch will turn
off.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windscreen.
Also you may select 2~3 modes at the
same time for desired air flow.
- face ( ) + floor ( ) mode
- face ( ) + defrost ( ) mode
- floor ( ) + defrost ( ) mode
- face ( ) + floor ( ) + defrost ( )
mode
OEL049123
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 126
4 127
Features of your vehicle
Maximum (MAX) defrost mode
When you select the MAX defrost mode,
the following system settings will be
made automatically;
the air conditioning system will be
turned on.
the outside(fresh) air position will be
selected.
the fan speed will be set to the high
speed.
To turn the MAX defrost mode off, press
the mode button or MAX defrost button
again or AUTO button.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by holding the button.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by holding the button.
When pressing the button, the tempera-
ture will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest tem-
perature setting, the air conditioning will
operate continuously.
OEL049124 OEL049114R OEL049125R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 127
Features of your vehicle
1284
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate the
driver and passenger side temperature
individually. Also, if the passenger side
temperature control button is operat-
ed, it will automatically change to the
DUAL mode as well.
2. Operate the driver side temperature
control to adjust the driver side tem-
perature. Operate the passenger side
temperature control to adjust the pas-
senger side temperature.
When the driver side temperature is set
to the highest (HI) or lowest (Lo) temper-
ature setting, the DUAL mode is deacti-
vated for maximum heating or cooling.
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-
tivate DUAL mode. The passenger
side temperature will be set to the
same temperature as the driver side.
2. Operate the driver side temperature
control button. The driver and passen-
ger side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
Temperature conversion (if equipped)
You can switch the temperature mode
between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as fol-
lows:
Whilst pressing the OFF button, press
the AUTO button for 3 seconds or more.
The display will change from Centigrade
to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, the temperature mode dis-
play will reset to Centigrade.
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
OEL049126R OEL049128
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 128
4 129
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air
enters the vehicle from out-
side and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fog-
ging of the windscreen and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the recirculated air posi-
tion selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
WARNING
Continue using the climate control
system in the recirculated air posi-
tion may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure vis-
ibility.
Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
Continue using the climate control
system in the recirculated air posi-
tion can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control to
the outside (fresh) air position as
much as possible whilst driving.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 129
Features of your vehicle
1304
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by operating the fan speed control
button.
To change the fan speed, press ( +) the
switch for higher speed, or push (- ) the
switch for lower speed.To turn the
fan speed control off, press the front
blower OFF button.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-
ditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Press the front blower OFF button to turn
off the front air climate control system.
However, you can still operate the air
intake buttons as long as the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
OEL049129R OEL049130R OEL049131R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 130
4 131
Features of your vehicle
For maximum defrosting, set the tem-
perature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
If warm air to the floor is desired whilst
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windscreen, rear window, out-
side rear view mirrors, and all side win-
dows.
Clear all snow and ice from the bonnet
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up the
inside of the windscreen.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windscreen
1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-
tion.
2. Select desired temperature.
WINDSCREEN DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windscreen
heating
Do not use the position during
cooling operation in extremely
humid weather. The difference
between the temperature of the out-
side air and the windscreen could
cause the outer surface of the
windscreen to fog up, causing loss
of visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection to the position
and fan speed control to the lower
speed.
OEL049132
Type B
OEL049132U
Type A
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 131
Features of your vehicle
1324
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically. If the position is
selected, air conditioning (if equipped)
will also be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning (if equipped) and/or
outside (fresh) air position are not select-
ed automatically, press the correspon-
ding button manually.
To defrost outside windscreen
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-
tioning (if equipped) will be selected
automatically.
OEL049133
Type B
OEL049133U
Type A
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 132
4 133
Features of your vehicle
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windscreen
1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-
tion.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4.The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient tem-
perature and outside (fresh) air posi-
tion will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning is not selected
automatically, adjust the corresponding
button manually. If the position is
selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a
higher fan speed.
To defrost outside windscreen
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
(HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4.The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
OEL049134R OEL049135R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:08 PM Page 133
Features of your vehicle
1344
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or passengers.
Centre console storage
(if equipped)
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or front passenger.
To open the centre console storage, pull
up the lever.
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a key. (if equipped)
To open the glove box, pull the handle
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
OEL049151/H OLM049152R
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
whilst driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove box
for a long time.
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flamma-
ble/explosive materials in the vehi-
cle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed whilst
driving. Do not attempt to place
so many items in the storage
compartment that the storage
compartment cover can not close
securely.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:09 PM Page 134
4 135
Features of your vehicle
Cool box (if equipped)
You can keep beverage cans or other
items cool using the open/close lever (1)
of the vent installed in the glove box.
1. Turn on the air conditioning.
2. Slide the open/close lever (1) of the
vent installed in the glove box to the
open position.
3. When the cool box is not used, slide
the lever (1) to its closed position.
NOTICE
If some items in the cool box block the
vent, the cooling effectiveness of the cool
box is reduced.
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses in the compart-
ment door with the lenses facing out.
Push to close.
OEL049220R
Open
Close
OLM049142
WARNING
Do not put the perishable food in
the cool box because it may not be
able to maintain the necessary con-
sistent temperature to keep the
food fresh.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:09 PM Page 135
Features of your vehicle
1364
WARNING
Do not keep objects except sun-
glasses inside the sunglass hold-
er. Such objects can be thrown
from the holder in the event of a
sudden stop or an accident, pos-
sibly injuring the passengers in
the vehicle.
Do not open the sunglasses hold-
er whilst the vehicle is moving.
The rear view mirror of the vehi-
cle can be blocked by an open
sunglass holder.
Do not put the glasses forcibly
into a sunglass holder to prevent
breakage or deformation of
glasses. It may cause personal
injury if you try to open it forcibly
when the glasses are jammed in
holder.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:09 PM Page 136
4 137
Features of your vehicle
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ACC position
or the ON position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the
way into its socket. When the element
has heated, the lighter will pop out to the
"ready" position.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
in. This can damage the heating element
and create a fire hazard.
Ashtray (if equipped)
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.
INTERIOR FEATURES
CAUTION
The use of plug-in accessories
(shavers, hand-held vacuums, and
coffee pots, for example) may dam-
age the socket or cause electrical
failure.
WARNING - Ashtray use
Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays
as waste receptacles.
Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other com-
bustible materials may cause a
fire.
WARNING
Do not hold the lighter in after it
is already heated because it will
overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
Do not insert foreign objects into
the socket of the cigarette lighter.
It may damage the cigarette
lighter.
OEL049145/HOEL043144R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:09 PM Page 137
Features of your vehicle
1384
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or
backward (3). (if equipped)
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
Push the switch to turn the light on or off.
(if equipped)
: The light turns on.
O
: The light turns off.
The ticket holder (5) is provided for hold-
ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
OLM049147
Rear (if equipped)
OEL049146/H
Front
OLM049207R
CAUTION
Do not place uncovered cups in the
cup holder whilst the vehicle is in
motion. If the liquid spills, electric
systems may malfunction.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of direct
sun light and do not put them in a
vehicle that is heated up. It may
explode.
WARNING - Hot liquids
Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder whilst
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you burn yourself.
Such a burn to the driver could
lead to loss of control of the vehi-
cle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncov-
ered or unsecured bottles, glass-
es, cans, etc., in the cup holder
whilst the vehicle is in motion.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:09 PM Page 138
4 139
Features of your vehicle
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine
running.
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp (if equipped)
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor
is closed without the lamp off, it
may discharge the battery or
damage the sunvisor.
• Always use the sunvisor exten-
sion, after swing the sunvisor to
the side.
CAUTION
Use power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using
the accessory plug for prolonged
periods of time with the engine
off could cause the battery to dis-
charge.
Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in elec-
tric capacity.
Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
Close the cover when not in use.
Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic
systems or devices used in your
vehicle.
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign ele-
ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get an electric shock.
WARNING
For your safety, do not obstruct your
vision when using the sunvisor.
OEL043150R
OLM049153
Front
Rear (if equipped)
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:09 PM Page 139
Features of your vehicle
1404
Digital clock (if equipped)
Whenever the battery terminals or relat-
ed fuses are disconnected, you must
reset the time.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the clock buttons operate as
follows:
Setup the clock
With audio off
1. Press the [SETUP CLOCK] button
until the clock of the display blinks.
2. Set the clock by turning the knob(1)
and press it.
With audio on
1. Press the [SETUP CLOCK] button.
2. Select the [CLOCK] mode by turning
the knob(1) and press it.
3. Set the clock by turning the knob(1)
and press it.
Aux, USB and iPod
®
(if equipped)
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port, you can
use an aux port to connect audio devices
and an USB port to plug in an USB.
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
WARNING
Do not adjust the clock whilst driv-
ing. You may lose your steering
control and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
OEL044208/Q
OEL043195R
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:09 PM Page 140
4 141
Features of your vehicle
Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the cargo
area, you can use the four holders locat-
ed in the cargo area to attach the lug-
gage net.
If necessary, we recommend that you
contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
OEL049222
OLM049202L
Type A Type B
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to
the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle’s
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to the
vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat
should be installed in each posi-
tion.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation,
HYUNDAI recommends that only
the HYUNDAI floor mat designed
for use in your vehicle be
installed.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:09 PM Page 141
Features of your vehicle
1424
Cargo security screen
(if equipped)
Use the cargo security screen to hide
items stored in the cargo area.
To use the cargo security screen, pull the
handle backward and insert the edges
into the slots.
OLM049203 OLM049204
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky
objects in the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT over-
stretch the luggage net. ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of the
luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT
use the luggage net when the strap
has visible signs of wear or dam-
age.
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:09 PM Page 142
4 143
Features of your vehicle
When not in use, place the cargo securi-
ty screen on the lower portion of the
cargo area. (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not place objects on the cargo
security screen. Such objects
may be thrown about inside the
vehicle and possibly injure vehi-
cle occupants during an accident
or when braking.
Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is
designed for luggage only.
Maintain the balance of the vehi-
cle and locate the weight as far
forward as possible.
CAUTION
Since the cargo security screen
may be damaged or malformed, do
not put the luggage on it when it is
used.
OLM049205
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:09 PM Page 143
Features of your vehicle
1444
Roof rack (if equipped)
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of the vehicle by
installing roof bars. Roof bars suitable for
this application, can be purchased from
your HYUNDAI authorised repairer that
will attach to the roof rack.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
be sure not to position cargo onto the
roof rack in such a way that it could
interfere with sunroof operation.
EXTERIOR FEATURES
(Continued)
The vehicle centre of gravity will
be higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack. Avoid sudden
starts, braking, sharp turns,
abrupt manoeuvres or high
speeds that may result in loss of
vehicle control or rollover result-
ing in an accident.
Always drive slowly and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack. Severe
wind updrafts, caused by passing
vehicles or natural causes, can
cause sudden upward pressure
on items loaded on the roof rack.
This is especially true when car-
rying large, flat items such as
wood panels or mattresses. This
could cause the items to fall off
the roof rack and cause damage
to your vehicle or others around
you.
To prevent damage or loss of
cargo whilst driving, check fre-
quently before or whilst driving to
make sure the items on the roof
rack are securely fastened.
CAUTION
When carrying cargo on the roof
rack, take the necessary precau-
tions to make sure the cargo does
not damage the roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects on
the roof rack, make sure they do
not exceed the overall roof length
or width.
WARNING
The following specification is the
maximum weight that can be
loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly as
possible onto the roof rack and
secure the load firmly.
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight
limit on the roof rack may dam-
age your vehicle.
(Continued)
ROOF 220 lbs. (100 kg)
RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
OEL044206
EL(FL) UK 4A.QXP 2/9/2015 9:09 PM Page 144
4 145
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE
If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner,
and air freshener from contacting the
interior parts because they may cause
damage or discoloration.
Antenna
Roof antenna
Your car uses a roof antenna to receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals. This
antenna is a removable type. To remove
the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To
install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
AUDIO SYSTEM
CAUTION
Before entering a place with a low
height clearance or a car wash,
remove the antenna by rotating it
counterclockwise. If not, the
antenna may be damaged.
When reinstalling your antenna, it
is important that it is fully tight-
ened and adjusted to the upright
position to ensure proper recep-
tion. But it could be folded or
removed when parking the vehi-
cle or when loading cargo on the
roof rack.
When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.
Type A Type B
OLM043373
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:18 PM Page 145
Features of your vehicle
1464
Audio remote control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio remote control
button is installed to promote safe driv-
ing.
VOL (+ / -) (1)
Press the up button (+) to increase vol-
ume.
Press the down button (-) to decease
volume.
SEEK ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK button is pressed for 0.8 sec-
ond or more, it will work as follows in
each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button.
CDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
CDC mode
It will function as the DISC UP/DOWN
button.
If the SEEK button is pressed for less
than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in
each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
select buttons.
CDP mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
CDC mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described in the following
pages in this section.
MODE (3)
Press the button to select Radio or CD
(compact disc).
MUTE (4)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the
sound.
Press the MUTE button again to acti-
vate the sound.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote con-
trol buttons simultaneously.
OLM049194
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 146
4 147
Features of your vehicle
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around
your city. They are intercepted by the
radio antenna on your vehicle.This signal
is then received by the radio and sent to
your vehicle speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best pos-
sible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as the
distance from the radio station, close-
ness of other strong radio stations or the
presence of buildings, bridges or other
large obstructions in the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can fol-
low the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmos-
phere. In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide bet-
ter signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by build-
ings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening con-
ditions which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The fol-
lowing conditions are normal and do not
indicate radio trouble:
JBM001 JBM002
FM reception AM reception
JBM003
FM radio station
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 147
Features of your vehicle
1484
Fading - As your vehicle moves away
from the radio station, the signal will
weaken and sound will begin to fade.
When this occurs, we suggest that you
select another stronger station.
Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the trans-
mitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering nois-
es to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the distur-
bance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful sig-
nal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clear-
est signal. If this occurs, select another
station with a stronger signal.
Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflect-
ed signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
Using a mobile phone or a two-way
radio
When a mobile phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio system. This does not mean that
something is wrong with the audio equip-
ment. In such a case, use the mobile
phone at a place as far as possible from
the audio equipment.
JBM004 JBM005
CAUTION
When using a communication sys-
tem such as a mobile phone or a
radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa-
rate external antenna must be fitted.
When a mobile phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adversely
affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use a mobile phone whilst
driving. Stop at a safe location to
use a mobile phone.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 148
4 149
Features of your vehicle
Caring for disc
If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows to ventilate
before using the system.
It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA
files without permission. Use CDs that
are created only by lawful means.
Do not apply volatile agents, such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for ana-
logue disc onto CDs.
To prevent the disc surface from get-
ting damaged, hold CDs by the edges
or the centre hole only.
Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from
the centre to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper.
Make certain only CDs are inserted
into the CD player (Do not insert more
than one CD at a time).
Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-
RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods. In such circumstances, con-
tinued use may cause malfunctions to
your audio system.
NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy
Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do not
comply with international audio CD
standards (Red Book), may not play on
your car audio. Please note that inabili-
ties to properly play a copy protected
CD may indicate that the CD is defec-
tive, not the CD player.
NOTICE
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order : to sequen-
tially.
2. Folder playing order :
If no song file is contained in the fold-
er, that folder is not displayed.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 149
Features of your vehicle
1504
WARNING
Do not stare at the screen whilst
driving. Staring at the screen for
prolonged periods of time could
lead to traffic accidents.
Do not disassemble, assemble, or
modify the audio system. Such
acts could result in accidents,
fire, or electric shock.
• Using the phone whilst driving
may lead to a lack of attention of
traffic conditions and increase
the likelihood of accidents. Use
the phone feature after parking
the vehicle.
Heed caution not to spill water or
introduce foreign objects into the
device. Such acts could lead to
smoke, fire, or product malfunc-
tion.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Driving whilst distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and death.
The driver’s primary responsibili-
ty is in the safe and legal opera-
tion of a vehicle, and use of any
handheld devices, other equip-
ment, or vehicle systems which
take the driver’s eyes, attention
and focus away from the safe
operation of a vehicle or which
are not permissible by law should
never be used during operation
of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound can
be heard as these signs may indi-
cate product malfunction.
Continued use in such conditions
could lead to accidents(fires,
electric shock) or product mal-
functions.
Do not touch the antenna during
thunder or lightening as such
acts may lead to lightning
induced electric shock.
Do not stop or park in parking-
restricted areas to operate the
product. Such acts could lead to
traffic accidents.
Use the system with the vehicle
ignition turned on. Prolonged use
with the ignition turned off could
result in battery discharge.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 150
4 151
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not operate
the audio system for long periods
of time with the ignition turned off
as such operations may lead to
battery discharge.
Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage to
the LCD or touch screen.
When cleaning the device, make
sure to turn off the device and
use a dry and smooth cloth.
Never use tough materials, chem-
ical cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.) as such
materials may damage the device
panel or cause colour/quality
deterioration
(Continued)
(Continued)
Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. Spilling bever-
ages may lead to system mal-
function.
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service centre.
Placing the audio system within
an electromagnetic environment
may result in noise interference.
Prevent caustic solutions such as
perfume and cosmetic oil from
contacting the dashboard
because they may cause damage
or discoloration.
CAUTION
Operating the device whilst driv-
ing could lead to accidents due to
a lack of attention to external sur-
roundings. First park the vehicle
before operating the device.
Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle.
Driving in a state where external
sounds cannot be heard may lead
to accidents.
Pay attention to the volume set-
ting when turning the device on.
A sudden output of extreme vol-
ume upon turning the device on
could lead to hearing impairment.
(Adjust the volume to a suitable
levels before turning off the
device.)
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 151
Features of your vehicle
1524
NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
To use an external USB device, make
sure the device is not connected when
starting up the vehicle. Connect the
device after starting up.
If you start the engine when the USB
device is connected, it may damage
the USB device. (USB flashdrives are
very sensitive to electric shock.)
If the engine is started up or turned
off whilst the external USB device is
connected, the external USB device
may not work.
The System may not play inauthentic
MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with the
compression rate between 8Kbps ~
320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music files
with the compression rate between
8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
Take precautions for static electricity
when connecting or disconnecting the
external USB device.
An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Depending on the condition of the
external USB device, the connected
external USB device can be unrecog-
nizable.
When the formatted byte/sector set-
ting of External USB device is not
either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then
the device will not be recognized.
Use only a USB device formatted to
FAT 12/16/32.
USB devices without USB I/F authen-
tication may not be recognizable.
Make sure the USB connection termi-
nal does not come in contact with the
human body or other objects.
If you repeatedly connect or discon-
nect the USB device in a short period
of time, it may break the device.
You may hear a strange noise when
connecting or disconnecting a USB
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB mode,
the external USB device can be dam-
aged or may malfunction. Therefore,
disconnect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or in
another mode. (e.g, Radio, CD)
Depending on the type and capacity of
the external USB device or the type of
the files stored in the device, there is a
difference in the time taken for recog-
nition of the device.
Do not use the USB device for purpos-
es other than playing music files.
Playing videos through the USB is not
supported.
Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB I/F
may lower performance or cause trou-
ble.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 152
4 153
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
If you use devices such as a USB hub
purchased separately, the vehicle’s
audio system may not recognize the
USB device. In that case, connect the
USB device directly to the multimedia
terminal of the vehicle.
If the USB device is divided by logical
drives, only the music files on the
highest-priority drive are recognized
by car audio.
Devices such as MP3 Player/ Mobile
phone/Digital camera can be unrecog-
nizable by standard USB I/F can be
unrecognizable.
Charging through the USB may not
be supported in some mobile devices.
USB HDD or USB types liable to con-
nection failures due to vehicle vibra-
tions are not supported. (i-stick type)
Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be
unrecognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
Music files protected by DRM (DIGI-
TAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are
not recognizable.
The data in the USB memory may be
lost whilst using this audio. Always
back up important data on a personal
storage device.
Please avoid using USB
memory products which
can be used as key chains
or mobile phone acces-
sories as they could cause
damage to the USB jack. Please make
certain only to use plug type connec-
tor products.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 153
Features of your vehicle
1544
NOTICE - USING THE iPod
®
DEVICE
Some iPod
®
models may not sup-
port communication protocol and
files may not properly play.
Supported iPod
®
models:
- iPod
®
Mini
- iPod
®
4th (Photo) ~ 6th (Classic)
generation
- iPod
®
Nano 1st~4th generation
- iPod
®
Touch 1st~2nd generation
The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod
®
can be different
from the order searched in the
audio system.
If the iPod
®
disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the iPod
®
.
(Reset: Refer to iPod
®
manual)
An iPod
®
may not operate nor-
mally on low battery.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Some iPod
®
devices, such as the
iPhone
®
, can be connected through
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
interface. The device must have
audio Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology capability (such as for
stereo headphone Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology ). The device
can play, but it will not be con-
trolled by the audio system.
To use iPod
®
features within the
audio, use the cable provided upon
purchasing an iPod
®
d device.
Skipping or improper operation may
occur depending on the characteris-
tics of your iPod
®
/iPhone
®
device.
If your iPhone
®
is connected to both
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and USB, the sound may not be prop-
erly played. In your iPhone
®
, select
the Dock connector or Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology to change the
sound output (source).
(Continued)
(Continued)
When connecting
iPod
®
with the
iPod
®
Power Cable, insert the connec-
tor to the multimedia socket complete-
ly. If not inserted completely, communi-
cations between
iPod
®
and audio may
be interrupted.
When adjusting the sound effects of
the
iPod
®
and the audio system, the
sound effects of both devices will over-
lap and might reduce or distort the
quality of the sound.
Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an
iPod
®
when adjusting
the audio system’s volume, and turn
off the equalizer of the audio system
when using the equalizer of an
iPod
®
.
When not using
iPod
®
with car audio,
detach the
iPod
®
cable from iPod
®
.
Otherwise,
iPod
®
may remain in
accessory mode, and may not work
properly.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 154
4 155
Features of your vehicle
CD Player : AC100ELEE, AC110ELEE
No logo will be shown if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 155
Features of your vehicle
1564
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND
FUNCTIONS
Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the mode
is changed in order of FM1 FM2
FMA AM AMA.
3.
Changes to CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My
Music, BT Audio mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod
®
),
AUX, My Music, BT Audio.
4. (if eqipped)
• Operates Phone Screen
When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
5.
Radio Mode : Automatically searches
for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Moves to next or previous song
(file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the
current song.
6. PWR/VOL knob
Power Knob:Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
Volume Knob: Sets volume by turn-
ing the knob left/right
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
MEDIA
RADIO
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 156
4 157
Features of your vehicle
7.
~
(Preset)
Radio Mode: Saves frequencies (chan-
nels) or receives saved frequencies
(channels)
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu
pop up screen, the number menu is
selected.
8.
• Each time the button is shortly pressed
(under 0.8 seconds), sets screen Off
Screen On Screen Off
Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off. In
the screen Off state, press any key to
turn the screen On again.
9.
• Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8sec-
onds): TA On/Off- Press and hold the
key (over 0.8seconds): Previews
each broadcast for 5 seconds each.
• Media mode
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8sec-
onds): Previews each song (file) for
10 seconds each.
Press and holding the key again to
continue listening to the current song
(file).
10.
Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds) : Moves to the Display, Sound,
Clock, Phone, System setting modes
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds) : Move to the Time setting screen
11.
Displays menus for the current mode.
iPod
®
List : Move to parent category
12.
FM : RDS Program Type Search
CD MP3, USB mode : Folder Search
PTY
FOLDER
MENU
SETUP
CLOCK
TA
SCAN
2
RDM
1
RPT
61
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 157
Features of your vehicle
1584
13. TUNE knob
Radio mode : Changes frequency by
turning the knob left/right
CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning the
knob left/right
When the desired song is displayed,
press the knob to play the song.
Moves focus in all selection menus and
selects menus
14.
• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode
changed in order of FM1 FM2 FMA.
15.
• Changes to AM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the mode
changed in order of AM AMA.
AM
FM
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 158
4 159
Features of your vehicle
SETUP
- AC100ELEE, AC110ELEE
Display Settings
Press the key Select [Display]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes . selec-
tion mode
During On state, press the or
key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
When the pop up screen is displayed,
use the TUNE knob or keys
~ to select the desired mode.
Scroll text
[Scroll text] Set /
• : Maintains scroll
: Scrolls only one (1) time.
Song Info
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ or
‘Album/Artist/Song’.
Sound Settings
Press the key Select [Sound]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
2
RDM
SETUP
CLOCK
Off
On
Off
On
6
1
MEDIA
RADIO
On
1
RPT
SETUP
CLOCK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 159
Features of your vehicle
1604
Audio Settings
This menu allows you to set the ‘Bass,
Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Fader and
Balance.
Select [Audio Settings] Select menu
through TUNE knob Turn TUNE
knob left/right to set
Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
Default : Restores default settings.
Return : Whilst adjusting values, re-
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically con-
trol the volume level according to the
speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set in 4
levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of TUNE
knob
Volume Dialogue
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Volume Dialogue] Set volume of
TUNE knob
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 160
4 161
Features of your vehicle
Clock Settings
Press the key Select [Clock]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Clock Settings
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
Adjust the number currently in focus to
set the [hour] and press the tune knob
to set the [minute].
Day Settings
This menu is used to set the date.
Select [Day Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
Adjust the number currently in focus to
make the settings and press the tune
knob to move to the next setting. (Set
in order of Year/Month/Day)
3
SETUP
CLOCK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 161
Features of your vehicle
1624
Time Format
This function is used to set the 12/24
hour time format of the audio system.
Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr
through TUNE knob
Clock Display when Power is OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set /
through TUNE knob
: Displays time/date on screen
• : Turn off.
Automatic RDS Time
This option is used to automatically set
the time by synchronizing with RDS.
Select [Automatic RDS Time] Set
/ through TUNE knob
: Turn on Automatic Time
• : Turn off.
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 162
4 163
Features of your vehicle
Phone Setup (if eqipped)
Press the key Select [Phone]
Pair Phone
Select [Pair Phone] Set through
TUNE knob
Search for device names as displayed
on your mobile phone and connect.
Input the passkey displayed on the
screen. (Passkey : 0000)
The device name and passkey will be
displayed on the screen for up to 3
minutes. If pairing is not completed
within the 3 minutes, the mobile phone
pairing process will automatically be
cancelled.
Pairing completion is displayed.
In some mobile phones, pairing will
automatically be followed by connec-
tion.
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phones.
SETUP
CLOCK
CAUTION
To pair a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled mobile phone,
authentication and connection
processes are first required. As a
result, you cannot pair your mobile
phone whilst driving the vehicle.
First park your vehicle before use.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 163
Features of your vehicle
1644
Phone List
The names of up to 5 paired phones will
be displayed.
A [ ] is displayed in front of the currently
connected phone.
Select the desired name to setup the
selected phone.
Connecting a phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile phone
through TUNE knob Select [Connect
Phone]
Select a mobile phone that is not cur-
rently connected.
Connect the selected mobile phone.
Connection completion is displayed.
If a phone is already connected, dis-
connect the currently connected
phone and select a new phone to con-
nect.
Disconnecting a connected phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile phone
through TUNE knob Select
[Disconnect Phone]
Select the currently connected mobile
phone.
Disconnect the selected mobile
phone.
Disconnection completion is dis-
played.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 164
4 165
Features of your vehicle
Changing connection sequence
(Priority)
This is used to change the order (priori-
ty) of automatic connection for the paired
mobile phones.
Select [Phone List] Select [Priority]
through TUNE knob Select No. 1
Priority mobile phone
Select [Priority].
From the paired phones, select the
phone desired for No.1 priority.
The changed priority sequence is dis-
played.
Once the connection sequence (priori-
ty) is changed, the new no. 1 priority
mobile phone will be connected.
- when the no. 1 priority cannot be con-
nected: Automatically attempts to con-
nect the most recently connected
phone.
- Cases when the most recently con-
nected phone cannot be connected:
Attempts to connect in the order in
which paired phones are listed.
- The connected phone will automati-
cally be changed to No. 1 priority.
• Delete
Select [Phone List] Select mobile phone
through TUNE knob Select [Delete]
Select the desired mobile phone.
Delete the selected mobile phone.
Deletion completion is displayed.
When attempting to delete a currently
connected phone, the phone is first
disconnected.
Phone book Download
This feature is used to download phone
book and call histories into the audio sys-
tem.
Select [Phone book Download] Select
through TUNE knob
CAUTION
The download feature may not be
supported in some mobile
phones.
If a different operation is per-
formed whilst phone book is being
downloaded, downloading will be
discontinued. Phone book already
downloaded will be saved.
When downloading new phone
book, delete all previously saved
phone book before starting down-
load.
CAUTION
When you delete a mobile phone,
the mobile phone phone book will
also be erased.
For stable Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication,
delete the mobile phone from the
audio and also delete the audio
from your mobile phone.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 165
Features of your vehicle
1664
Auto Download
When connecting a mobile phone, it is
possible to automatically download new
phone book and Call Histories.
Select [Auto Download] Set /
through TUNE knob
Audio Streaming
Songs (files) saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled mobile
phone can be played through the audio
system.
Select [Audio Streaming] Set /
through TUNE knob
Outgoing Volume
This is used to set the volume of your
voice as heard by the other party whilst
on a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call.
Select [Outgoing Volume] Set volume
through TUNE knob
Whilst on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the key.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
System Off
This feature is used when you do not
wish to use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology system.
Select [Bluetooth System Off] Set
through TUNE knob
If a phone is already connected, dis-
connect the currently connected
phone and turn the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology system off.
SEEK
TRACK
Off
On
Off
On
CAUTION
The Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming feature may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 166
4 167
Features of your vehicle
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology System
To use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
when the system is currently off, follow
these next steps.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology through the Key
Press the key Screen Guidance
Moves to the screen where
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology functions can be
used and displays guidance.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology through the Key
Press the key Select [Phone]
A screen asking whether to turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology will be
displayed.
On the screen, select to turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology and
display guidance.
If the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
system is turned on, the system will
automatically try to connect the most
recently connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
YES
SETUP
CLOCK
SETUP
CLOCK
PHONE
PHONE
CAUTION
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology con-
nection may become intermittently
disconnected in some mobile
phones. Follow these next steps to
try again.
1) Turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone ON/OFF and try to
connect again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power
ON/OFF and try to connect again.
3) Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
try to connect again.
4) Reboot the audio system and try
to connect again
5) Delete all paired devices in your
mobile phone and the audio sys-
tem and pair again for use.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 167
Features of your vehicle
1684
System Settings
Press the key Select [System]
Memory Information
(if equipped)
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is displayed
on the left side whilst the total system
memory is displayed on the right side.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through
TUNE knob
The system will reboot after the lan-
guage is changed.
Language support by region
-
SETUP
CLOCK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 168
4 169
Features of your vehicle
RADIO
Changing RADIO mode
SEEK
Press the key
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Changes the frequency.
Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Automatically searches for
the next frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency saved in
the corresponding key.
Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Pressing and holding the
desired key from ~ will
save the currently playing broadcast to
the selected key and sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the key
Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequency
increases and previews each broad-
cast for 5 seconds each. After scan-
ning all frequencies, returns and plays
the current broadcast frequency.
TA
SCAN
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 169
Features of your vehicle
1704
Selecting through manual search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to adjust
the frequency.
• AC100ELEE, AC110ELEE
- FM : Changes by 50KHz
- AM : Changes by 9khz
Traffic Announcement (TA)
Shortly pressing the key (under
0.8 seconds): Set / TA Traffic
Announcement) mode.
PTY Up/Down
Press the key when
searching PTY in RDS Broadcasting
Program Type selection.
MENU
Within key are the A.Store (Auto
Store) and Info functions.
AST (Auto Store)
Press the key Set [ AST]
through TUNE knob or key.
Select AST (Auto Store) to save frequen-
cies with superior reception to presets
~ . If no frequencies are
received, then the most recently received
frequency will be broadcast.
Saves only to the Preset memory
~ of FMA or AMA mode.
AF (Alternative Frequency)
Press the key Set [ AF]
through TUNE knob or key.
The Alternative Frequency option can be
turned On/Off.
Region
Press the key Set [ Region]
through TUNE knob or key.
The Region option can be turned On/Off.
News
Press the key Set [ News]
through TUNE knob or key.
The News option can be turned On/Off.
Info Volume
Info Volume refers to the sound volume
upon receiving News or Traffic information.
The info volume can be controlled by turn-
ing the VOL knob left/right whilst a news
or traffic broadcast is playing.
AF, Region, and News are RDS Radio
menus.
4
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
6
1
61
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
PTY
FOLDER
OffOn
TA
SCAN
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 170
4 171
Features of your vehicle
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod
®
/ My Music
Press the key to change the mod
mode in order of CD
USB(iPod
®
) AUX
My Music BT Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on the
screen.
<Audio CD>
<CD MP3>
<USB>
<My Music>
The CD is automatically played when
a CD is inserted.
The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Repeat
Whilst song (file) is playing (RPT)
key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod
®
, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
To repeat one song (Shortly pressing
the key (under 0.8 seconds)): Repeats
the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current folder.
Press the key again to turn off
repeat.
1
RPT
1
RPT
MEDIA
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 171
Features of your vehicle
1724
Random
Whilst song (file) is playing (RDM)
key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
Random (Shortly pressing the key ):
Plays all songs in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
Folder Random (Shortly pressing the
key): Plays all files within the current
folder in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: RDM on screen
Random (pressing twice): Plays all files
in random order.
iPod
®
mode: RDM on screen
Random (press the key) : Plays all files
in random order.
Press the key again to turn off
random.
Changing Song/File
Whilst song (file) is playing
key
Shortly pressing the key: Plays the cur-
rent song from the beginning.
If the key is pressed
again within 1 second, the previ-
ous song is played.
Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds the song.
Whilst song (file) is playing key
Shortly pressing the key: Plays the
next song.
Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Fast forwards the song.
Scan
Whilst song (file) is playing key
Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Scans all songs for 10 sec-
onds starting from the next song.
Pressing and holding the key
again to turn off.
TA
SCAN
TA
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
2
RDM
2
RDM
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 172
4 173
Features of your vehicle
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
Whilst file is playing (Folder
Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
Whilst file is playing (Folder
Down) key
Searches the parent folder.
If a folder is selected by pressing the
TUNE knob, the first file within the
selected folder will be played.
Searching Songs (File)
Turning TUNE knob : Searches for
songs (files)
Pressing TUNE knob : Plays select-
ed song (file).
MENU : Audio CD
Press the CD MP3 mode key to
set the Repeat, Random, Information
features.
Information features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or key
to repeat the current song.
Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or key
to randomly play songs within the current
folder.
Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or key
to display information of the current song.
Press the key to turn off info
display.
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
PTY
FOLDER
PTY
FOLDER
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 173
Features of your vehicle
1744
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the CD MP3 mode key to
set the Repeat, Folder Random, Folder
Repeat, All Random, Information, and
Copy features.
Information, and Copy features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or key
to repeat the current song.
Press RPT again to turn off.
Folder Random
Press the key Set [ F.RDM]
through the TUNE knob or key
to randomly play songs within the current
folder.
Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Folder Repeat
Press the key Set [ F.RPT]
through the TUNE knob or key
to repeat songs within the current folder.
Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Press the key Set [ A.RDM]
through the TUNE knob or key
to randomly play all songs within the CD.
Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or key
to display information of the current song.
Press the key to turn off info
display.
Copy
Press the key Set [ Copy]
through the TUNE knob or key.
This is used to copy the current song
into My Music.You can play the copied
Music in My Music mode.
If another key is pressed whilst copy-
ing is in progress, a pop up asking you
whether to cancel copying is dis-
played.
If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod
®
, AUX) whilst
copying is in progress, copying is can-
celled.
Music will not be played whilst copying
is in progress.
6
MENU
MENU
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 174
4 175
Features of your vehicle
MENU : iPod
®
In iPod
®
mode, press the key to set
the Repeat, Random, Information and
Search features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or key
to repeat the current song.
Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Plays all songs within the currently play-
ing category in random order.
Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Displays information of the current song.
Press the key to turn off info
display.
Search
Press the key Set [ Search]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Displays iPod
®
category list.
Searching iPod
®
category is
key pressed, move to parent category.
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 175
Features of your vehicle
1764
MENU : My Music Mode
(if equipped)
In My Music mode, press the key
to set the Repeat, Random, Information,
Delete, Delete All, and Delete Selection
features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Plays all songs in random order.
Press RDM again to turn random off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Displays information of the current song.
Press the key to turn off info
display.
Delete
Press the key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete will
delete the currently playing song.
Deletes file from list
Select the file you wish to delete by
using the TUNE knob.
Press the key and select the
delete menu to delete the selected file.
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 176
4 177
Features of your vehicle
Delete All
Press the key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Songs within My Music are selected and
deleted.
Select the songs you wish to delete
from the list.
After selecting, press the key
and select the delete menu.
NOTICE - Using the My
Music
Even if memory is available, a maxi-
mum of 6,000 songs can be stored.
The same song can be copied up to
1,000 times.
Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA cur-
rently connected with the AUX terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start when
an external device is connected with the
AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected, you
can also press the key to change
to AUX mode.
AUX mode cannot be started unless
there is an external device connected
to the AUX terminal.
NOTICE - USING THE AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the AUX
terminal for use.
MEDIA
MENU
6
MENU
5
MENU
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 177
Features of your vehicle
1784
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO
(if equipped)
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology allows
devices to be connected in a short dis-
tance, including hands-free devices,
stereo headsets, wireless remote con-
trollers, etc. For more information, visit
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
website at
www.Bluetooth.com
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio
may not be supported depending on
the compatibility of your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, you must first pair
and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
• The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners. A
Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio
can be used only when the [Audio
Streaming] of Phone is turned On.
Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Streaming : Press the
key Select [Phone] through the tune
knob Select [Audio Streaming] through
the TUNE knob Set /
Starting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio
Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD USB AUX
My Music BT Audio.
If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
Audio may not automatically start play-
ing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
audio features
• Play / Pause
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
The previous song / next song / play /
pause functions may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
MEDIA
OffOn
SETUP
CLOCK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 178
4 179
Features of your vehicle
PHONE (if equipped)
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone features
In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone, you must first pair
and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
mobile phone.
If the mobile phone is not paired or con-
nected, it is not possible to enter Phone
mode. Once a phone is paired or con-
nected, the guidance screen will be dis-
played.
If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition
(IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone will be automatically
connected. Even if you are outside, the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone will
be automatically connected once you are
in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you do not
want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone connection, set the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power to
OFF.
Making a call using the Steering
wheel remote controller
1. VOLUME button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
2.MUTE button : Mute the microphone
during a call.
3. button : Activates voice recognition.
4. button : Places and transfers calls.
5. button : Ends calls or cancels func-
tions.
• Check call history and making call
Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the
key on the steering remote con-
troller.
The call history list will be displayed on
the screen.
Press the key again to connect a
call to the selected number.
Redialing the most recently called num-
ber
Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the
key on the steering remote con-
troller.
The most recently called number is
redialed.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 179
Features of your vehicle
1804
Phone MENU
Press the key to display three
menus (Call History, Phone Book, Phone
Setup).
Call history
Press the key Set [ History]
through the TUNE knob or key.
The call history is displayed and can be
used to select a number and make a call.
If call history does not exist, a screen
asking whether to download call history
is displayed. (The download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones)
Phone Book
Press the key Set [ P. Book]
through the TUNE knob or key.
The phone book is displayed and can be
used to select a number and make a call.
If more than one number is saved to
one contact, then a screen showing
the mobile phone number, Home and
office number is displayed. Select the
desired number to make the call.
If phone book do not exist, a screen
asking whether to download phone
book is displayed. (The download fea-
ture may not be supported in some
mobile phones)
Phone Setup
Press the key Set [ Setup]
through the TUNE knob or key.
The
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone setup screen is displayed.
For more information, refer to “Phone
Setup”.
3
PHONE
2
RDM
PHONE
1
RPT
PHONE
PHONE
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 180
4 181
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE - USING THE
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
MOBILE PHONE
Do not use a mobile phone or perform
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology set-
tings (e.g. pairing a phone) whilst
driving.
Some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
-enabled phones may not be recog-
nized by the system or fully compati-
ble with the system.
Before using Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features of the
audio system, refer your phone’s
User’s Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology oper-
ations.
The phone must be paired to the audio
system to use Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features.
You will not be able to use the hands-
free feature when your phone (in the
car) is outside of the mobile service
area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a under-
ground, in a mountainous area, etc.).
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the mobile phone signal is poor or
the vehicles interior noise is too loud,
it may be difficult to hear the other
person’s voice during a call.
Do not place the phone near or inside
metallic objects, otherwise communi-
cations with Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology system or mobile service
stations can be disturbed.
Whilst a phone is connected through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology your
phone may discharge quicker than
usual for additional Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology-related opera-
tions.
Some mobile phones or other devices
may cause interference noise or mal-
function to audio system. In this case,
store the device in a different location
may resolve the condition.
Phone contact names should be saved
in English or they may not be dis-
played correctly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected.
Even if you are outside, the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you are
in the vicinity of the vehicle.
If you do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology con-
nection, turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature off.
The hands-free call volume and quali-
ty may differ depending on the mobile
phone type.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures can be used only when the
mobile phone has been paired and
connected with the device. For more
information on pairing and connect-
ing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phones, refer to the
“Phone Setup” section.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 181
Features of your vehicle
1824
(Continued)
When a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone is connect-
ed, a ( ) icon will appear at the top of
the screen. If a ( ) icon is not dis-
played, this indicates that a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled device
has not been connected. You must con-
nect the device before use. For more
information on Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phones, refer to
the “Phone Setup” section.
Pairing and connecting a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled mobile
phone will work only when the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
option within your mobile phone has
been turned on. (Methods of turning
on the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled feature may differ depending
on the mobile phone.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
In some mobile phones, starting the
ignition whilst talking through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call will result in
the call becoming disconnected.
(Switch the call back to your mobile
phone when starting the ignition.)
Some features may not be supported
in some Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone and devices.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled operation may be unstable
depending on the communication
state.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 182
4 183
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE - USING VOICE COM-
MAND
The voice recognition feature of this
product supports recognition of the
commands listed within this user’s
manual.
Whilst using voice recognition, oper-
ating the steering remote control or
the device will terminate voice recog-
nition and allow you to manually
operate desired functions.
Position the microphone above the
head of the driver’s seat. For superior
performance, maintain good posture
when saying voice commands.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Voice recognition may not function
properly due to outside noise. The fol-
lowing conditions can affect the per-
formance of Voice Recognition:
- When the windows and sunroof are
open
- When the heating/cooling system is
on
- When passing a tunnel
- When driving on rugged and uneven
roads
After downloading Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book, the
system requires some times to convert
the phone book into voice informa-
tion. During this time, voice recogni-
tion may not operate properly.
Upon inputting your phone book, spe-
cial symbols and numbers cannot be
recognized by voice. For example, “#
John Doe%&” will be recognized as
“John Doe”.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 183
Features of your vehicle
1844
VOICE COMMAND
(if equipped)
Starting Voice Command
To start voice command, shortly press
the key on the steering wheel
remote controller.
If voice command is in [Normal Mode],
then the system will say “Please say a
command. Beep”
If voice command is in [Expert Mode],
then the system will only say a “Beep-”
Setting Voice command [Normal
Mode]/[Expert Mode]:
Press the key Select
[System] through the TUNE knob or
key Select [Voice Command
Mode] through the TUNE knob Set
[Normal Mode]/[Expert Mode]
• Say the voice command.
NOTICE
For proper voice recognition, say the
voice command after the guidance mes-
sage and the “Beep” sound.
Skipping the Guidance Message
Whilst the guidance message is being
stated, shortly press the key (under
0.8 seconds) to discontinue the guidance
message and sound the “beep”.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.
Ending Voice Command
Whilst using voice command, press
and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds) to end voice command.
Whilst using voice command, pressing
the steering wheel remote controller or
a different key will end voice command.
In a state where the system is waiting
for your voice command, say “cancel”
or “end” to end voice command.
In a state where the system is waiting
for your voice command, shortly press
the key (under 0.8 seconds) to
end voice command.
5
SETUP
CLOCK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 184
4 185
Features of your vehicle
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
Whilst guidance message is being
stated
More Help
Phone book
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command
Please say a...
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod
®
, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Phone book
Please say the name of the Phone book
you want to call.
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod
®
, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Beep-
Beep-
Beep-
Beep Beep.. (end beep)
Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds)
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 185
Features of your vehicle
1864
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available dur-
ing certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in
phone book
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say “Call
History”, “
Phone book
”, “Dial Number” to exe-
cute corresponding functions.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Phone book
Displays the
phone book
screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a
phone book
saved in the
phone book
to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Radio
When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1
FM2FMAAMAMA)
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
Command Function
FM
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
FMA Displays the FMA screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
AMA Displays the AMA screen.
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
TA on Enable Traffic Announcement
TA off Disable Traffic Announcement
News on Enable RDS News feature
News off Disable RDS News feature
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 186
4 187
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Play Track 1~30 If a music CD has been inserted, plays the
corresponding track.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
Search CD Moves to the CD track or file selection screen.
For audio CDs, move to the screen and say
the track number to play the corresponding
track.
Moves to MP3 CD file selection screen.
After manually operate the device to select
and play music.
USB Plays USB music.
Search USB Moves to USB file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod
®
music.
Search iPod
®
Moves to the iPod
®
file selection screen. After,
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
Search My Music Moves to My Music file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
Command Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
Audio Plays the music saved in connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
Mute Mutes the radio or music volume.
Pardon? Repeats the most recent comment.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 187
Features of your vehicle
1884
FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during FM,
AM radio operation
Audio CD commands: Commands that can be used whilst
listening to Audio CD.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Auto Store Automatically selects radio broadcast fre-
quencies with superior reception and saves in
Presets 1~6.
Preset Save 1~6 Saves the current broadcast frequency to
Preset 1~6.
Seek up Plays the next (higher) receivable broadcast.
Seek down Plays the previous (lower) receivable broadcast.
Next Preset Selects the preset number next to the most
recently selected preset. (Example:When cur-
rently listening to preset no. 3, then preset no.
4 will be selected.)
Previous Preset Selects the preset number previous to the
most recently selected preset. (Example:
When currently listening to preset no. 3, then
preset no. 2 will be selected.)
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
AF on Enable Alternative Frequency feature
AF off Disable Alternative Frequency feature
Region Enable Region feature
Command Function
Region off Disable Region feature
Program Type Moves to the RDS Program type selection
screen. After, manually operate the device to
select a desired program type.
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Next Track Plays the next track.
Previous Track Plays the previous track.
Scan Scans the tracks from the next track for 10
seconds each.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Search Track Moves to the track selection screen. After, say
the track name to play the corresponding track.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
track.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 188
4 189
Features of your vehicle
MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available during
USB and MP3 CD operation
•iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
oper-
ation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
All Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Folder Repeat Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Search Folder Moves to the folder selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Copy Copies the current file into My Music.
Command Function
All Random Randomly plays all saved songs.
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Next Song Plays the next song.
Previous Song Plays the previous song.
Search Song Moves to the song selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
song.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 189
Features of your vehicle
1904
My Music Commands: Commands available during My
Music operation
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming from mobile phone operation Command
Operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will
bypass an additional confirmation process.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 190
4 191
Features of your vehicle
APPENDIX
Name Description
AST (A.store) Automatically selects and saves
channels
SDVC Speed Dependent Volume
Control
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 191
Features of your vehicle
1924
CD Player : AC111ELEE
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 192
4 193
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND
FUNCTIONS
Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Converts to Radio(FM/AM) mode.
Each time the key is pressed,the mode
is changed in order of FM1 FM2
FMA AM AMA.
3.
• Start Media mode
Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod
®
)
AUX, My Music, BT Audio.
4.
• Converts to Phone mode
When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
5. PWR/VOL knob
Power : Press to turn power on/off.
Volume :Turn left/right to control vol-
ume.
6.
When pressed shortly(under 0.8 sec-
onds)
- Radio mode : plays previous/next fre-
quency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music) modes
: changes the track, Song(file)
When pressed and held (0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode : continuously changes the
frequency. Upon release, plays the cur-
rent frequency.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music) modes
: rewinds or fast forwards the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls the
call volume.
7.
RDS Radio mode : searches RDS pro-
gram types.
CD/USB/MP3 modes : searches fold-
ers.
8. RESET
Forced system termination and system
restart.
PTY
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
MEDIA
RADIO
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 193
Features of your vehicle
1944
9.
Turns the monitor display on/off.
10. CLOCK
Displays the time/date/day.
11.
• Radio Mode :
- Short key : TA On/Off
- Long key : previews all receivable
broadcasts for 5 seconds each.
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes :
- Long key : Previews each song (file) for
10 seconds each.
12.
Converts to Setup mode.
13. TUNE knob
Radio mode : turn to change broadcast
frequencies.
Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : turn to search tracks/chan-
nels/files.
SETUP
TA/SCAN
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 194
4 195
Features of your vehicle
Radio Mode
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode
2. Frequency
Displays the current frequency
3. Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~ [6]
4. Preset Display
Displays saved presets
5. Autostore
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons
6. RDS Menu
Displays the RDS Menu
7. RDS Info
Displays RDS broadcast information
Switching to Radio Mode
Pressing the key will change the
operating mode in order of FM1
FM2FMAAMAMA.
If [Pop-up Mode] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Radio Pop-
up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
RADIO
SETUP
RADIO
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 195
Features of your vehicle
1964
Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the key to play the pre-
vious/next frequency.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
FM : Increases/decreased by 50kHz
AM : Increases/decreased by 9kHz
Using Radio Mode
Selecting/Saving Presets
Press the ~ buttons to play the
desired preset.
Press the button to display the
broadcast information for the frequency
saved to each button.
NOTICE
Whilst listening to a frequency you want
to save as a preset, press and hold one of
the [1] ~ [6] preset buttons (over 0.8 sec-
onds) to save the current frequency to
the selected preset.
Auto Store
Press the button to automatically
save receivable frequencies to Preset
buttons.
NOTICE
Whilst Auto Store is operating, pressing
the [Cancel] button again will cancel
Auto Store and restore the previous fre-
quency.
61
SEEK
TRACK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 196
4 197
Features of your vehicle
RDS Menu
Press the button to set the AF
(Alternative Frequency), Region and
News features.
NOTICE
The RDS Menu is not supported within
AM or AMA mode.
Scan
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview frequencies with
superior reception for 5 seconds each.
NOTICE
Once scan is complete, the previous fre-
quency will be restored.
Whilst Scan is operating, pressing and
holding the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds) will cancel the scan operation.
TA/SCAN
TA/SCAN
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 197
Features of your vehicle
1984
Program Type
Press the key to search for
the desired Program type.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired program type.
Once you find the desired program type,
press the TUNE knob.
After selecting the desired Program Type
and whilst the Program Type is blinking
(approximately 5 seconds), pressing the
key will allow you to select a
different Program Type broadcast.
TA (Traffic Announcement)
Press the key to turn the TA
(Traffic Announcement) feature
On/Off.
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
PTY
FOLDER
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 198
4 199
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE - USING THE DISCS
This device has been manufactured to
be compatible with software bearing
the following logo marks.
Do not clean discs with chemical solu-
tions, such as record sprays, antistatic
sprays, antistatic liquids, benzene, or
thinners.
After using a disc, put the disc back in
its original case to prevent disc
scratches.
Hold discs by their edges or within the
centre hole to prevent damages to disc
surfaces.
Do not introduce foreign substances
into the disc insert/eject slot.
Introducing foreign substances could
damage the device interior.
Do not insert two discs simultaneous-
ly.
When using CD-R/CD-RW discs, dif-
ferences in disc reading and playing
times may occur depending on the
disc manufacturer, production
method and the recording method as
used by the user.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Clean fingerprints and dust off the
disc surface (coated side) with a soft
cloth.
The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result in disc
slot jams or difficulties in disc
removal. Such discs may also result in
noise whilst playing.
Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not
properly operate depending on the
disc manufacturer, production
method and the record method as
used by the user. If problems persist,
trying using a different CD as contin-
ued use may result in malfunctions.
The performance of this product may
differ depending on the CD-RW Drive
Software.
• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type
CDs may not function in the device.
DATA discs cannot be played.
(However, such discs may still operate
but will do so abnormally.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Do not use abnormally shaped discs
(8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-shaped)
as such discs could lead to malfunc-
tions.
If the disc is straddled on the disc slot
without removal for 10 seconds, the
disc will automatically be re-inserted
into the disc player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are support-
ed. Other discs may result in recogni-
tion failure (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with
labels)
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 199
Features of your vehicle
2004
MP3 File Information
• Supported Audio Formats
ISO 9660 Level 1
ISO 9660 Level 2
Romeo / Juliet (128 characters)
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio Layer3
MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3
Windows Media Audio Ver 7.X
& 8.X
File formats that do not comply with
the above formats may not be proper-
ly recognized or play without properly
displaying file names or other informa-
tion.
• Support for Compressed Files
1. Supported Bitrates (Kbps)
MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA
Layer3 Layer3 Layer3
High Range
32 8 8 48
40 16 16 64
48 24 24 80
56 32 32 96
64 40 40 128
80 48 48 160
96 56 56 192
112 64 64
128 80 80
160 96 96
192 112 112
224 128 128
256 144 144
320 160 160
2. Sampling Frequencies (Hz)
MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA
44100 22050 11025 32000
48000 24000 12000 44100
3000 16000 8000 48000
For MP3/WMA compression files, dif-
ferences in sound quality will occur
depending on the bitrate. (Higher
sound quality can be experienced with
higher bitrates.)
This device only recognizes files with
MP3/WMA extensions. Other file
extensions may not be properly recog-
nized.
3. Maximum number of recognized fold-
ers and files
- Folder : 255 folders for CD, 2,000 fold-
ers for USB
- File : 999 files for CD, 6,000 files for
USB
There are no limitations to the number
of recognized folder levels
File System
Audio
Compression
BIT RATE(kbps)
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 200
4 201
Features of your vehicle
• Language Support
(Unicode Support)
1. English: 94 characters
2. Special characters and Symbols : 986
characters
Languages other than Korean and
English (including Chinese) are not
included.
3. Text Display (Based on Unicode)
- File name: Maximum 64 English
characters
- Folder name: Max 32 English charac-
ters
Using the scroll feature allows you
to see the entire name of files with
names that are too long to be dis-
played at once.
• Compatibility by Disc Type
1. Playing MIXED CDs: First plays the
audio CD, then plays the compressed
file(s).
2. Playing EXTRA CDs: First plays the
audio CD, then plays the compressed
file(s).
3. Playing multisession CDs: Plays in
order of sessions
- MIXED CD : CD type in which both
MP3 and audio CD files are recog-
nized in one disc.
- Multisession CD CD type that
includes more than two sessions.
Different from Extra CDs, multises-
sion CDs are recorded by sessions
and have no media limitation.
• Precautions upon Writing CDs
1. In all cases except when creating mul-
tisession discs, check the close ses-
sion option before creating the disc.
Though product malfunctions will not
occur, some time may be required for
the device to check whether the ses-
sion state is closed (approximately 25
seconds). (Additional time may also be
required depending on the number of
folders or files.)
2. Changing the MP3/WMA file exten-
sions or changing files of other exten-
sions to MP3/WMA may result in prod-
uct malfunction.
3. When naming files with MP3/WMA file
extensions, write using only Korean
and English. (Languages other than
Korean and English are not supported
and are displayed as blank.)
4. Unauthorized use or duplication of
music files are prohibited by law.
5. Prolonged use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
that do not satisfy related standards
and/or specifications could result in
product malfunction.
6. Unauthorized use or duplication of
MP3/WMA files is prohibited by law.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 201
Features of your vehicle
2024
MEDIA MODE
Switching to Media Mode
Pressing the key will change the
operating mode in order of CD
USB
(iPod
®
) AUX My Music BT Audio.
If [Pop-up Mode] / [Mode Pop-up] is
turned on within [Display], then
pressing the key will display the
Media Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the focus.
Press the knob to select.
NOTICE
The media mode pop up screen can be
displayed only when there are two or
more media modes turned on.
Title Icon
When a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology,
iPod
®
, USB, or AUX device is connected
or a CD is inserted, the corresponding
mode icon will be displayed.
Icon Title
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
CD
iPod
®
USB
AUX
MEDIA
SETUP
MEDIA
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 202
4 203
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan, dis-
plays the currently operating function
3. Track Info
Displays information about the current
track
4. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
5. Play Time
Displays the current play time
6. Info
Shows detailed information about the
current track
7. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature on/off
8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
9. List
Moves to the list screen
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 203
Features of your vehicle
2044
Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the mode
will automatically start and begin playing.
Whilst playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
NOTICE
Only genuine audio CDs are support-
ed. Other discs may result in recogni-
tion failure (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with
labels)
The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track infor-
mation is included within the audio
CD.
Changing Tracks
Press the key to move to the
previous or next track.
NOTICE
Pressing the key after the
track has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current track from the
beginning.
Pressing the key before the
track has been playing for 1 seconds
will start the previous track.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 204
4 205
Features of your vehicle
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Tracks
Whilst playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current track.
Scan (for RDS model)
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to play the first 10 seconds
of each file.
Pressing and holding the key again to
turn off.
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 205
Features of your vehicle
2064
Audio CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have access to
the Info, Random(Shuffle), Repeat and
List features.
Info
Press the button to display details
about the current disc.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the button to play tracks in
random(Shuffle) order.
Press the button again to turn the
Random(Shuffle) feature off.
Random(Shuffle): Plays all tracks in
random(Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the cur-
rent track. Press the button again to turn
the repeat feature off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current track.
List
Press the button to display the
track list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired track
is displayed, press the knob to select and
play.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 206
4 207
Features of your vehicle
MP3 CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan, dis-
plays the currently operating function
3. File Index
Displays the current file number
4. File Info
Displays information about the current
file
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time
7. Info
Shows detailed information about the
current file
8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature on/off
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
11. List
Moves to the list screen
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 207
Features of your vehicle
2084
Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the mode
will automatically start and being playing.
Whilst playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
NOTICE
If there are numerous files and folders
within the disc, reading time could take
more than 10 seconds and the list may
not be displayed or song searches may
not operate. Once loading is complete,
try again.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to the
previous or next file.
NOTICE
Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds will
start the current file from the begin-
ning.
Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
Whilst playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan(for RDS model)
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to play the first 10 seconds
of each file.
Pressing and holding the key again to
turn off.
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 208
4 209
Features of your vehicle
Searching Folders
Press the key to select and
search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will
begin playing.
PTY
FOLDER
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 209
Features of your vehicle
2104
MP3 CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have access to
the Info, Random(Shuffle), Repeat, Copy
and List features.
Info
Press the button to display details
about the current file.
NOTICE
When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file
information.
When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
is set as the default display, the folder
name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information
are recorded within the MP3 file ID3
tag.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the button to play files in
random(Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-
ture changes in order of Random
(Shuffle) Folder
Random (Shuffle) All
Off.
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays all files
within the current folder in Random
(Shuffle) order.
Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all files in
Random(Shuffle) order.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 210
4 211
Features of your vehicle
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the cur-
rent file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-
ture changes in order of Repeat
Repeat
Folder
Off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files within
the current Folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the cur-
rent file into My Music.
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during copy-
ing will display a pop-up asking whether
you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,
select 'Yes’.
List
Press the button to display the file
list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file is
displayed, press the knob to select and
play.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 211
Features of your vehicle
2124
NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
Connect the USB device after turning
on the engine. The USB device may
become damaged if it is already con-
nected when the ignition is turned
on.The USB device may not operate
properly if the car ignition is turned
on or off with the USB device connect-
ed.
Heed caution to static electricity when
connecting/disconnecting USB
devices.
Encoded MP3 Players will not be rec-
ognized when connected as an exter-
nal device.
When connecting an external USB
device, the device may not properly
recognize the USB is in some states.
Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be
recognized.
• This device recognizes USB devices
formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file for-
mats. This device does not recognize
files in NTFS file format.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Some USB devices may not be sup-
ported due to compatibility issues.
Avoid contact between the USB con-
nector with bodily parts or foreign
objects.
Repeated connecting/disconnecting of
USB devices within short periods of
time may result in product malfunc-
tion.
A strange noise may occur when dis-
connecting the USB.
Make sure to connect/disconnect
external USB devices with the audio
power turned off.
The amount of time required to recog-
nize the USB device may differ
depending on the type, size or file for-
mats stored in the USB. Such differ-
ences in time are not indications of
malfunctions.
The device only supports USB devices
used to play music files.
USB images and videos are not sup-
ported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Do not use the USB I/F to charge bat-
teries or USB accessories that gener-
ate heat. Such acts may lead to wors-
ened performance or damage to the
device.
The device may not recognize the USB
device if separately purchased USB
hubs and extension cables are being
used. Connect the USB directly with
the multimedia terminal of the vehi-
cle.
When using mass storage USB devices
with separate logical drives, only files
saved to the root drive can be played.
Files may not properly operate if
application programs are installed to
the USBs.
The device may not operate normally
if MP3 Players, mobile phones, digital
cameras, or other electronic devices
(USB devices not recognized as
portable disk drives) are connected
with the device.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 212
4 213
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
Charging through the USB may not
work for some mobile devices.
The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memory
type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB
Memory.
The device may not support normal
operation when using formats such as
HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.
The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
USB memory sticks used by connect-
ing an Adaptor (SD Type or CF Type)
may not be properly recognized.
The device may not operate properly
when using USB HDDs or USBs sub-
ject to connection failures caused by
vehicle vibrations. (e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Avoid use of USB memo-
ry products that can also
be used as key chains or
mobile phone accessories.
Use of such products may
cause damage to the USB jack.
Connecting an MP3 device or phone
through various channels, such as
AUX/BT or Audio/USB mode may
result in pop noises or abnormal oper-
ation.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 213
Features of your vehicle
2144
USB MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan, dis-
plays the currently operating function
3. File Index
Displays the current file number
4. File Info
Displays information about the current
file
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the cur-
rent file
8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature on/off
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
11. List
Moves to the list screen
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 214
4 215
Features of your vehicle
Using USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode will
automatically start and begin playing a
USB file.
Whilst playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
NOTICE
Loading may require additional time if
there are many files and folders within
the USB and result in faulty list display
or file searching. Normal operations
will resume once loading is complete.
The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memory
type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB
Memory.
Changing Files
Press the keys to move to the
previous or next file.
NOTICE
Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds will
start the current file from the begin-
ning.
Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the previous file.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 215
Features of your vehicle
2164
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
Whilst playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to play the first 10 seconds
of each file.
Pressing and holding the key again to
turn off.
Searching Folders
Press the key to select and
search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will
begin playing.
PTY
FOLDER
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 216
4 217
Features of your vehicle
USB Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have access to
the Info, Random(Shuffle), Repeat, Copy
and List features.
Info
Press the button to display details
about the current file.
NOTICE
When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file infor-
mation.
When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
is set as the default display, the folder
name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are dis-
played only when such information are
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the button to play files in
random(Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-
ture changes in order of Random(Shuffle)
Folder
Random(Shuffle) All Off.
Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays the files
in the current folder in random(Shuffle)
order.
Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all files in
random(Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the cur-
rent file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-
ture changes in order of Repeat
Repeat
Folder
Off.
Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the current file.
Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all files
within the current folder.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 217
Features of your vehicle
2184
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the cur-
rent file into My Music.
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during copy-
ing will display a pop-up asking whether
you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,
select 'Yes’.
List
Press the button to display the file
list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file is
displayed, press the knob to select and
play.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 218
4 219
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE - USING THE iPod
®
DEVICE
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
In order to use the iPod
®
whilst oper-
ating the keys, you must use a dedi-
cated iPod
®
cable. (the cable that is
supplied when purchasing
iPod
®
/iPhone
®
products)
If the iPod
®
is connected to the vehicle
whilst it is playing, a high pitch sound
could occur for approximately 1-2 sec-
onds immediately after connecting. If
possible, connect the iPod
®
to the
vehicle with the iPod
®
stopped/paused.
During ACC ON state, connecting the
iPod
®
through the iPod
®
cable will
charge the iPod
®
through the car
audio system.
When connecting with the iPod
®
cable, make sure to fully insert the
jack to prevent communication inter-
ference.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When the EQ features of an external
device, such as the iPod
®
, and the audio
system are both active, EQ effects could
overlap and cause sound deterioration
and distortion. Whenever possible, turn
off the EQ feature within the external
device upon use by connecting with the
audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod
®
or
AUX device is connected. When such
devices are not being used, disconnect
the device for storage.
When the iPod
®
or AUX device power
is connected to the power jack, playing
the external device may result in noise.
In such cases, disconnect the power con-
nection before use.
• Skipping or improper operation may
occur depending on the characteristics of
your iPod
®
/iPhone
®
device.
If your iPhone is connected to both the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology and
USB, the sound may not be properly
played. In your
iPhone
®
, select the
Dock connector or Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology to change the sound out-
put (source).
(Continued)
(Continued)
iPod
®
mode cannot be operated when
the iPod
®
cannot be recognized due to
the playing of versions that do not
support communication protocols,
cases of iPod
®
abnormalities and
defects.
• For fifth generation iPod
®
Nano
devices, the iPod
®
may not be recog-
nized when the battery level is low.
Please charge the iPod
®
for use.
• Search/play orders shown within the
iPod
®
device may differ with the
orders shown within the audio system.
If the iPod
®
malfunctions due to an
iPod
®
device defect, reset the iPod
®
and try again. (To learn more, refer to
your iPod
®
manual)
• Some iPod
®
s may not sync with the
System depending on its version. If
the Media is removed before the
Media is recognized, then the system
may not properly restore the previ-
ously operated mode. (iPad charging
is not supported.)
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 219
Features of your vehicle
2204
iPod MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle), displays
the currently operating function
3. Song Index
Displays the current song/total number of
songs
4. Song Info
Displays information about the current
song
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time
7. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature on/off
8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
9. List
Moves to the list screen
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 220
4 221
Features of your vehicle
Using iPod
®
Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod Songs
Once an iPod
®
is connected, the mode will
automatically start and begin playing an
iPod
®
song.
Whilst playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
NOTICE
iPod
®
s with unsupported communica-
tion protocols may not properly operate
in the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the key to move to the
previous or next song.
NOTICE
Pressing the key after the
song has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current song from the
beginning.
Pressing the key before the
song has been playing for 1 seconds
will start the previous song.
Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod
®
product.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs
Whilst playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current song.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 221
Features of your vehicle
2224
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select and
play.
NOTICE
There are eight categories that can be
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.
Category Menu
Within the iPod
®
Category menu, you will
have access to the , Home, and
features.
1. : Displays the play screen
2. : Moves to the iPod
®
root catego-
ry screen
3. : Moves to the previous category
NOTICE
If the search mode is accessed whilst
playing a song, the most recently
searched category is displayed.
Search steps upon initial connection
may differ depending on the type of
iPod
®
device.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 222
4 223
Features of your vehicle
iPod
®
Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have access to
the Random(Shuffle), Repeat and List
features.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the button to play songs in
random(Shuffle) order.
Press the button again to turn the ran-
dom(Shuffle)feature off.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the cur-
rent song. Press the button again to turn
the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
List
Press the button to display the
Category Menu.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select and
play.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 223
Features of your vehicle
2244
AUX MODE
Using AUX Mode
Press the key Select [AUX]
An external device can be connected to
play music.
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders, car
VCR, etc.) can be played through a ded-
icated cable.
NOTICE
If an external device connector is con-
nected with the AUX terminal, then
AUX mode will automatically operate.
Once the connector is disconnected,
the previous mode will be restored.
AUX mode can be used only when an
external audio player (camcorder, car
VCR, etc.) has been connected.
The AUX volume can be controlled
separately from other audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to AUX
mode, but only output noise. When an
external device is not being used, also
remove the connector jack.
• When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, playing
the external device may output noise.
In such cases, disconnect the power
connection before use.
Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX
jack upon use.
MEDIA
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 224
4 225
Features of your vehicle
MY MUSIC MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan, dis-
plays the currently operating function
3. File Index
Displays the current file/total number of
files
4. File Info
Displays information about the current
file
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the cur-
rent file
8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature on/off
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
10. Delete
Deletes the current file
11. List
Moves to the list screen
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 225
Features of your vehicle
2264
Using My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
Whilst playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
NOTICE
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the [My Music] button will be
disabled.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to the
previous or next file.
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds will
start the current file from the begin-
ning.
• Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 226
4 227
Features of your vehicle
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
Whilst playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan(for RDS model)
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to play the first 10 seconds
of each file.
Pressing and holding the key again to
turn off.
My Music Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have access to
the Info, Random(Shuffle), Repeat,
Delete and List features.
Info
Press the button to display details
about the current file.
NOTICE
The title, artist and album info are dis-
played only when such information is
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.
Random
Press the button to play files in
random order. Press the button again to
turn the Random feature off.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the cur-
rent song. Press the button again to turn
the repeat feature off.
Deleting Files
Press the button to delete the cur-
rent file.
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 227
Features of your vehicle
2284
List
Press the button to display the file
list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file is
displayed, press the knob to select and
play.
List Menu
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into My
Music.
Press the button or individually
select the files you want to delete. Once
files are selected, the button and
buttons will be
enabled.
1) : Moves to the previous screen
2) Select All: Selects all files
3) Unselet All: Deselects all selected files
4) Delete: Deletes selected files
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the button to delete
the selected files.
NOTICE
If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved.
Identical files cannot be copied more
than 1,000 times.
To check memory information, go to
[System] [Memory
Information]
SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 228
4 229
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE - USING THE
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
Mode can be used only when a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone
has been connected.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
Mode will not be available when con-
necting mobile phones that do not
support this feature.
Whilst Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio is playing, if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone
is connected, then the music will also
stop.
Moving the Track up/down whilst
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio mode may result in
pop noises in some mobile phones.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be support-
ed in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When returning to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may not
automatically restart in some mobile
phones.
Receiving an incoming call or making
an outgoing call whilst playing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
may result in audio interference.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 229
Features of your vehicle
2304
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO MODE
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Audio
Once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected, the mode will auto-
matically start.
Whilst playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
NOTICE
The play/pause feature may operate dif-
ferently depending on the mobile phone.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to the
previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device has not been connected, press
the key [Phone] button to dis-
play the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone, con-
nect/disconnect and delete features from
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone.
NOTICE
If the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio is not operating properly, check
whether the feature is turned off at
[Phone] [Audio stream-
ing] (Streaming Audio). If the feature
is off, turn back on and try again.
If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
mode, pressing the play button once
may start playing the mode. Check to
see that music is playing from the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device after converting to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Mode.
SETUP
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 230
4 231
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology refers to
a short-distance wireless networking
technology which uses a 2.4GHz ~
2.48GHz frequency to connect various
devices within a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external devices,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phones, PDAs, various electronic
devices, and automotive environments,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology allows
data to be transmitted at high speeds
without having to use a connector cable.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree refers to a device which
allows the user to conveniently make
phone calls with
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phones through the
audio system.
CAUTION
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that enables
drivers to practice safe driving.
Connecting the car audio system
with a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone allows the user
to conveniently make calls, receive
calls, and manage the phone book.
Before using the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology , carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
Excessive use or operations whilst
driving may lead to negligent driv-
ing practices and be the cause of
accidents.
Do not operate the device exces-
sively whilst driving.
Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driv-
ing, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 231
Features of your vehicle
2324
NOTICE - USING UPON
CONNECTING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology PHONE
Before connecting the car audio sys-
tem with the mobile phone, check to
see that the mobile phone supports
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures.
Even if the phone supports Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology, the phone will
not be found during device searches if
the phone has been set to hidden state
or the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power is turned off. Disable the hid-
den state or turn on the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology power prior to
searching/connecting with the car
audio system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If you do not want to automatically
connect your Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, try the following.
1. Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your mobile
phone.
- For more information on Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology features within
your mobile, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
2. Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your car
audio system.
- To turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your car
audio system, go to >
[Phone] and [turn off] the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
ture.
Park the vehicle when connecting the
car audio system with your mobile
phone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology con-
nection may become intermittently
disconnected in some mobile phones.
Follow these steps to try again.
1. Turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone off/on and try again.
2. Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3 Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4. Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5. Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
The Handsfree call volume and quali-
ty may differ depending on the mobile
phone.
(Continued)
SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 232
4 233
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures supported within the vehicle are
as follows. Some features may not be
supported depending on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
- Answering and placing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree calls
- Menu operation during call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
Outgoing volume)
- Download Call History
- Download Mobile Phone book
- Phone book/Call History Auto
Download
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection - Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices to the car system.
Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connected at
a time.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Other devices cannot be paired whilst
a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is already connected.
When a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is being connected,
the connection process cannot be can-
celled.
Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio related features will
operate within this system.
Normal operation is possible only for
devices that support Handsfree or
audio features, such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone or
a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio device.
Only one function can be used at a
time between the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree and Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio. (Whilst
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, streaming will end
upon entering the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone screen.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes discon-
nected for various reasons, such as
being out of range, turning the device
OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication error,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are automatically searched
and connected.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 233
Features of your vehicle
2344
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of synchro-
nizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the car
audio system for connection. Pairing is
necessary to connect and use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature.
Pairing Key / Key on
the Steering Remote Controller
When No Devices have been Paired
1. Press the key or the key
on the steering remote controller. The
following screen is displayed.
2. Press the button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1) Device : Name of device as shown
when searching from your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile Phone),
search and select your car audio sys-
tem.
4. After a few moments, a screen is dis-
played where the passkey is entered.
Here, enter
the passkey “0000” to pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device with the car audio system.
5. Once pairing is complete, the following
screen is displayed.
PHONE
PHONE
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 234
4 235
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE
If Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are current-
ly connected, pressing the key
or the key on the steering wheel
displays the following screen. Press the
[Pair] button to pair a new device or
press the [Connect] to connect a previ-
ously paired device.
Pairing through [PHONE] Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] Select
TUNE knob
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section "When No
Devices have been Paired" on the previ-
ous page.
NOTICE
• The waiting period during phone pair-
ing will last for one minute. The pair-
ing process will fail if the device is not
paired within the given time. If the
pairing process fails, you must start
the process from the beginning.
• Generally, most Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices will automatically
connect once pairing is complete.
However, some devices may require a
separate verification process to con-
nect. Check to see whether Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology has been proper-
ly connected within your mobile
phone.
List of paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be viewed at
[Phone] [Paired Phone
List].
SETUP
SETUP
PHONE
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 235
Features of your vehicle
2364
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is cur-
rently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired
but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and press the
button.
SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 236
4 237
Features of your vehicle
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices with the car
audio system. The "Change Priority" fea-
ture is used to set the connection priority
of paired phones. However, the most
recently connected phone will always be
set as the highest priority.
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
phone you want to switch to the highest
priority, then press the button
from the Menu. The selected device will
be changed to the highest priority.
NOTICE
When a device is currently connected,
even if you change the priority to a differ-
ent device, the currently connected phone
will always be set as the highest priority.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and press the
button.
SETUP
SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 237
Features of your vehicle
2384
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press the
button.
NOTICE
When deleting the currently connect-
ed device, the device will automatical-
ly be disconnected to proceed with the
deleting process.
If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and phone book
data will also be deleted.
To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 238
4 239
Features of your vehicle
USING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
key to display the Phone menu screen.
1) Dial Number : Displays the dial screen
where numbers can be dialed to make
calls
2) Call History : Displays the call history
list screen
3) Phone book : Displays the Phone
book list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related set-
tings
NOTICE
If you press the [Call History] button
but there is no call history data, a
prompt is displayed which asks
whether to download call history data.
If you press the [Phone book] button
but there is no phone book data, a
prompt is displayed which asks
whether to download phone book
data.
This feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones. For more infor-
mation on download support, refer to
your mobile phone user’s manual.
PHONE
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 239
Features of your vehicle
2404
Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the key Select [Dial
Number]
1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone num-
ber
2) Call : If a number has been entered,
calls the number If no number has
been entered, switches to call history
screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone num-
ber
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers one
digit at a time
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connected
will display the following screen.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your phone book
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Accept : Accept the incoming call
4) Reject : Reject the incoming call
NOTICE
When an incoming call pop-up is dis-
played, most Audio and SETUP mode
features are disabled. Only the call
volume will operate.
The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will auto-
matically revert to Private mode.
PHONE
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 240
4 241
Features of your vehicle
During a Handsfree Call
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is saved
within your phone book
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Call time : Displays the call time
4) End : Ends call
5) Private : Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard by
the other party
7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off
NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party will
not be able to hear your voice.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and missed
calls is displayed.
Press the [Download] button to download
the call history.
1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download : Download Recent Call
History
NOTICE
The call history list will display up to
30 outgoing, incoming, and missed
calls.
Upon downloading call histories, pre-
viously saved histories are deleted.
Incoming calls with hidden caller IDs
will not be saved in the call history
list.
Previously saved phone book entries
are stored even if a device is discon-
nected and re-connected.
The download feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones. Check
to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device supports the down-
load feature.
PHONE
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 241
Features of your vehicle
2424
Phone Book
Press the key Select [Phone
book]
The list of saved phone book entries is
displayed. Press the [Download] button
to download the call history.
1) Contact List :
- Displays downloaded phone book
entries
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download : Download phone book
entries
NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be
copied into car phone book.
Upon downloading phone book data,
previously saved phone book data will
be deleted.
Downloading is not possible if the
phone book download feature is
turned off within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device. Also,
some devices may require device
authorization upon attempting to
download. If downloading cannot be
normally conducted, check the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device setting or the screen state.
Caller ID information will not be dis-
played for unsaved callers.
• The download feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones. Check
to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device supports the down-
load feature.
PHONE
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 242
4 243
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE - USING THE Voice
Recognition
When using the voice recognition fea-
ture, only commands listed within the
user's manual are supported.
Be aware that during the operation of
the voice recognition system, pressing
any key other than the key or
touching the screen will terminate
voice recognition mode.
For superior voice recognition per-
formance, position the microphone
used for voice recognition above the
head of the driver’s seat and maintain
a proper position when saying com-
mands.
Within the following situations, voice
recognition may not function properly
due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof are
open
- When the wind of the cooling / heat-
ing device is strong
- When entering and passing through
tunnels
- When driving on rugged and uneven
roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Phone related voice commands can be
used only when a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected.
When making calls by stating a name,
the corresponding contact must be
downloaded and stored within the
audio system.
After downloading the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book, it
takes some times to convert the phone
book data into voice information.
During this time, voice recognition
may not properly operate.
Pronounce the voice commands natu-
rally and clearly as if in a normal con-
versation.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 243
Features of your vehicle
2444
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the steering
wheel remote controller Say a command
If voice recognition is in [Normal Mode],
then the system will say “Please say a
command. Beep~”
• If voice recognition is in [Expert Mode],
then the system will only say a “Beep~”
To change the Normal Mode/Expert
Mode setting, go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback] / [Voice Recognition
System].
NOTICE
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries (e.g.,
“Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.). Instead,
always use full names (including first
and last names) for all contacts (e.g.,
use “Jacob Stevenson” instead of
“Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt. or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department” instead
of “CFD”).
4) Do not use special characters (e.g.,
“@”, “hyphen -“, “asterisk *”, amper-
sand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from the
contact list, change it to a more
descriptive name (e.g., use “Grandpa
Joseph” instead of “Pa Joe”).
Skipping Prompt Messages
Whilst prompt message is being stated
Shortly press the key on the steer-
ing wheel remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
Whilst system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the steer-
ing wheel remote controller
The command wait state is immediately
ended and the beep ton will sound. After
the “beep”, say the voice command.
SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 244
4 245
Features of your vehicle
ENDING VOICE RECOGNITION
Whilst Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the steer-
ing wheel remote controller
NOTICE
Whilst using voice command, pressing
a steering wheel remote control or a
different key will end voice command.
When the system is waiting for a voice
command, say “cancel” or “end” to
end voice command.
When the system is waiting for a voice
command, press and hold the key
on the steering wheel remote con-
troller to end voice command.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 245
Features of your vehicle
2464
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
More Help
More Help
Please say a command
Please say a...
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod
®
, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod
®
, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Ding~
Ding~
Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds)
Phone book
Cancel
Please say a command
Phone book.
Please say the name of the phone book you
want to call.
Ding~
Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)
Ding~
Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds):
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 246
4 247
Features of your vehicle
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available dur-
ing certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in
phone book
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say “Call
History”, “
Phone book
”, “Dial Number” to exe-
cute corresponding functions.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Phone book
Displays the
phone book
screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a
phone book
saved in the
phone book
to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Radio
When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1
FM2 FMA AM
AMA)
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
Command Function
FM
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
FMA Displays the FMA screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
AMA Displays the AMA screen.
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
TA on Enable Traffic Announcement
TA off Disable Traffic Announcement
News on Enable RDS News feature
News off Disable RDS News feature
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 247
Features of your vehicle
2484
Command Function
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Play Track 1~30 If a music CD has been inserted, plays the
corresponding track.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
Search CD Moves to the CD track or file selection screen.
For audio CDs, move to the screen and say the
track number to play the corresponding track.
Moves to MP3 CD file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and
play music.
USB Plays USB music.
Search USB Moves to USB file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod
®
music.
Search iPod
®
Moves to the iPod
®
file selection screen. After,
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
Search My Music Moves to My Music file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
Command Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
Audio Plays the music saved in connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
Mute Mutes the radio or music volume.
Pardon? Repeats the most recent comment.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 248
4 249
Features of your vehicle
FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during FM,
AM radio operation
Audio CD commands: Commands available during Audio
CD operation
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Auto Store Automatically selects radio broadcast fre-
quencies with superior reception and saves in
Presets 1~6.
Preset Save 1~6 Saves the current broadcast frequency to
Preset 1~6.
Seek up Plays the next (higher) receivable broadcast.
Seek down Plays the previous (lower) receivable broadcast.
Next Preset Selects the preset number next to the most
recently selected preset. (Example:When cur-
rently listening to preset no. 3, then preset no.
4 will be selected.)
Previous Preset Selects the preset number previous to the
most recently selected preset. (Example:
When currently listening to preset no. 3, then
preset no. 2 will be selected.)
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
AF on Enable Alternative Frequency feature
AF off Disable Alternative Frequency feature
Region Enable Region feature
Command Function
Region off Disable Region feature
Program Type Moves to the RDS Program type selection
screen. After, manually operate the device to
select a desired program type.
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Next Track Plays the next track.
Previous Track Plays the previous track.
Scan Scans the tracks from the next track for 10
seconds each.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Search Track Moves to the track selection screen. After, say
the track name to play the corresponding track.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
track.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 249
Features of your vehicle
2504
MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available during
USB and MP3 CD operation
• iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
oper-
ation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
All Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Folder Repeat Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Search Folder Moves to the folder selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Copy Copies the current file into My Music.
Command Function
All Random Randomly plays all saved songs.
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Next Song Plays the next song.
Previous Song Plays the previous song.
Search Song Moves to the song selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
song.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 250
4 251
Features of your vehicle
My Music Commands: Commands available during My
Music operation
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands: Commands
available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio stream-
ing from mobile phone operation Command Operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will
bypass an additional confirmation process.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 251
Features of your vehicle
2524
SETUP
Starting Mode
Press the key to display the
Setup screen.
You can select and control options relat-
ed to [Display], [Sound], [Clock/Day],
[Phone] and [System].
Display Settings
Adjusting the Brightness
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Brightness]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
screen brightness or set the Brightness
on Automatic, Day, or Night mode.
Press the button to reset.
1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically
2) Day : Always maintains the brightness
on high
3) Night : Always maintains the bright-
ness on low
Pop-up Mode
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Pop-up Mode]
This feature is used to display the Pop-up
Mode screen when entering radio and
media modes.
When this feature is turned on, pressing
the or key will display
the Pop-up Mode screen.
NOTICE
The media Pop-up Mode screen can be
displayed only when two or more media
modes have been connected.
MEDIA RADIO
SETUP
Default
SETUP
SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 252
4 253
Features of your vehicle
Scroll Text
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Scroll text]
This feature is used to scroll text dis-
played on the screen when it is too long
to be displayed at once.
When turned on, the text is repeatedly
scrolled. When turned off, the text is
scrolled just once.
MP3 Information Display
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Song Info]
This feature is used to change the infor-
mation displayed within USB and MP3
CD modes.
1) Folder File : Displays file name and
folder name
2) Album Artist Song : Displays album
name/artist name/song
SETUP SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 253
Features of your vehicle
2544
Sound Settings
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Audio Setting]
Use the , , , buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the button to reset.
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]
The volume level is controlled automati-
cally according to the vehicle speed.
SDVC can be set by selecting from
Off/Low/Mid/High.
SETUP
Default
SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 254
4 255
Features of your vehicle
Voice Recognition Setting
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Volume Dialogue]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Volume Dialog.
Touch Screen Beep
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Touch Screen Beep]
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
Clock/Day Setting
Setting
Press the key Select
[Clock/Day] Select [Clock Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the Hour,
Minutes and AM/PM setting.
NOTICE
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to display the Clock/ Day
screen.
CLOCK
SETUP
SETUP SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 255
Features of your vehicle
2564
Day Setting
Press the key Select
[Clock/Day] Select [Day Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the Day,
Month and Year setting.
Time Format
Press the key Select
[Clock/Day] Select [Time Format]
This feature is used to change the clock
format between 12hr or 24hr.
Clock Display
Press the key Select
[Clock/Day] Select [Clock Display
(Power off)]
This feature is used to display a clock on
the screen when the audio system is
turned off.
SETUP SETUP SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 256
4 257
Features of your vehicle
Automatic RDS Time
Press the key Select
[Clock/Day] Select [Automatic RDS
Time]
This feature is used to set time automat-
ically by synchronizing with RDS.
SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 257
Features of your vehicle
2584
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Setting
The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their
respective owners. A
Bluetooth
®
enabled
cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices
can be paired with the audio system.
For more information, refer to the “Pairing
through Phone Setup” section within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with the
audio system. Upon selecting a paired
phone, the setup menu is displayed.
For more information, refer to the “Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Connection” section within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
1) : Moves to the previous screen
2) Connect/Disconnect Phone : Connect/
disconnects currently selected phone
3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected
phone
4) Change Priority : Sets currently selected
phone to highest connection priority
SETUP SETUP
WARNING
Driving whilst distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control that may
lead to an accident, severe personal
injury, and death. The driver’s pri-
mary responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and use
of any handheld devices, other
equipment, or vehicle systems
which take the driver’s eyes, atten-
tion and focus away from the safe
operation of a vehicle or which are
not permissible by law should never
be used during operation of the
vehicle.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 258
4 259
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-
LOADING PHONE BOOKS
Only phone books within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile phone
supports the download feature.
To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports phone book
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
The Phone book for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded. Before
downloading, check to see whether
your phone supports the download
feature.
Downloading Phone books
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone book Download]
The Phone book is downloaded from the
mobile phone and the download
progress is displayed.
NOTICE
Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be
copied into car phone book.
Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be
saved for each paired device.
Upon downloading phone book data,
previously saved phone book data will
be deleted. However, Phone book
entries saved to other paired phones
are not deleted.
Auto Download (Phone Book)
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Auto Download]
This feature is used to automatically
download mobile phone book entries
once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected.
NOTICE
The Auto Download feature will
download mobile phone book entries
every time the phone is connected.
The download time may differ
depending on the number of saved
phone book entries and the communi-
cation state.
When downloading a phone book,
first check to see that your mobile
phone supports the phone book down-
load feature.
SETUP SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 259
Features of your vehicle
2604
Audio Streaming
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]
When Audio Streaming is turned on, you
can play music files saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device
through the audio system.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology is
turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
back on, go to [Phone] and
press “Yes”.
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP SETUP
CAUTION
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming may not be support-
ed in some Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phones.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 260
4 261
Features of your vehicle
System Setting
Memory Information
Press the key Select [System]
Select [Memory Information]
This feature displays information related
to system memory.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently in
use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity
Voice Recognition Mode Setting
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Voice Recognition
System]
This feature is used to select the desired
prompt feedback option from Normal and
Expert.
1) Normal : When using voice recogni-
tion, provides detailed guidance
prompts
2) Expert : When using voice recognition,
omits some guidance prompts
NOTICE
Voice Recognition is depend on the
Audio System.
Language
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Language]
This feature is used to change the sys-
tem and voice recognition language.
If the language is changed, the system
will restart and apply the selected lan-
guage.
Language support by region
SETUP SETUP
SETUP
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 261
Features of your vehicle
2624
REAR VIEW CAMERA
(if equipped)
The system has been equipped with a
rear view camera for user safety by
allowing a wider rear range of vision.
The rear view camera will automatical-
ly operate when the ignition key is
turned ON and the transmission lever
is set to R.
The rear view camera will automatical-
ly stop operating when set to a differ-
ent lever.
CAUTION
The rear view camera has been
equipped with an optical lens to
provide a wider range of vision and
may appear different from the actu-
al distance. For safety, directly
check the rear and left/right sides.
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 262
4 263
Features of your vehicle
APPENDIX
Name Description
12hr 12 Hour
24hr 24 Hour
AST(A.Store) Automatically selects and
saves channels
AMA AM Radio (Auto store)
AUX External Audio mode
Bass Deep sound
Treble High sound
BT Audio
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio
FMA FM Radio (Auto store)
Power Bass This is a sound system fea-
ture that provides live bass.
Power Treble This is a sound system fea-
ture that provides live treble.
Preset Saved radio frequency
RDS Search Radio Data System Search
TA Off Traffic Announcement
EL(FL) UK 4B AUDIO.QXP 3/13/2015 4:19 PM Page 263
Driving your vehicle
5
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
• Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Illuminated engine start/stop button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Engine start/stop button position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
• Auto stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
• Auto start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
• Condition of ISG system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
• ISG system deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
• ISG system malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
• Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
• Tight corner brake effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
• Four Wheel Drive (4WD) transfer mode selection . 5-29
• For safe four-wheel drive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
• Downhill brake control (DBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
• Emergency stop signal (ESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
• Trailer stability assist (TSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
• To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
• To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
• To decrease the cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
• To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
• To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . . 5-52
• To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 1
• To turn cruise control off, do one of the following . 5-53
Active ECO system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
• Active ECO operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
• When Active ECO is activated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
• Limitation of Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• Snowy or Icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-63
• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze
in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-64
• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Don’t place foreign objects or materials
in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
• towbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
• Safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
• Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
• Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
• Vehicle kerb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
• Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
5
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 2/11/2015 4:19 PM Page 2
53
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust gases are potentially lethal. If at any time engine exhaust gas is detected within the passenger compartment,
move the vehicle to an open area and open all windows.
• Never inhale exhaust gas.
Exhaust gases contain Carbon Monoxide which is colourless and odourless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause
unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
• Exhaust System Maintenance.
Ensure that the exhaust system is maintained in good condition and is free from excessive corrosion and damage which may
result in leakage. If the vehicle is driven over an object which strikes the exhaust system, ensure that the exhaust system is
inspected at the first available opportunity to ensure that no leakage exists.
• Confined Areas.
Do not run the engine in confined spaces, allowing the engine to idle in a garage, even when the doors are open is dangerous
practice. Only start the engine immediately prior to moving the vehicle out of the garage.
• Prolonged Idling.
If it is necessary to allow the vehicle to idle for prolonged periods, ensure that the heating system air intake control is set to the
"Fresh" position, the blower is set to high speed operation and that the vehicle is standing in an open area.
• Load Carrying.
If it is necessary to carry long objects which do not permit the tailgate door to be fully closed, the side windows must remain
closed and the heating air intake control set to the "Fresh" position with the blower running at the highest speed setting.
To ensure correct operation of the heater system, the air intake grilles at the base of the windscreen must not be obstructed by
snow leaves etc.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 3
Driving your vehicle
45
Before entering vehicle
Be sure that all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean.
Check the condition of the tyres.
Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid.
Before starting
Close and lock all doors.
Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
Be sure that all lights work.
Check all gauges.
Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are famil-
iar with your vehicle and its equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is mov-
ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section
3 for more information on their
proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people,
especially children,before putting a
vehicle into “Drive” or “Reverse”.
WARNING
Driving whilst distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control, that
may lead to an accident, severe
personal injury, and death. The dri-
ver’s primary responsibility is in
the safe and legal operation of a
vehicle, and use of any handheld
devices, other equipment, or vehi-
cle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle
or which are not permissible by law
should never be used during oper-
ation of the vehicle.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 4
55
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated ignition switch
(if equipped)
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for your
convenience, provided the ignition switch
is not in the ON position. The light will go
off immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30 sec-
onds when the door is closed.
OXM059001
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgement.
Driving whilst under the influence
of drugs is as dangerous or more
dangerous than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-
er who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
KEY POSITIONS
WARNING
When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. It may overheat the engine
or exhaust system and cause fire.
When you make a sudden stop or
turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the
floor and it could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Keep all things in the vehicle
safely stored.
If you do not focus on driving, it
may cause an accident. Be care-
ful when operating what may dis-
turb driving such as audio or
heater. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always drive safely.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 5
Driving your vehicle
65
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-
trical accessories are operative.
NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key whilst turning the steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the engine
is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
START
Turn the ignition key to the START posi-
tion to start the engine. The engine will
crank until you release the key; then it
returns to the ON position. The brake
warning lamp can be checked in this
position.
WARNING - Ignition key
Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC whilst the vehicle is
moving. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
The anti-theft steering column lock
is not a substitute for the parking
brake. Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in 1
st
gear for the
manual transaxle or P (Park) for
the automatic transaxle, set the
parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sud-
den vehicle movement may occur
if these precautions are not taken.
Never reach for the ignition switch,
or any other controls through the
steering wheel whilst the vehicle is
in motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area could
cause a loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily injury
or death.
Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move whilst driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an acci-
dent.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 6
57
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
NOTICE - Full throttle resistor
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with a resis-
tor in the accelerator pedal, it prevents
you from driving at full throttle unin-
tentionally by making the driver require
increased effort to depress the accelera-
tor pedal. However, if you depress the
pedal more than approximately 80%,
the vehicle can be at full throttle and the
accelerator pedal will be easier to
depress. This is not a malfunction but a
normal condition.
Starting the petrol engine
(if equipped)
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
whilst turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
It should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
4. Do not wait for the engine to warm up
whilst the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and decel-
erating should be avoided.)
CAUTION
If the engine stalls whilst you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position whilst the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION
Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine
stalls or fails to start, wait 5 to 10
seconds before re-engaging the
starter. Improper use of the starter
may damage it.
Do not turn the ignition switch to
the START position with the
engine running. It may damage
the starter.
WARNING
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with
your ability to use the brake and
accelerator pedal, and the clutch
(if equipped).
Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed. The
vehicle can move and lead to an
accident.
Wait until the engine rpm is nor-
mal. The vehicle may suddenly
move if the brake padel is
released when the rpm is high.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 7
Driving your vehicle
85
Starting the diesel engine
(if equipped)
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated
before starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
whilst turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P(park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N(neutral) position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion to pre-heat the engine. Then the
glow indicator light will illuminate.
4. If the glow indicator light goes out, turn
the ignition switch to the START posi-
tion and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
NOTICE
If the engine were not started within 10
seconds after the preheating is complet-
ed, turn the ignition key once more to
the LOCK position during 10 seconds,
and then to the ON position, in order to
preheat again.
Starting and stopping the engine for tur-
bocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the engine
immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrication is
ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving,
requiring a heavy engine load, idle the
engine about 1 minute before turning it
off.
This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting the
engine off.
W-60
Glow indicator light
CAUTION
Do not turn the engine off immedi-
ately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or tur-
bocharger unit.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 8
59
Driving your vehicle
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated engine start/stop but-
ton
Whenever the front door is opened, the
engine start/stop button will illuminate for
your convenience. The light will go off
after about 30 seconds when the door is
closed. It will also go off immediately
when the theft-alarm system is armed.
Engine start/stop button position
OFF
• With manual transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-
tion) or vehicle power (ON position), stop
the vehicle then press the engine
start/stop button.
• With automatic transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-
tion) or vehicle power (ON position),
press the engine start/stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
When you press the engine start/stop
button without the shift lever in the P
(Park) position, the engine start/stop but-
ton will not change to the OFF position
but to the ACC position.
Also, the steering wheel locks when the
engine start/stop button is in the OFF
position to protect you against theft. It
locks when the door is opened.
If the steering wheel is not locked prop-
erly when you open the driver's door, the
warning chime will sound. Try locking the
steering wheel again. If the problem is
not solved, we recommend, that the sys-
tem be checked by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
In addition, if the engine start/stop button
is in the OFF position after the driver's
door is opened, the steering wheel will
not lock and the warning chime will
sound. In such a situation, close the door.
Then the steering wheel will lock and the
warning chime will stop.
NOTICE
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock
properly, the engine start/stop button
will not work. Press the engine
start/stop button whilst turning the
steering wheel right and left to release
the tension.
OLM059005R
Not illuminated
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 9
Driving your vehicle
105
ACC(Accessory)
• With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
• With automatic transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button whilst
it is in the OFF position without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks and electri-
cal accessories are operational.
If the engine start/stop button is in the
ACC position for more than 1 hour, the
button is turned off automatically to pre-
vent battery discharge.
ON
• With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the ACC position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
• With automatic transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button whilst
it is in the ACC position without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not leave
the engine start/stop button in the ON
position for a long time. The battery may
discharge, because the engine is not
running.
Orange indicator
Blue indicator
CAUTION
You are able to turn off the engine
(START/RUN) or vehicle power (ON),
only when the vehicle is not in
motion. In an emergency situation
whilst the vehicle is in motion,you are
able to turn the engine off and to the
ACC position by pressing the engine
start/stop button for more than 2 sec-
onds or 3 times successively within 3
seconds. If the vehicle is still moving,
you can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by press-
ing the engine start/stop button with
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-
tion.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 10
511
Driving your vehicle
START/RUN
• With manual transaxle
To start the engine, depress the clutch
pedal and brake pedal, then press the
engine start/stop button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.
• With automatic transaxle
To start the engine, depress the brake
pedal and press the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the P (Park)
or the N (Neutral) position. For your safe-
ty, start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
NOTICE
If you press the engine start/stop button
without depressing the clutch pedal for
manual transaxle vehicles or without
depressing the brake pedal for automat-
ic transaxle vehicles, the engine will not
start and the engine start/stop button
changes as follow:
OFF
ACC
ON
OFF or ACC
NOTICE
If you leave the engine start/stop button
in the ACC or ON position for a long
time, the battery will discharge.
WARNING
Never press the engine start/stop
button whilst the vehicle is in
motion. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving the
driver's seat, always make sure
the shift lever is engaged in P
(Park), set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not taken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Never reach for the engine start/
stop button or any other controls
through the steering wheel whilst
the vehicle is in motion.The pres-
ence of your hand or arm in the
area could cause loss of vehicle
control, an accident and serious
bodily injury or death.
Do not place any movable objects
around the driver's seat as they
may move whilst driving, inter-
fere with the driver and lead to an
accident.
Not illuminated
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 11
Driving your vehicle
125
Starting the engine
Starting the petrol engine
(if equipped)
1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside
the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
3. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
whilst starting the engine.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Press the engine start/stop button.
It should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
5. Do not wait for the engine to warm up
whilst the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and decel-
erating should be avoided.)
Starting the diesel engine
(if equipped)
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated
before starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
whilst pressing the engine start/stop
button to the START position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
WARNING
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with
your ability to use the brake and
accelerator pedal.
Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed. The
vehicle can move and lead to an
accident.
Wait until the engine rpm is nor-
mal. The vehicle may suddenly
move if the brake padel is
released when the rpm is high.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 12
513
Driving your vehicle
3. Press the engine start/stop button
whilst depressing the brake pedal.
4. Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the illuminated glow indicator
goes off. (approximately 5 seconds)
5. The engine starts running when the
glow indicator goes off.
NOTICE
If the engine start/stop button is pressed
once more whilst the engine is pre-heat-
ing, the engine may start.
Starting and stopping the engine for tur-
bocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the engine
immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrication is
ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving,
requiring a heavy engine load, idle the
engine about 1 minute before turning it
off.
This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting the
engine off.
Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,
if it is far away from you, the engine
may not start.
When the engine start/stop button is in
the ACC position or above, if any door
is opened, the system checks for the
smart key. If the smart key is not in the
vehicle, the " " indicator and the
“KEY OUT” indicator will blink. And if
all doors are closed, the chime will
sound for 5 seconds. The indicator or
warning will turn off whilst the vehicle is
moving. Always have the smart key
with you.
WARNING
The engine will start, only when the
smart key is in the vehicle.
Never allow children or any person
who is unfamiliar with the vehicle
touch the engine start/stop button
or related parts.
CAUTION
Do not turn the engine off immedi-
ately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or tur-
bocharger unit.
W-60
Glow indicator light
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 13
Driving your vehicle
145
NOTICE
If the battery is weak or the smart key
does not work correctly, you can start
the engine by pressing the engine
start/stop button with the smart key.
When the brake switch fuse is blown,
you cannot start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If not
possible, you can start the engine by
pressing the engine start/stop button
for 10 seconds whilst it is in the ACC
position. The engine can start without
depressing the brake pedal. But for
your safety always depress the brake
pedal before starting the engine.
CAUTION
Do not press the engine
start/stop button for more than 10
seconds except when the stop
lamp fuse is blown.
Do not turn the ignition switch to
the START position with the
engine running. It may damage
the starter.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls whilst the vehi-
cle is in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position. If the traffic and road con-
ditions permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
whilst the vehicle is still moving
and press the engine start/stop but-
ton in an attempt to restart the
engine.
OEL053007R
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 14
515
Driving your vehicle
ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ISG system, which reduces fuel con-
sumption by automatically shutting down
the engine, when the vehicle is at a
standstill. (For example : red light, stop
sign and traffic jam)
The engine starts automatically as soon
as the starting conditions are met.
The ISG system is ON whenever the
engine is running.
NOTICE
When the engine automatically starts by
the ISG system, some warning lights
(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking
brake warning light) may turn on for a
few seconds.
This happens because of low battery
voltage. It does not mean the system is
malfunctioning.
Auto stop
To stop the engine in idle stop mode
1. Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than 5 km/h.
2. Shift into N (Neutral) position.
3. Release the clutch pedal.
The engine will stop and the green AUTO
STOP indicator ( ) on the instrument
cluster will illuminate. If your vehicle is
equipped with a supervision cluster, the
notice will illuminate on the LCD display.
OEL053150
OLM053208N
Type A
Type B
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 15
Driving your vehicle
165
NOTICE
You must reach a speed of at least 10
km/h since last idle stop.
• If you unfasten the seat belt or open
the driver’s door (engine bonnet) in
auto stop mode, the light on the ISG
OFF button will illuminate and ISG
system is deactivated. If your vehicle
is equipped with a supervision cluster,
the notice will illuminate on the LCD
display.
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine manually.
Auto start
To restart the engine from idle stop
mode
Press the clutch pedal when the shift
lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
The engine will start and the green AUTO
STOP indicator ( ) on the instrument
cluster will go out.
The engine will also restart automati-
cally without the driver’s any actions
if the following occurs:
- The fan speed of manual climate con-
trol system is set above the 3rd position
when the air conditioning is on.
- The fan speed of automatic climate
control system is set above the 6th
position when the air conditioning is on.
- When a certain amount of time has
passed with the climate control system
on.
- When the defroster is on.
- The brake vaccum pressure is low.
- The battery charging status is low.
- The vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h.
The green AUTO STOP indicator ( )
on the instrument cluster will blink for 5
seconds and the notice will illuminate on
the LCD display (if equipped).
OLM053202N
OEL053152
OEL053153
Type A
Type B
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 16
517
Driving your vehicle
Condition of ISG system opera-
tion
The ISG system will operate under
the following condition:
- The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
- The driver’s door and bonnet are closed.
- The brake vaccum pressure is ade-
quate.
- The battery is sufficiently charged.
- The outside temperature is between
2°C to 35°C.
- The engine coolant temperature is not
too low.
NOTICE
If the ISG system does not meet that
operation condition, the ISG system is
deactivated. The light on the ISG OFF
button will illuminate and the notice
will illuminate on the LCD display (if
equipped).
If the light or notice is come on con-
tinuously, please check the operation
condition.
ISG system deactivation
If you desire to deactivate the ISG sys-
tem, press the ISG OFF button. The
light on the ISG OFF button will illumi-
nate and the notice will illuminate on
the LCD display (if equipped).
If you press the ISG OFF button again,
the system will be activated and the
light on the ISG OFF button will turn off.
OLM053201N
OEL053100R
OEL053101R
Type B
Type A
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 17
Driving your vehicle
185
ISG system malfunction
The system may not operate when:
- The ISG related sensors or system
error occurs.
The yellow AUTO STOP indicator ( )
on the instrument cluster will stay on
after blinking for 5 seconds and the light
on the ISG OFF button will illuminate.
NOTICE
• If the ISG OFF button light is not
turned off by pressing the ISG OFF
button again or if the ISG system con-
tinuously does not work correctly, we
recommend that you contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
When the ISG OFF button light comes
on, it may stop illuminating after driv-
ing your vehicle at approximately 80
km/h for a maximum of two hours
and setting the fan speed control knob
below the 2nd position. If the ISG
OFF button light continues to be illu-
minated in spite of the procedure, we
recommend that you contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
WARNING
When the engine is in Idle Stop
mode, it's possible to restart the
engine without the driver taking
any action.
Before leaving the car or doing any-
thing in the engine room area, stop
the engine by turning the ignition
switch to the LOCK(OFF) position
or removing the ignition key.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 18
519
Driving your vehicle
Manual transaxle operation
The manual transaxle has 6 forward
gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift
knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized
in all forward gears so shifting to either a
higher or a lower gear is easily accom-
plished.
Press the clutch pedal down fully whilst
shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an igni-
tion lock switch, the engine will not start
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal. (if equipped)
The gearshift lever must be returned to
the neutral position before shifting into R
(Reverse). The ring located immediately
below the shift knob must be pulled
upward whilst moving the shift lever to
the R position. (Type A)
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant has
warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse),
put the shift lever in N (Neutral) posi-
tion and release the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down, and then shift
into 1st or R (Reverse) gear position.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
When downshifting from fifth
gear to fourth gear, caution
should be taken not to inadver-
tently press the gear shift lever
sideways in such a manner that
second gear is engaged. Such a
drastic downshift may cause the
engine speed to increase to the
point that the tachometer will
enter the red-zone. Such over-
revving of the engine may possi-
bly cause engine damage.
Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear when
the engine is running at high
speed (5,000 RPM or higher).
Such a downshifting may damage
the engine, clutch and the
transaxle.
OEL059009
The ring (1) must be pulled up whilst
moving the shift lever.
The shift lever can be moved without
pulling the ring (1).
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 19
Driving your vehicle
205
Using the clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the way
to the floor before shifting, then released
slowly.The clutch pedal should always be
fully released whilst driving. Do not rest
your foot on the clutch pedal whilst driv-
ing. This can cause unnecessary wear.
Do not partially engage the clutch to hold
the vehicle on an incline. This causes
unnecessary wear. Use the foot brake or
parking brake to hold the vehicle on an
incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal
rapidly and repeatedly.
CAUTION
To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch
to hold the vehicle stopped on an
uphill grade, whilst waiting for a
traffic light, etc.
Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
When operating the clutch pedal,
press the clutch pedal down fully.
If you don¡¯t press the clutch
pedal fully, the clutch may be
damaged or noise may occur.
• To prevent possible damage to
the clutch system, do not start
with the 2nd (second) gear
engaged except when you start
on a alippery road.
WARNING
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then
make sure the transaxle is shifted
into 1st gear when the vehicle is
parked on a level or uphill grade,
and shifted into R (Reverse) on a
downhill grade. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are not
followed in the order identified.
If your vehicle has a manual
transaxle not equipped with a
ignition lock switch, it may move
and cause a serious accident
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal
whilst the parking brake is
released and the shift lever not in
the N(Neutral) position.
Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slippery
roads.The vehicle may slip caus-
ing an accident.
CAUTION
When operating the clutch pedal,
press the clutch pedal down fully. If
you don’t press the clutch pedal
fully, the clutch may be damaged or
noise may occur.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 20
521
Driving your vehicle
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traf-
fic or whilst driving up steep hills, down-
shift before the engine starts to labour.
Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives better acceleration
when you again need to increase your
speed. When the vehicle is travelling
down steep hills, downshifting helps
maintain safe speed and prolongs brake
life.
Good driving practices
Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This is extremely
hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in
gear.
Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction.
Instead, when you are driving down a
long hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. When you do this, engine braking
will help slow down the vehicle.
Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
Slow down when you encounter cross
winds.This gives you much better con-
trol of your vehicle.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
reverse. The transaxle can be dam-
aged if you do not.To shift into reverse,
depress the clutch, move the shift lever
to neutral, wait three seconds, then
shift to the reverse position.
Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING
Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to re-enter the roadway.
In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:08 PM Page 21
Driving your vehicle
225
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
OEL059010R
The shift lever can be moved freely.
Depress the brake pedal when shifting, if your vehicle is equipped shift lock system.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 22
523
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transaxle operation
The highly efficient automatic transaxle
has 6 forward speeds and one reverse
speed. The individual speeds are select-
ed automatically, depending on the posi-
tion of the shift lever.
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transaxle Control
Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator lights in the instrument
cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order iden-
tified.
Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slippery
roads.The vehicle may slip caus-
ing an accident.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.
When stopped on an upgrade, do
not hold the vehicle stationary
with engine power. Use the serv-
ice brake or the parking brake.
Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 23
Driving your vehicle
245
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving posi-
tion. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into D (Drive).
WARNING
Shifting into P (Park) whilst the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged if
you shift into P (Park) whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) whilst the vehicle is in
motion, except as explained in
“Rocking the vehicle”, in this manu-
al.
WARNING
Do not drive with the shift lever in N
(Neutral).
The engine brake will not work and
lead to an accident.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 24
525
Driving your vehicle
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by push-
ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-
tion into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a
manual transaxle, the sports mode
allows gearshifts with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
NOTICE
In sports mode, the driver must exe-
cute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is oper-
ated.
When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving on
a slippery road. Push the shift lever to
the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st
gear.
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the
brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
OEL059012R
Spor
Spor
ts
ts
mode
mode
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and whilst shifting out
of the P (Park) position into anoth-
er position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the
vehicle.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 25
Driving your vehicle
265
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
Type A
1. Press the shift-lock release button.
2. Move the shift lever.
3. We recommend that the system be
inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Type B
1. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering
the shift-lock override access hole.
2. Insert a screwdriver into the access
hole and press down on the screwdriv-
er.
3. Move the shift lever.
4. We recommend that the system be
inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position. Even the ignition switch is in
LOCK position, the key cannot be
removed.
OEL059011R
OEL053013R
Type A
Type B
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 26
527
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-
tion with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
Never move the shift lever into "P"
when the vehicle is in motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
vehicle in gear when moving.
Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow down the vehicle.
Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually whilst releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on a
steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-
dency to roll backwards. Shifting the
shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will
help prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards.
WARNING
Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 27
Driving your vehicle
285
Engine power can be delivered to all front
and rear wheels for maximum traction.
4WD is useful when extra traction is
required on road, such as, when driving
on slippery, muddy, wet, or snow-covered
roads. These vehicles are not designed
for challenging off-road use. Occasional
off-road use such as established
unpaved roads and trails are OK. It is
always important when travelling off-
highway that the driver carefully reduces
the speed to a level that does not exceed
the safe operating speed for those condi-
tions. In general, off-road conditions pro-
vide less traction and braking effective-
ness than normal road conditions. The
driver must be especially alert to avoid
driving on slopes which tilt the vehicle to
either side.
These factors must be carefully consid-
ered when driving off-road. Keeping the
vehicle in contact with the driving surface
and under control in these conditions is
always the driver's responsibility for the
safety of him/herself and his or her pas-
sengers.
Tight corner brake effect
Tight corner brake effect is a unique
characteristic of four-wheel drive vehicles
caused by the difference in tyre rotation
at the four wheels and the zero-degree
alignment of the front wheels and sus-
pension.
Sharp turns at low speeds should be car-
ried out with caution.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Off road driving
This vehicle is designed primarily
for on road use although it can oper-
ate effectively off road. However, it
was not designed to drive in chal-
lenging off-road conditions. Driving
in conditions that exceed the vehi-
cle's intended design or the driver's
experience level may result in
severe injury or death.
CAUTION - 4WD
When turning sharply on a paved
road at low speed whilst in four-
wheel drive, steering control will be
difficult.
WARNING
If the 4WD system warning light
( ) illuminates, this indicates that
there is a malfunction in the 4WD
system.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be checked by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 28
529
Driving your vehicle
This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades,
off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc., to
maximize traction.
• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speeds
above 19 mph (30 km/h) and is shifted to 4WD AUTO mode
at speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). If the vehicle decelerates
to speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), however, the transfer
mode is shifted into 4WD LOCK mode again.
4WD AUTO
(4WD LOCK is
deactivated)
(Indicator light is
not illuminated)
NOTICE
When driving on normal roads, deactivate the 4WD LOCK mode by pushing the 4WD LOCK button (the indicator light goes
off). Driving on normal roads with 4WD LOCK mode(especially, when cornering) may cause mechanical noise or vibration.
The noise and vibration will disappear when the 4WD LOCK mode is deactivated. Some parts of the power train may be dam-
aged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration.
When the 4WD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the front wheels.
This shock is not a mechanical failure.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) transfer mode selection
Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description
When driving in 4WD AUTO mode, the vehicle operates sim-
ilar to conventional 2WD vehicles under normal operating
conditions. However, if the system determines that there is a
need for the 4WD mode, the engine’s driving power is dis-
tributed to all four wheels automatically without driver inter-
vention.
When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehicle
moves similar to conventional 2WD vehicles.
4WD LOCK
(Indicator light is
illuminated)
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 29
Driving your vehicle
305
For safe four-wheel drive opera-
tion
Do not drive in deep standing water or
mud conditions since such conditions
can damage your engine and/or
restrict your exhaust pipes. Do not
drive down steep hills since it requires
extreme skill to maintain control of the
vehicle.
When you are driving up or down hills
drive as straight as possible. Use
extreme caution in going up or down
steep hills, since you may flip your
vehicle over depending on the grade,
terrain and water/mud conditions.
WARNING - Four-wheel
driving
The conditions of on-road or off-
road that demand four-wheel drive
mean all functions of your vehicle
are exposed to extreme stress than
under normal road conditions. Slow
down and be ready for changes in
the composition and traction of the
surface under your tyres. If you
have any doubt about the safety of
the conditions you are facing, stop
and consider the best way to pro-
ceed. Do not exceed the ability of
yourself or your vehicle to operate
safely.
WARNING - Hills
Driving across the contour of steep
hills can be extremely dangerous.
This danger can come from slight
changes in the wheel angle which
can destabilize the vehicle or, even
if the vehicle is maintaining stabili-
ty under power, it can lose that sta-
bility if the vehicle stops its forward
motion. Your vehicle may roll over
without warning and without time
for you to correct a mistake that
could cause serious injury or
death.
HILL1 HILL2
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 30
531
Driving your vehicle
You must consciously take the effort to
learn how to corner in a 4WD vehicle.
Do not rely on your experience in con-
ventional 2WD vehicles in choosing
safe cornering speed in 4WD mode.
For drivers with little or no experience
of driving a 4WD, you must drive more
slowly in 4WD.
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are
going to drive before you begin driving.
Always hold the steering wheel firmly
when you are driving off-road.
Make sure all passengers are wearing
seat belts.
If you need to drive in the water, stop
your vehicle, set your transfer to the
4WD LOCK mode and drive at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Do not grab the inside of the steer-
ing wheel when you are driving off-
road. You may hurt your arm by a
sudden steering manoeuvre or
from steering wheel rebound due to
impact with objects on the ground.
You could lose control of the steer-
ing wheel.
WARNING - Wind danger
If you are driving in heavy wind, the
vehicle's higher centre of gravity
decreases your steering control
capacity and requires you to drive
more slowly.
WARNING - Driving
through water
Drive slowly. If you are driving too
fast in water, the water can get into
the engine compartment and wet
the ignition system, causing your
vehicle to suddenly stop. If this
happens and your vehicle is in a
tilted position, your vehicle may roll
over.
OLM059022L
WARNING -
4WD
Reduce speed when you turn cor-
ners. The centre of gravity of 4WD
vehicles is higher than that of con-
ventional 2WD vehicles, making
them more likely to roll over when
you turn corners too fast.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 31
Driving your vehicle
325
NOTICE
Do not drive in water if the level is
higher than the floor of the vehicle.
Check your brake condition once you
are out of mud or water. Press the
brake pedal several times as you move
slowly until you feel normal braking
forces return.
Shorten your scheduled maintenance
interval if you drive in off-road condi-
tions such as sand, mud or water.
Always wash your vehicle thoroughly
after off road use, especially cleaning
the bottom of the vehicle.
Since the driving torque is always
applied to the 4 wheels the perform-
ance of the 4WD vehicle is greatly
affected by the condition of the tyres.
Be sure to equip the vehicle with four
tyres of the same size and type.
A full time four wheel drive vehicle
cannot be towed by an ordinary tow
truck. Make sure that the vehicle is
placed on a flat bed truck for moving.
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is
defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle (SUV).
SUV’s have higher ground clearance and
a narrower track to make them capable
of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteris-
tics give them a higher centre of gravity
than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of
the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, which allows you to
anticipate problems. They are not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional passenger vehi-
cles, any more than low-slung sports
vehicles are designed to perform satis-
factorily in off-road conditions. Due to this
risk, driver and passengers are strongly
recommended to buckle their seat belts.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. There are steps that a driver
can make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt manoeuvres, do not load your
roof rack with heavy cargo, and never
modify your vehicle in any way.
CAUTION - Mud or snow
If one of the front or rear wheels
begins to spin in mud, snow, etc.
the vehicle can sometimes be driv-
en out by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal further; however avoid
running the engine continuously at
high rpm because doing so could
damage the 4WD system.
WARNING - 4WD driving
Avoid high cornering speed.
Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at high speed.
In a collision, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die
compared to a person wearing a
seat belt.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over
steers to re-enter the roadway. In
the event your vehicle leaves the
roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 32
533
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Jacked vehicle
Whilst the full-time 4WD vehicle is
being raised on a jack, never start
the engine or cause the tyres to
rotate.
There is the danger that rotating
tyres touching the ground could
cause the vehicle to go off the jack
and to jump forward.
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with tyres
designed to provide safe ride and
handling capability. Do not use a
size and type of tyre and wheel that
is different from the one that is
originally installed on your vehicle.
It can affect the safety and perform-
ance of your vehicle, which could
lead to steering failure or rollover
and serious injury. When replacing
the tyres, be sure to equip all four
tyres with the tyre and wheel of the
same size, type, tread, brand and
load-carrying capacity. If you never-
theless decide to equip your vehi-
cle with any tyre/wheel combina-
tion not recommended by
HYUNDAI for off road driving, we
recommend that you do not use
these tyres for highway driving.
WARNING - Rollover
As with other Sports Utility Vehicle
(SUV), failure to operate this vehi-
cle correctly may result in loss of
control, an accident or vehicle
rollover.
Utility vehicles have a significant-
ly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
Specific design characteristics
(higher ground clearance, nar-
rower track, etc.) give this vehicle
a higher centre of gravity than
ordinary vehicles.
A SUV is not designed for corner-
ing at the same speeds as con-
ventional vehicles.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
manoeuvres.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more like-
ly to die than a person wearing a
seat belt. Make sure everyone in
the vehicle is properly buckled
up.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 33
Driving your vehicle
345
Full-time 4WD vehicles must be tested
on a special four wheel chassis
dynamometer.
NOTICE
Never engage the parking brake whilst
performing these tests.
A full-time 4WD vehicle should not be
tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a 2WD
roll tester must be used, perform the
following:
1. Check the tyre pressures recommend-
ed for your vehicle.
2. Place the front wheels on the roll
tester for a speedometer test as shown
in the illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Place the rear wheels on the tempo-
rary free roller as shown in the illustra-
tion.
WARNING - Dynamometer
testing
Keep away from the front of the
vehicle whilst the vehicle is in gear
on the dynamometer. This is very
dangerous as the vehicle can jump
forward and cause serious injury or
death.
OCM051044L
Roll tester (speedometer)
Temporary free roller
CAUTION
When lifting up the vehicle, do not
operate front and rear wheel sep-
arately. All four wheels should be
operated.
If you need to operate the front
wheel and rear wheel when lifting
up the vehicle, you should
release the parking brake.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 34
535
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you nor-
mally would.The stopping distance, how-
ever, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when neces-
sary to maintain steering control on slip-
pery surfaces.
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate whilst the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
(Continued)
When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and
avoid continuous application of
the brakes. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking per-
formance.
Wet brakes may impair the vehi-
cle’s ability to sefely slow down;
the vehicle may also pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
whilst maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
Always, confirm the position of
the brake and accelerator pedal
before driving. If you don't check
the position of the accelerator
and brake pedal before driving,
you may depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It may
cause a serious accident.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake whilst
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
WARNING - Brakes
Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake tem-
peratures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 35
Driving your vehicle
365
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a high-
pitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes.You may hear this
sound come and go or it may occur
whenever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving con-
ditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then pull up the park-
ing brake lever as far as possible.
In addition it is recommended that when
parking the vehicle on a gradient, the
shift lever should be in a low gear on
manual transaxle vehicles or in the Park
position on automatic transaxle vehicles.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull up the parking
brake lever slightly. Secondly depress the
release button (1) and lower the parking
brake lever (2) whilst holding the button.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking
performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION
To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
OLM059016/H
OLM059017R
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 36
537
Driving your vehicle
If the parking brake does not release or
does not release all the way, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will be illuminated
when the parking brake is applied with
the ignition switch in the START or ON
position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released whilst
engine is running, there may be a mal-
function in the brake system. Immediate
attention is necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-
cle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution whilst operating the
vehicle and only continue to drive the
vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-
tion or repair shop.
CAUTION
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.
Do not operate the parking brake
whilst the vehicle is moving
except in an emergency situation.
It could damage the vehicle sys-
tem and make endanger driving
safety.
WARNING
To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the
gearshift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake AND make sure the
gearshift lever is securely posi-
tioned in 1st (First) gear or R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle
equipped vehicles and in P (Park)
for automatic transaxle equipped
vehicles.
Never allow anyone who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
WK-23_TF
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 37
Driving your vehicle
385
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-
lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situa-
tion, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situa-
tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-
trol the force being delivered to the
brakes.
WARNING
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or danger-
ous driving manoeuvres. Even
though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle
speeds should always be reduced
during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for vehicle
equipped with an anti-lock braking
system (Electronic Stability Control
System) may be longer than for
those without it in the following
road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced
speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
With tyre chains installed.
On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
(Continued)
(Continued)
The safety features of an ABS (or
ESC) equipped vehicle should not
be tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 38
539
Driving your vehicle
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from exces-
sive speeds.
On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping dis-
tance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
CAUTION
If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, howev-
er, your regular brakes will work
normally.
The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. We rec-
ommend that you contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
CAUTION
When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operate your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your
vehicle over to a safe place and
stop the engine.
Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with the ABS.We recommend
that you contact a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
W-78
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 39
Driving your vehicle
405
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
Do not pump your brakes!
Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 40
541
Driving your vehicle
Electronic stability control (ESC)
(if equipped)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is designed to stabilize the vehi-
cle during cornering manoeuvres. ESC
checks where you are steering and
where the vehicle is actually going. ESC
applies the brakes at individual wheels
and intervenes in the engine manage-
ment system to stabilize the vehicle.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a sub-
stitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in prevent-
ing a loss of control. It is still your respon-
sibility to drive and corner at reasonable
speeds and to leave a sufficient margin
of safety.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESC is active.
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Electronic Stability
Control System is functioning properly.
WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cor-
nering. Electronic stability control
(ESC) will not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
manoeuvres and hydroplaning on
wet surfaces can still result in seri-
ous accidents. Only a safe and
attentive driver can prevent acci-
dents by avoiding manoeuvres that
cause the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESC installed, always fol-
low all the normal precautions for
driving - including driving at safe
speeds for the conditions.
OLM059020R
OLM059037R
Type A
Type B
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 41
Driving your vehicle
425
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-
cator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
Press the ESC OFF button
for at least half a second after
turning the ignition ON to turn
ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator
will illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC OFF
button (ESC OFF indicator
light will go off).
When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESC per-
forming an automatic system
self-check and does not indi-
cate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation,
ESC indicator light blinks.
When the Electronic Stability
Control is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm (revo-
lutions per minute) to
increase.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC off
states.
If the engine stops when ESC
is off, ESC remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the ESC
will automatically turn on
again.
ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF ) shortly (ESC
OFF indicator light (ESC OFF
) illuminates). At this state,
the engine control function
does not operate. It means the
traction control function does
not operate.Brake control func-
tion only operates.
-
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 42
543
Driving your vehicle
ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF ) for more than
3 seconds. ESC OFF indica-
tor light (ESC OFF ) illumi-
nates and ESC OFF warning
chime will sound. At this
state, the engine control
function and brake control
function do not operate. It
means the car stability con-
trol function does not operate
any more.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, then goes off if
the ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating or illuminates when
ESC fails to operate.
ESC OFF indicator light comes on when
the ESC is turned off with the button.
ESC indicator light
ESC OFF indicator light
CAUTION
Driving with varying tyre or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tyres,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tyres.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Control sys-
tem is only a driving aid; use pre-
cautions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy
roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESC indicator light is blinking, or
when the road surface is slippery.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 43
Driving your vehicle
445
When driving
ESC should be turned on for daily driv-
ing whenever possible.
To turn ESC off whilst driving, press
the ESC OFF button whilst driving on a
flat road surface.
NOTICE
When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is
turned off (ESC OFF light illuminat-
ed). If the ESC is left on, it may pre-
vent the vehicle speed from increas-
ing, and result in false diagnosis.
Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
Vehicle stability management
(VSM) (if equipped)
This system provides further enhance-
ments to vehicle stability and steering
responses when a vehicle is driving on a
slippery road or a vehicle detected
changes in coefficient of friction between
right wheels and left wheels when brak-
ing.
VSM operation
When the vehicle stability management
is operating properly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indicates noth-
ing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
Driving rearward
ESC OFF indicator light ( ) remains
on the instrument cluster
ESC indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to turn
off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and
the ESC OFF indicator light ( ) illumi-
nates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes
out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if you
don’t cancel the VSM operation by press-
ing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that
a malfunction has been detected some-
where in the Electric Power Steering sys-
tem or VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light ( ) or EPS warning light remains
on, we recommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
NOTICE
The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
on curves.
The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 12 mph (20
km/h) when a vehicle is braking on a
split-mu road. The split-mu road is
made of surfaces which have different
friction forces.
WARNING
Never press the ESC OFF button
whilst ESC is operating (ESC indi-
cator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off whilst ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip out
of control.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 44
545
Driving your vehicle
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
(if equipped)
A vehicle has the tendency to slip back
on a steep hill when it starts to go after
stopping. The Hill-start Assist Control
(HAC) prevents the vehicle from slipping
back by operating the brakes automati-
cally for about 2 seconds.The brakes are
released when the accelerator pedal is
depressed or after about 2 seconds.
NOTICE
The HAC does not operate when the
transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position.
The HAC activates even though the
ESC is off but it does not activate
when the ESC has malfunctioned.
WARNING
The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices but a sup-
plementary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Always hold the steering wheel
firmly whilst driving.
Your vehicle is designed to acti-
vate according to the driver’s
intention, even with installed
VSM. Always follow all the normal
precautions for driving at safe
speeds for the conditions –
including driving inclement
weather and on a slippery road.
Driving with varying tyre or wheel
sizes may cause the VSM system
to malfunction. When replacing
tyres, make sure they are the
same size as your original tyres.
WARNING
The HAC is activated only for about
2 seconds, so when the vehicle is
starting off always depress the
accelerator pedal.
OLM059036R
Type A
Type B
OLM059021R
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 45
Driving your vehicle
465
Downhill brake control (DBC)
(if equipped)
The Downhill Brake Control (DBC) sup-
ports the driver come down a steep hill
without the driver depressing the brake
pedal. It slows down the vehicle under 5
mph (8 km/h) with the automatic
transaxle or 5 mph (8 km/h) with the
manual transaxle and lets the driver con-
centrate on steering the vehicle.
DBC defaults to the OFF position when-
ever the ignition is turned on.
The DBC can be turned on or off by
pushing the button.
Standby
Press the DBC button when the vehicle speed is under
25 mph (40 km/h). The DBC system will turn ON and
enter the standby mode.
The system does not turn ON if the vehicle speed is
over 25 mph (40 km/h).
In the standby mode, if the vehicle speed is under 22
mph (35 km/h) whilst driving down a steep hill, the DBC
will activate automatically.
In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deacti-
vate under the following conditions:
The hill is not steep enough.
The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.
If the above conditions are gone, the DBC will automat-
ically activate again.
The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:
The DBC button is pressed again.
The vehicle speed is over 38 mph (60 km/h).
Activated
Temporarily
deactivated
OFF
Mode Indicator light Description
blinks
illuminated
not
illuminated
illuminated
WARNING
If the DBC red indicator light illuminates, the system has overheated or some-
thing is wrong. The DBC will not activate. If the DBC red indicator light illu-
minates even though the DBC system has been cooled enough, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 46
547
Driving your vehicle
NOTICE
The DBC does not turn ON in the P
(Park) position.
The DBC may not activate if the ESC
(or BAS, if equipped) is activated.
Noise or vibration may occur from the
brakes when the DBC is activated.
The rear stop light comes on when the
DBC is activated.
In a very steep hill even though the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal is
depressed the DBC may not deacti-
vate.
Always turn OFF the DBC on normal
roads. The DBC might activate from
the standby mode when abrupt corn-
ing or driving through speed bumps.
DBC may activate and cause the
engine to stop in vehicles with manual
transaxle if you drive in 3rd gear (or
above) with DBC on. Do not turn on
DBC when driving in 3rd gear (or
above).
ESS : Emergency Stop Signal
The Emergency Stop Signal system
alerts the driver behind by blinking the
stop light when the vehicle suddenly
stops or when the ABS activates in a
stop. (The system activates when the
vehicle speed is over 34 mph (55 km/h)
and the vehicle deceleration is over
7m/s² or the ABS activates when the
vehicle emergency braking.)
When the vehicle speed is under 25 mph
(40 km/h) and the ABS deactivates or the
sudden stop situation is over, the stop
light will not blink. Instead, the hazard
warning flasher will turn on automatically.
The hazard warning flasher will turn off
when the vehicle speed is over 6 mph (10
km/h) after the vehicle has stopped.Also,
it will turn off when the vehicle drives at
low speed for some time. You can turn it
off manually by pushing the hazard warn-
ing flasher switch.
Trailer stability assist (TSA)
(if equipped)
Trailer stability assist is operated as vehi-
cle stability control system. Trailer stabili-
ty assist system has an effort to stabilize
the vehicle and trailer when the trailer
sways or oscillates. There are various
reasons making vehicle sway and oscil-
late. Almost case it happens at high
speed however, if the trailer is affected by
crosswinds, buffeting, and improper over-
loading, it may be a risk of swaying.
Factors of swaying such as:
- High speed
- Strong crosswinds
- Improper overloading
- Sudden controlling of steering wheel
- Uneven road
CAUTION
The Emergency Stop Signal system
will not work if the hazard warning
flasher is already on.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 47
Driving your vehicle
485
Trailer stability assist system continuous-
ly analyzes the vehicle and trailer insta-
bility. When the Trailer stability assist sys-
tem detects some sway, the brakes are
applied automatically to stabilize the
vehicle on the front wheel. However, if it
is not enough to stabilize, the brakes are
applied on all wheels automatically and
engine power is properly reduced. When
the vehicle is stable from swaying, trailer
stability assist system does not operate.
Good braking practices
Check to be sure the parking brake is
not engaged and that the parking
brake indicator light is out before driv-
ing away.
Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle
will not stop as quickly if the brakes are
wet.Wet brakes may cause the vehicle
to pull to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the vehicle
under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and we
recommend that you call a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer for assistance.
Don't coast down hills with the vehicle
out of gear. This is extremely haz-
ardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all
times, use the brakes to slow down,
then shift to a lower gear so that
engine braking will help you maintain a
safe speed.
WARNING
Whenever you leave or park your
vehicle, always set the parking
brake as far as possible and fully
engage the vehicle's transaxle
into the P (Park) position. If the
parking brake is not fully
engaged, the vehicle may move
inadvertently and injure yourself
and others.
All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 48
549
Driving your vehicle
Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal whilst driv-
ing can be dangerous because it can
result in the brakes overheating and
losing their effectiveness. It also
increases the wear of the brake com-
ponents.
If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
vehicle pointed straight ahead whilst
you slow down. When you are moving
slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,
pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your vehi-
cle creep forward. To avoid creeping
forward, keep your foot firmly on the
brake pedal when the vehicle is
stopped.
Be caution when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front wheels
into the kerb to help keep the vehicle
from rolling. If your vehicle is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away from
the kerb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no kerb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep
the vehicle from rolling, block the
wheels.
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged posi-
tion.This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily whilst you put the gear
selector lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.Then
release the parking brake.
Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 49
Driving your vehicle
505
1. Cruise indicator
2. Cruise set indicator
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a con-
stant speed without pressing the acceler-
ator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTICE
During normal cruise control operation,
when the SET switch is activated or
reactivated after applying the brakes,
the cruise control will energize after
approximately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
NOTICE
To activate cruise control, depress the
brake pedal at least once after turning
the ignition switch to the ON position or
starting the engine. This is to check if
the brake switch which is important
part to cancel cruise control is in normal
condition.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated),
the cruise control can be
switched on accidentally. Keep
the cruise control system off
(CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in
use, to avoid inadvertently set-
ting a speed.
Use the cruise control system
only when travelling on open
highways in good weather.
Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep
the vehicle at a constant speed,
for instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-hill
or down-hill roads.
Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control system.
Be careful when driving downhill
using the cruise control system,
which may increase the vehicle
speed.
CAUTION
During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transaxle vehicle, do not
shift into neutral without depress-
ing the clutch pedal, since the
engine will be overrevved. If this
happens, depress the clutch pedal
or release the cruise control ON-
OFF switch.
OEL059030R
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 50
551
Driving your vehicle
To set cruise control speed:
1. Push the Cruise ON-OFF symbol but-
ton on the steering wheel to turn the
system on. The Cruise indicator light
in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).
3. Move the lever (1) down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed. The
SET indicator light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate. Release the
accelerator pedal. The desired speed
will automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly whilst going
downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 1.2 mph (2.0
km/h) or 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
you move the lever up (to RES+) in this
manner.
OEL059031 OEL059033 OEL059032
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 51
Driving your vehicle
525
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the lever at the speed
you want to maintain.
Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1.2 mph (2.0
km/h) or 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
you move the lever down (to SET-) in
this manner.
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator.
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
Press the brake pedal.
Press the clutch pedal with a manual
transaxle.
Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic
transaxle.
Press the CANCEL switch located on
the steering wheel.
Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 9 mph (15
km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
OEL059033 OEL059034
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:09 PM Page 52
553
Driving your vehicle
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the SET indicator light
in the instrument cluster will go off), but it
will not turn the system off. If you wish to
resume cruise control operation, move
up the lever (to RES+) located on your
steering wheel. You will return to your
previously preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h):
If any method other than the cruise
ON/OFF symbol switch was used to can-
cel cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed will
automatically resume when you move
the lever (1) up (to RES+).
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approximately
25 mph (40 km/h).
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
Push the Cruise ON-OFF symbol but-
ton (the Cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise con-
trol operation. If you want to resume
cruise control operation, repeat the steps
provided in “To set cruise control speed”
on the previous page.
OEL059032 OEL059031
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 53
Driving your vehicle
545
Active ECO operation
Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency
by controlling the engine, transaxle and
air conditioner. But fuel-efficiency can be
changed by the driver's driving habits
and road conditions.
When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green) will
illuminate to show that the Active ECO
is operating.
When the Active ECO is activated, it
does not turn off even though the
engine is restarted again. To turn off
the system, press the active ECO but-
ton again.
If Active ECO is turned off, it will return
to the ECO mode.
When Active ECO is activated:
Vehicle noise may become loud.
Vehicle speed may drop.
The air conditioner performance may
decline.
Limitation of Active ECO opera-
tion :
If the following conditions occur whilst
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though there is
no change in the ECO indicator.
When the coolant temperature is low:
The system will be limited until engine
performance becomes normal.
When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because the
engine torque is restricted.
When using sports mode:
The system will be limited according to
the shift location.
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OEL049221R
CAUTION
Vehicle speed is limited to 87 mph
(140 km/h) when Active ECO is
operating. It will not go over the lim-
ited speed.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 54
555
Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
miles (kilometers) you can get from a
gallon (litre) of fuel. To operate your vehi-
cle as economically as possible, use the
following driving suggestions to help
save money in both fuel and repairs:
Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-
ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts
or full-throttle shifts and maintain a
steady cruising speed. Don't race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid
heavy traffic whenever possible.
Always maintain a safe distance from
other vehicles so you can avoid unnec-
essary braking. This also reduces
brake wear.
Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your vehicle
uses. Driving at a moderate speed,
especially on the highway, is one of the
most effective ways to reduce fuel con-
sumption.
Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.
This can increase fuel consumption
and also increase wear on these com-
ponents. In addition, driving with your
foot resting on the brake pedal may
cause the brakes to overheat, which
reduces their effectiveness and may
lead to more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tyres. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tyre
wear. Check the tyre pressures at least
once a month.
Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting kerbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-
ment causes faster tyre wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
Keep your vehicle in good condition.
For better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your vehi-
cle in accordance with the mainte-
nance schedule. If you drive your vehi-
cle in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required.
Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the vehicle. This
extra weight can result in increased
fuel consumption and also contribute
to corrosion.
Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary
weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces
fuel economy.
Don't let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 55
Driving your vehicle
565
Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-
ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
Don't "labour" or "over-rev" the engine.
Labouring is driving too slowly in too
high a gear resulting engine bucking. If
this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit.This can be avoid-
ed by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operat-
ed by engine power so your fuel econ-
omy is reduced when you use it.
Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-
dition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, we recommend that
you contact a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer to perform scheduled inspec-
tions and maintenance
WARNING - Engine off dur-
ing motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine run-
ning. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect. In
addition, turning off the ignition
whilst driving could engage the
steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering which
could cause serious injury or
death.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 56
557
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
tance for braking.
Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light up-
and-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tyre chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around your front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between 1st (First)
and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped
with a manual transaxle or R (Reverse)
and any forward gear in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transaxle.
Do not race the engine, and spin the
wheels as little as possible. If you are still
stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle
pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid
engine overheating and possible dam-
age to the transaxle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, whilst driving on slippery
surfaces can cause an accident.
The sudden change in tyre speed
could cause the tyres to skid. Be
careful when downshifting on slip-
pery surfaces.
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle dam-
age or failure, and tyre damage.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 57
Driving your vehicle
585
NOTICE
The ESC system (if equipped) should be
turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-
ners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tyre wear will be held
to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
Keep your headlights clean and prop-
erly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more diffi-
cult to see at night.
WARNING - Spinning tyres
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 35 mph (56
km/h). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is station-
ary could cause a tyre to overheat
which could result in tyre damage
that may injure bystanders.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
OUN056051/H OCM050200R
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 58
559
Driving your vehicle
Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to read-
just to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving dan-
gerous, especially if you’re not prepared
for the slick pavement. Here are a few
things to consider when driving in the rain:
A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
Keep your windscreen wiping equip-
ment in good shape. Replace your
windscreen wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windscreen.
If your tyres are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tyres are in
good shape.
Turn on your headlights to make it eas-
ier for others to see you.
Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
whilst driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no high-
er than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times whilst the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks of
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are going
to drive before you begin driving.
1VQA3003/H
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 59
Driving your vehicle
605
Dual carrigeway/Motorway driving
Tyres:
Adjust the tyre inflation pressures to
specification. Low tyre inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tyres.
Avoid using worn or damaged tyres
which may result in reduced traction or
tyre failure.
NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tyre infla-
tion pressure shown on the tyres.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine
oil.
Drive belt:
A loose or damaged drive belt may result
in overheating of the engine.
1VQA1004R
WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated
tyres can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tyre failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
Always check the tyres for proper
inflation before driving. For prop-
er tyre pressures, refer to section
8, “Tyres and wheels”.
Driving on tyres with no or insuf-
ficient tread is dangerous. Worn-
out tyres can result in loss of
vehicle control, collisions, injury,
and even death. Worn-out tyres
should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
the tyre tread before driving your
vehicle. For further information
and tread limits, refer to section
7, “Tyres and wheels”.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 60
561
Driving your vehicle
The onset of winter conditions subject
motor vehicles to greater operating
demands. Therefore, the following sug-
gestions will assist in maintaining peak
performance and reliability during these
periods:
Snowy or Icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tyres or to
install tyre chains on your tyres. If snow
tyres are needed, it is necessary to
select tyres equivalent in size and type of
the original equipment tyres. Failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle. Furthermore,
speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden
brake applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-
cations on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-
cient distance between the vehicle in
operation in front and your vehicle. Also,
apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tyre chains on the tyre will
provide a greater driving force, but will
not prevent side skids.
NOTICE
Tyre chains are not legal in all countries.
Check the country laws before fitting
tyre chains.
Snow tyres
If you mount snow tyres on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tyres of the
same size and load range as the original
tyres. Mount snow tyres on all four
wheels to balance your vehicle’s han-
dling in all weather conditions. Keep in
mind that the traction provided by snow
tyres on dry roads may not be as high as
your vehicle's original equipment tyres.
You should drive cautiously even when
the roads are clear. Check with the tyre
dealer for maximum speed recommen-
dations.
Do not install studded tyres without first
checking local, state and municipal regu-
lations for possible restrictions against
their use.
WINTER DRIVING
WARNING - Snow tyre size
Snow tyres should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's stan-
dard tyres. Otherwise, the safety
and handling of your vehicle may
be adversely affected.
1VQA3005
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 61
Driving your vehicle
625
Tyre chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tyres are
thinner, they can be damaged by mount-
ing some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tyres is rec-
ommended instead of snow chains. Do
not mount tyre chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminium wheels; snow
chains may cause damage to the wheels.
If snow chains must be used, use wire-
type chains with a thickness of less than
0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your vehicle
caused by improper snow chain use is
not covered by your vehicle manufactur-
ers warranty.
When using tyre chains, attach them to
the drive wheels as follows.
2WD : Front wheels
4WD : All four wheels
If a full set of chains is not avail-
able for an 4WD vehicle, chains
may be installed on the front
wheels only.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manu-
facturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
CAUTION
Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your
tyres. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufac-
turer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tyre. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S” certified.
Always check chain installation
for proper mounting after driving
approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5
to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting.
Retighten or remount the chains
if they are loose.
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place
a triangular emergency warning
device behind the vehicle if avail-
able. Always place the vehicle in P
(park), apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before installing
snow chains.
1VQA3007
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 62
563
Driving your vehicle
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-
cates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure that
its freezing point is sufficient for the tem-
peratures anticipated during the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the bat-
tery and cables as described in section
7. We recommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 8
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, we rec-
ommend that you consult a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs and replace
them if necessary. Also check all ignition
wiring and components to be sure they
are not cracked, worn or damaged in any
way.
CAUTION
Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
WARNING - Tyre chains
The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)
or the chain manufacturer’s rec-
ommended speed limit, whichev-
er is lower.
Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other
road hazards, which may cause
the vehicle to bounce.
Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 63
Driving your vehicle
645
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the con-
tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer and most auto parts outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types of
anti-freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-
ily whilst you put the shift lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then
release the parking brake.
Do not park a vehicle on a public road
without the parking brake applied.
Don't let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and inter-
fere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the vehicle to be sure the
movement of the front wheels and the
steering components is not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weath-
er, you should carry appropriate emer-
gency equipment. Some of the items you
may want to carry include tyre chains,
tow straps or chains, flashlight, emer-
gency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper
cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Don’t place foreign objects or
materials in the engine compart-
ment
Placement of foreign object or materials
which prevent cooling of the engine, in
the engine compartment, may cause a
failure or combustion. The manufacturer
is not responsible for the damage caused
by such placement.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 64
565
Driving your vehicle
If you are considering towing with your
vehicle, you should first check with your
Local Laws to determine their legal
requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for tow-
ing trailers, cars, or other types of vehi-
cles or apparatus may differ. We recom-
mend that you ask a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
NOTICE - For Europe
The technically permissible maximum
load on the rear axle(s) may be
exceeded by not more than 15 % and
the technically permissible maximum
laden mass of the vehicle may be
exceeded by not more than 10 % or
220.4 lbs (100 kg), whichever value is
lower. In this case, do not exceed 62.1
mph (100 km/h) for vehicle of catego-
ry M1 or 49.7 mph (80 km/h) for vehi-
cle of category N1.
When a vehicle of category M1 is tow-
ing a trailer, the additional load
imposed at the trailer coupling device
may cause the tyre maximum load
ratings to be exceeded, but not by
more than 15 %. In this case, do not
exceed 100 km/h (62.1 mph) and
increase the tyre inflation pressure by
at least 0.2 bar.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify
what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the infor-
mation in “Weight of the trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different than
just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering requires correct equip-
ment, and it has to be used properly.
This section contains many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your
safety and that of your passengers.
Please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and
tyres are forced to work harder against
the load of the added weight.The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads. This
additional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements.
TRAILER TOWING
CAUTION
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in
costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section.
WARNING - Towing a trail-
er
If you don't use the correct equip-
ment and/or drive improperly, you
can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work
well - or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in
this section.
WARNING - Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total
trailer weight, GCW (gross combi-
nation weight), GVW (gross vehicle
weight), GAW (gross axle weight )
and trailer nose weight are all with-
in the limits.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 65
Driving your vehicle
665
Towbars
It's important to have the correct towbar
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few rea-
sons why you’ll need the right towbar.
Here are some rules to follow:
Will you have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle when you install a
trailer towbar? If you do, then be sure
to seal the holes later when you
remove the towbar.
If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and
water.
The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for towbars. Do not attach
rental towbars or other bumper-type
towbars to them. Use only a frame-
mounted towbar that does not attach to
the bumper.
A HYUNDAI accessory trailer towbar is
available at an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
• Left side
• Right side
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 66
567
Driving your vehicle
Safety cables
You should always attach cables
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety cables under the nose
of the trailer so that the nose will not drop
to the road if it becomes separated from
the towbar.
Instructions about safety cables may be
provided by the towbar manufacturer or
by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety cables. Always leave just
enough slack so you can turn with your
trailer. And, never allow safety cables to
drag on the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to local
regulations and that it is properly
installed and operating correctly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the maxi-
mum allowed weight without trailer
brakes, then the trailer will also require its
own brakes as well. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Don’t tap into or modify your vehicle's
brake system.
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting out
for the open road, you must get to know
your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the
feel of handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not
nearly so responsive as your vehicle is
by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer towbar
and platform, safety cables, electrical
connector(s), lights, tyres and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-
ing and then apply the trailer brake con-
troller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electri-
cal connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the load is secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still work-
ing.
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely
certain that you have properly set
up the brake system. This is not a
task for amateurs. Use an experi-
enced, competent trailer shop for
this work.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 67
Driving your vehicle
685
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-
cle ahead as you would when driving
your vehicle without a trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,
because of the increased vehicle length,
you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move the trailer
to the left, just move your hand to the left.
To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide
you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so your
trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, kerbs,
road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden manoeuvres. Signal well
in advance.
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher and
extra wiring. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you
signal a turn or lane change. Properly
connected, the trailer lights will also flash
to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signals
when, in fact, they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trail-
er bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you discon-
nect and then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system
directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.
Use only an approved trailer wiring har-
ness.
A HYUNDAI authorised repairer can
assist you in installing the wiring harness.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 68
569
Driving your vehicle
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer
operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70
km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine
and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the max-
imum trailer weight without trailer brakes
and you have an automatic transaxle,
you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-
ing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when
towing a trailer will minimise heat build up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not over-
heat.
If the needle of the coolant tem-
perature gauge moves across the
dial towards “H” (HOT), pull over
and stop as soon as it is safe to
do so, and allow the engine to idle
until it cools down. You may pro-
ceed once the engine has cooled
sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle
overheating.
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trailer
wiring harness could result in dam-
age to the vehicle electrical system
and/or personal injury.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 69
Driving your vehicle
705
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer attached to
your vehicle, you should not park your
vehicle on a hill. People can be seriously
or fatally injured, and both your vehicle
and the trailer can be damaged if unex-
pectedly roll down hill.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.
Turn the steering wheel in the direction
of the kerb (left if headed down hill,
right if headed up hill).
2. If the vehicle has a manual transaxle,
place the car in neutral. If the vehicle
has an automatic transaxle, place the
car in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off the
vehicle.
4. Place chocks under the trailer wheels
on the down hill side of the wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift
to neutral, release the parking brake
and slowly release the brakes until the
trailer chocks absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the park-
ing brake and shift the vehicle to R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle or P
(Park) for automatic transaxle.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the parking
brake set.
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill with a
trailer attached could cause seri-
ous injury or death, should the trail-
er break loose.
WARNING - Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake is
not firmly set.
If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly.You
or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 70
571
Driving your vehicle
When you are ready to leave after park-
ing on a hill
1. With the manual transaxle in Neutral
or automatic transaxle in P (Park),
apply your brakes and hold the brake
pedal down whilst you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you regularly pull a trailer.
Important items to pay particular atten-
tion to include engine oil, automatic
transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling
system fluid. Brake condition is another
important item to frequently check. Each
item is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review
these sections before you start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer
and towbar. Follow the maintenance
schedule that accompanied your trailer
and check it periodically. Preferably, con-
duct the check at the start of each day’s
driving. Most importantly, all towbar nuts
and bolts should be tight.
CAUTION
Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
in hot days or during uphill driv-
ing. If the coolant gauge indicates
over-heating, switch off the A/C
and stop the vehicle in a safe area
to cool down the engine.
When towing check transaxle
fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with the air conditioner, you
should install a condenser fan to
improve engine performance
when towing a trailer.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 71
Driving your vehicle
725
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if you
decide to pull a trailer:
Consider using a sway control.You can
ask a towbar dealer about sway con-
trol.
Do not do any towing with your car dur-
ing its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in
order to allow the engine to properly
break in. Failure to heed this caution
may result in serious engine or
transaxle damage.
When towing a trailer, we recommend
that you consult a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer on additional require-
ments such as a towing kit, etc.
Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed (less than 60 mph (100 km/h)).
On a long uphill grade, do not exceed
45 mph (70 km/h) or the posted towing
speed limit, whichever is lower.
The chart contains important consider-
ations that have to do with weight:
M/T : Manual transaxle
A/T : Automatic transaxle
Engine
Item
Petrol Engine Diesel Engine
1.6L 2.0L 1.7L 2.0L
M/T M/T A/T M/T M/T A/T
Maximum
trailer weight
Ibs. (kg)
Without brake
System
1653
(750)
1653
(750)
1653
(750)
1653
(750)
1653
(750)
1653
(750)
With brake
System
2646
(1200)
4189
(1900)
3527
(1600)
2646
(1200)
4409
(2000)
3527
(1600)
Maximum permissible static
vertical load on the coupling
device
Ibs. (kg)
110
(50)
176
(80)
176
(80)
110
(50)
176
(80)
176
(80)
Recommended distance
from rear wheel centre to
coupling point
inch (mm)
37.9
(963)
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 72
573
Driving your vehicle
Weight of the trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be? It
should never weigh more than the maxi-
mum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your
trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and how
often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer
are all important. The ideal trailer weight
can also depend on any special equip-
ment that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer nose
The nose weight of any trailer is an
important weight to measure because it
affects the total gross vehicle weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight
includes the kerb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the nose weight to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi-
mum of 10% of the total loaded trailer
weight, within the limits of the maximum
permissible trailer tongue load. After
you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trail-
er and then the tongue, separately, to
see if the weights are proper. If they
aren’t, you may be able to correct them
simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
WARNING - Trailer
Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be loaded
with approximately 60% of the
total trailer load; the rear should
be loaded with approximately
40% of the total trailer load.
Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trail-
er towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in damage to
your vehicle and/or personal
injury. Check weights and loading
at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with
scales.
An improperly loaded trailer can
cause loss of vehicle control.
C190E02JM
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
C190E01JM
Nose Weight Total Trailer Weight
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 73
Driving your vehicle
745
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to
keep your loaded vehicle weight within its
design rating capability, with or without a
trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle
design performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-
lowing terms for determining your vehi-
cle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's specifications
and the compliance label:
Vehicle kerb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
fuel, driver and all standard equipment.
Payload
This is the weight of passengers, lug-
gage and any optional equipment
installed.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
kerb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the compliance label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the maximum allowed weight of
the vehicle, contents, passengers and
optional equipment.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-
tification label located on the driver's (or
front passenger's) door sill.
Overloading
VEHICLE WEIGHT
WARNING - Vehicle weight
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your vehi-
cle are on the certification label
attached to the driver's (or front
passenger’s) door. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an acci-
dent or vehicle damage. You can
calculate the weight of your load by
weighing the items (and people)
before putting them in the vehicle.
Be careful not to overload your
vehicle.
EL(FL) UK 5.QXP 12/16/2014 8:10 PM Page 74
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
In case of an emergency whilst driving . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tyre whilst driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If engine stalls whilst driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(Type A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
• Low tyre pressure telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• TPMS (tyre pressure monitoring system)
malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Changing a tyre with tpms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(Type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• Low tyre pressure telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Low tyre pressure position telltale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• TPMS (tyre pressure monitoring system)
malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
• Changing a tyre with tpms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
If you have a flat tyre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
• Removing and storing the spare tyre . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Changing tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
• EC Declaration of Conformity for Jack . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
If you have a flat tyre (with tyre mobility kit) . . 6-27
• Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
• Notes on the safe use of the tyre mobility kit . . . . . . 6-28
• Components of the tyre mobility kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
• Using the tyre mobility kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
• Distributing the sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
• Removable towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 1
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehi-
cle is stopped near the edge of a road-
way.
Depress the flasher switch with the igni-
tion switch in any position. The flasher
switch is located in the centre console
switch panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher whilst the vehi-
cle is being towed.
OLM049084
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 2
63
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILST DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If your vehicle has a manual transaxle
not equipped with a ignition lock
switch, the vehicle can move forward
by shifting to the 2(second) or 3(third)
gear and then turning the starter with-
out depressing the clutch pedal.
If a puncture occurs whilst driv-
ing the vehicle
1. Bring the car to rest as soon as it is
safe to do so and with the minimum
amount of braking required which will
assist in maintaining the maximum
amount of control. The vehicle should
be parked wherever possible upon firm
level ground to facilitate wheel chang-
ing.
2. If the vehicle is creating a hazard and
the road conditions do not permit the
wheel to be changed safely, assis-
tance should be sought.
3. Passengers must not be allowed to
remain inside the vehicle during wheel
changing. If a puncture occurs whilst
the vehicle is on a motorway, the pas-
sengers should take refuge on the
motorway embankment to avoid the
possibility of injury occurring should
the vehicle be struck by other motor-
way traffic.
4. Wheel changing should be performed
according to the following instructions.
If engine stalls whilst driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, we recommend
that you contact a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 3
What to do in an emergency
46
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine cannot be cranked
1. If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-
gency brake is set.
2. Check the battery terminals and con-
nections to ensure that these are clean
and also tight.
3. If the interior lights dim when the
engine is cranked and the battery ter-
minals have been checked, a dis-
charged battery is indicated.
4. Do not attempt to push or tow start the
vehicle, refer to "Jump Starting" for
information regarding engine starting
when the battery is discharged.
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK/
OFF position, check all connectors at
ignition, coil and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be discon-
nected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-
partment.
4. If the engine still does not start, we
recommend that you call a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
WARNING
If the engine refuses to start, no
attempt should be made to push or
tow start the vehicle. Vehicles with
automatic transaxle or fuel injec-
tion will not be able to be started in
this manner since no drive is trans-
mitted through the automatic
transaxle whilst the engine is not
running, and in the case of fuel
injected derivatives, the fuel pump
will not operate under tow start
conditions. In addition, if the vehi-
cle is equipped with an exhaust cat-
alyst, damage to the catalyst may
result if the vehicle is tow started.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 4
65
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting proce-
dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-
mend that you have a competent techni-
cian or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
If these instructions are not fol-
lowed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehicle
may occur! If you are not sure
how to follow this procedure,
seek qualified assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sul-
furic acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive. When jump
starting, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle.
Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
Do not allow the (+) and (-)
jumper cables to touch. It may
cause sparks.
The battery may rupture or
explode when you jump start with
a low or frozen battery.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
1VQA4001
Discharged battery
Jumper Cables
Booster battery
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 5
What to do in an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-volt
and that its negative terminal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,
do not allow the vehicles to touch.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration. First
connect one end of a jumper cable to
the positive terminal of the discharged
battery (1), then connect the other end
to the positive terminal on the booster
battery (2). Proceed to connect one end
of the other jumper cable to the negative
terminal of the booster battery (3), then
the other end to a solid, stationary,
metallic point (for example, the engine
lifting bracket) away from the battery (4).
Do not connect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to con-
tact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making con-
nections.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, we recommend that the
system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Push-starting
Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle
should not be push-started because it
might damage the emission control sys-
tem.
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative ter-
minal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged bat-
tery to overheat and crack, releas-
ing battery acid.
CAUTION - AGM battery
(if equipped)
AAbsorbent Glass Matt (AGM)
batteries are maintenance-free
and we recommend that the sys-
tem be serviced by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer. For charging
your AGM battery, use only fully
automatic battery chargers that
are specially developed for AGM
batteries.
When replacing the AGM battery,
we recommend that you use parts
for replacement from a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Do not open or remove the cap on
top of the battery.This may cause
leaks of internal electrolyte that
could result in severe injury.
If the AGM battery is reconnected
or replaced, ISG function will not
operate immediately.
If you want to use the ISG func-
tion, the battery sensor needs to
be calibrated for approximately 4
hours with the ignition off.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 6
67
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates over-
heating, you experience a loss of power,
or hear loud pinging or knocking, the
engine is probably too hot. If this hap-
pens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or neutral (manual
transaxle) and set the parking brake. If
the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the vehicle or steam is coming out
from the bonnet, stop the engine. Do
not open the bonnet until the coolant
has stopped running or the steaming
has stopped. If there is no visible loss
of engine coolant and no steam, leave
the engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is operat-
ing. If the fan is not running, turn the
engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check
for coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air
conditioning had been in use, it is nor-
mal for cold water to be draining from
it when you stop).
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and we recom-
mend that you call a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
6. If the cause of the overheating cannot
be found, wait until the engine temper-
ature has returned to normal. Then, if
coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
base of the radiator fill opening. Fill the
coolant expansion tank to the halfway
mark. To ensure the correct water to
coolant mix is obtained after top up,
testing by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer is required.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If over-
heating happens again, we recom-
mend that you call a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling sys-
tem and we recommend that the
system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
When the engine overheats from
low engine coolant, suddenly
adding engine coolant may cause
cracks in the engine. To prevent
damage, add engine coolant
slowly in small quantities.
WARNING
Whilst the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to be blown out of the
opening and cause serious burns.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 7
What to do in an emergency
86
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS, IF EQUIPPED) (TYPE A)
Low tyre pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
Each tyre, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tyre inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tyres of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tyre inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tyre inflation pressure for
those tyres.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tyre
pressure telltale when one or more
of your tyres is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low
tyre pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tyres as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
nificantly under-inflated tyre causes
the tyre to overheat and can lead to
tyre failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tyre tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tyre mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tyre pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tyre pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tyre pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tyre pressure as intended.TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tyres or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tyres or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tyres and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function proper-
ly.
OEL063012R
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 8
69
What to do in an emergency
NOTICE
If the TPMS indicator does not illu-
minate for 3 seconds when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion or engine is running, or if it
comes on after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute, we recommend
that you contact a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Low tyre pressure tell-
tale
When the tyre pressure monitoring
system warning indicator is illuminat-
ed, one or more of your tyres is sig-
nificantly under-inflated.
If the telltale illuminates, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-
nering and anticipate increased stop-
ping distances. You should stop and
check your tyres as soon as possi-
ble. Inflate the tyres to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tyre inflation pres-
sure label located on the driver’s side
centre pillar outer panel. If you can-
not reach a service station or if the
tyre cannot hold the newly added air,
replace the low pressure tyre with
the spare tyre.
Then the Low Tyre Pressure telltale
may flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated after restarting and about
20 minutes of continuous driving
before you have the low pressure
tyre repaired and replaced on the
vehicle.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tyre pressure telltale may be
illuminated if the tyre pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tyre inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tyre pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tyre inflation
pressure and adjust the tyres to
the recommended tyre inflation
pressure.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 9
What to do in an emergency
106
TPMS (Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under infla-
tion warning at the same time as sys-
tem failure then it will illuminate the
TPMS malfunction indicator.
We recommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tyre pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tyres can cause the tyres
to overheat and fail.
CAUTION
The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cables or
radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may illuminate if snow
chains or some separately
purchased devices such as
notebook computers, mobile
charger, remote starter, navi-
gation etc. are used in the
vehicle.This can interfere with
normal operation of the Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 10
611
What to do in an emergency
Changing a tyre with TPMS
If you have a flat tyre, the Low Tyre
Pressure will come on. We recom-
mend that the flat tyre be checked by
a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tyre
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tyre behind the valve stem.You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you have your tyres
serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Even if you replace the low pressure
tyre with the spare tyre, the Low Tyre
Pressure Telltale will blink or remain
on until the low pressure tyre is
repaired and placed on the vehicle.
After you replace the low pressure
tyre with the spare tyre, the Low Tyre
Pressure Telltale may blink or illumi-
nate after a few minutes because the
TPMS sensor mounted on the spare
wheel is not initiated.
Once the low pressure tyre is rein-
flated to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle or we
recommend that the TPMS sensor
mounted on the replaced spare
wheel be initiated by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer, the TPMS mal-
function indicator and the low tyre
pressure telltale will extinguish within
a few minutes of driving.
If the indicator is not extinguished
after a few minutes of driving, We
recommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
CAUTION
If original mounted tyre is
replaced with the spare tyre, the
TPMS sensor on the replaced
spare wheel should be initiated
and we recommend that the
TPMS sensor on the original
mounted wheel be deactivated
by a HYUNDAI dealer. If the
TPMS sensor on the original
mounted wheel located in the
spare tyre carrier still activates,
the tyre pressure monitoring
system may not operate proper-
ly. We recommend that the sys-
tem be serviced by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
CAUTION
We recommend that you use a
puncture-repairing agent
approved by HYUNDAI.
The sealant on the tyre pressure
sensor and wheel shall be elim-
inated when you replace the
tyre with a new one.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 11
What to do in an emergency
126
You may not be able to identify a low
tyre by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tyre pressure
gauge to measure the tyre's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tyre that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tyre that is cold.
A cold tyre means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tyre to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tyre is cold before inflating
to the recommended pressure.
CAUTION
We recommend that you use the
tyre sealant approved by
HYUNDAI if your vehicle is
equipped with a Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System. The liquid
sealant can damage the tyre
pressure sensors.
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may interfere with the
system's ability to warn the driv-
er of low tyre pressure condi-
tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may void the warranty
for that portion of the vehicle.
WARNING - TPMS
The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tyre dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING - For EUROPE
• Do not modify the vehicle, it
may interfere with the TPMS
function.
The wheels on the market do
not have a TPMS sensor.
For your safety, we recom-
mend that you use parts for
replacement from a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
If you use the wheels on the
market, use a TPMS sensor
approved by a HYUNDAI deal-
er. If your vehicle is not
equipped with a TPMS sensor
or TPMS does not work prop-
erly, you may fail the periodic
vehicle inspection conducted
in your country.
All vehicles sold in the
EUROPE market during below
period must be equipped with
TPMS.
- New model vehicle : Nov. 1,
2012 ~
- Current model vehicle : Nov.
1, 2014~ (Based on vehicle
registrations)
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 12
613
What to do in an emergency
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS, IF EQUIPPED) (TYPE B)
(1) Low tyre pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tyre pressure position tell-
tale
Each tyre, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tyre inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tyres of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tyre inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tyre inflation pressure for
those tyres.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tyre
pressure telltale when one or more
of your tyres is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low
tyre pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tyres as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
nificantly under-inflated tyre causes
the tyre to overheat and can lead to
tyre failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tyre tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tyre mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tyre pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tyre pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tyre pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tyre pressure as intended.TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tyres or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
OEL063012R
WEL-1001/OLM043504N
Type A
Type B
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 13
What to do in an emergency
146
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tyres or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tyres and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function proper-
ly.
NOTICE
If the TPMS, Low Tyre Pressure and
Position indicators do not illuminate
for 3 seconds when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position
or engine is running, or if they
remain illuminated after coming on
for approximately 3 seconds, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Low tyre pressure telltale
Low tyre pressure position telltale
When the tyre pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated, one or more of your tyres is
significantly under-inflated. The low
tyre pressure position telltale light
will indicate which tyre is significant-
ly under-inflated by illuminating the
corresponding position light.
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tyres as soon as pos-
sible.
Inflate the tyres to the proper pres-
sure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tyre inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side cen-
tre pillar outer panel.
If you cannot reach a service station
or if the tyre cannot hold the newly
added air, replace the low pressure
tyre with the spare tyre.
Then the TPMS malfunction indicator
may turn on and the Low Tyre
Pressure and Position telltales will
remain on after restarting and about
20 minutes of continuous driving
before you have the low pressure
tyre repaired and replaced on the
vehicle.
Type A Type B
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 14
615
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The low tyre pressure telltale will illu-
minate after it blinks for approximate-
ly one minute when there is a prob-
lem with the Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under infla-
tion warning at the same time as sys-
tem failure then it will illuminate both
the TPMS malfunction and low tyre
pressure position telltales e.g. if Front
Left sensor fails, the TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator illuminates, but if the
Front Right, Rear Left, or Rear Right
tyre is under-inflated, the low tyre
pressure position telltales may illumi-
nate together with the TPMS mal-
function indicator.
We recommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tyre pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tyres can cause the tyres
to overheat and fail.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tyre pressure telltale may be
illuminated if the tyre pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tyre inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tyre pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tyre inflation
pressure and adjust the tyres to
the recommended tyre inflation
pressure.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 15
What to do in an emergency
166
Changing a tyre with TPMS
If you have a flat tyre, the Low Tyre
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. We recommend that the
system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tyre
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tyre behind the valve stem.You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you have your tyres
serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Even if you replace the low pressure
tyre with the spare tyre, the Low Tyre
Pressure and Position telltales will
remain on until the low pressure tyre
is repaired and placed on the vehi-
cle.
After you replace the low pressure
tyre with the spare tyre, the TPMS
malfunction indicator may illuminate
after a few minutes because the
TPMS sensor is not mounted on the
spare wheel.
Once the low pressure tyre is rein-
flated to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle or the
new TPMS sensor mounted on the
wheel, the TPMS malfunction indica-
tor and the low tyre pressure and
position telltales will extinguish within
a few minutes of driving.
If the indicator is not extinguished
after a few minutes of driving, we
recommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
CAUTION
We recommend that you use the
sealant approved by HYUNDAI.
The sealant on the tyre pressure
sensor and wheel shall be elim-
inated when you replace the
tyre with a new one.
CAUTION
The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cables or
radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if snow
chains are used or some sep-
arate electronic devices such
as notebook computers,
mobile charger, remote starter
or navigation etc., are used in
the vehicle. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 16
617
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able identify a low
tyre by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tyre pressure
gauge to measure the tyre's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tyre that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tyre that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that
3 hour period).
Allow the tyre to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tyre is cold before inflating
to the recommended pressure.
A cold tyre means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
CAUTION
If original mounted tyre is
replaced with the spare tyre, the
TPMS sensor on the replaced
spare wheel should be initiated
and we recommend that the
TPMS sensor on the original
mounted wheel be deactivated
by a HYUNDAI dealer. If the
TPMS sensor on the original
mounted wheel located in the
spare tyre carrier still activates,
the tyre pressure monitoring
system may not operate proper-
ly. We recommend that the sys-
tem be serviced by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
CAUTION
We recommend that you do not
use any tyre sealant except the
Tyre Mobility Kit approved by
HYUNDAI if your vehicle is
equipped with a Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System. The liquid
sealant can damage the tyre
pressure sensors.
WARNING - TPMS
The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tyre dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 17
What to do in an emergency
186
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tyre pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING - For EUROPE
• Do not modify the vehicle, it
may interfere with the TPMS
function.
The wheels on the market do
not have a TPMS sensor.
For your safety, we recom-
mend that you use parts for
replacement from a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
If you use the wheels on the
market, use a TPMS sensor
approved by a HYUNDAI deal-
er. If your vehicle is not
equipped with a TPMS sensor
or TPMS does not work prop-
erly, you may fail the periodic
vehicle inspection conducted
in your country.
All vehicles sold in the
EUROPE market during below
period must be equipped with
TPMS.
- New model vehicle : Nov. 1,
2012 ~
- Current model vehicle : Nov.
1, 2014~ (Based on vehicle
registrations)
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 18
619
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut
wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment.
Pull up the luggage box cover to
reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tyre changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
whilst the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly and fasten the jack screw
fully.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
OLM069001
WARNING - Changing
tyres
Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or motorway.
Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tyre.The jack should
be used on firm level ground.
If you cannot find a firm level
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
assistance.
Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jack
support.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 19
What to do in an emergency
206
Removing and storing the spare
tyre
1. Turn the tyre hold-down wing bolt
(1) counterclockwise.
Store the tyre in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tyre and tools
from “rattling” whilst the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tyres
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) with manual transaxle
or P (Park) with automatic
transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
OEL069002
(Continued)
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death.
Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
Do not start or run the engine
whilst the vehicle is on the
jack.
Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle whilst it is on
the jack.
Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
1VQA4022/H
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 20
621
What to do in an emergency
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tyre
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tyre
has been raised off the ground.
WARNING -
Changing a tyre
To prevent vehicle movement
whilst changing a tyre, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
chocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
1VQA4023 OCM049011N
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 21
What to do in an emergency
226
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tyre
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tyre just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 1.2 in (30 mm).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tyre, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
OCM049013N OCM054012
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 22
623
What to do in an emergency
10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight.The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tyre to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fin-
gers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle.
Go around the wheel tightening
every other nut until they are all tight.
Then double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels, we
recommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
65~79 lb.ft (9~11 kg.m)
WARNING
Wheels and wheel covers may
have sharp edges. Handle them
carefully to avoid possible
severe injury. Before putting the
wheel into place, be sure that
there is nothing on the hub or
wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,
etc.) that interferes with the
wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
If there is, remove it. If there is
not good contact on the mount-
ing surface between the wheel
and hub, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle.This may cause serious
injury or death.
OEL069007
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 23
What to do in an emergency
246
If you have a tyre gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tyre pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tyre. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as pos-
sible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tyre in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tyre
from rattling whilst the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, we recommend that
you consult a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel.This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tyre pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tyre. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to “Tyres and wheels” in
section 8.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:12 PM Page 24
625
What to do in an emergency
Jack label 1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transaxle or move the
shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transaxle.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
Type A
Example
Type B
Type C
OHYK065010
OHYK065011
OHYK064002
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 2/9/2015 9:11 PM Page 25
What to do in an emergency
266
EC Declaration of Conformity for Jack
JACKDOC14S
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:13 PM Page 26
627
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE (WITH TYREMOBILITYKIT, IF EQUIPPED)
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tyre Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tyre and we recommend
that the system be inspected by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Introduction
With the TyreMobilityKit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tyre
puncture.
The system of compressor and seal-
ing compound effectively and com-
fortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tyre caused by nails
or similar objects and reinflates the
tyre.
After you ensured that the tyre is
properly sealed you can drive cau-
tiously on the tyre (distance up to 120
miles (200 km)) at a max. speed of 50
mph (80 km/h) in order to reach a
service station or tyre dealer to have
the tyre replaced.
OEL069019OEL069018
CAUTION - One sealant for
one tyre
When two or more tyres are flat,
do not use the tyre mobility kit
because the supported one
sealant of Tyre Mobility Kit is
only used for one flat tyre.
WARNING - Tyre wall
Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tyre
walls. This can result in an acci-
dent due to tyre failure.
WARNING - Temporary fix
Have your tyre repaired as soon
as possible. The tyre may loose
air pressure at any time after
inflating with the Tyre Mobility
Kit.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:13 PM Page 27
What to do in an emergency
286
It is possible that some tyres, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tyre may
adversely affect tyre performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
manoeuvres, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The TyreMobilityKit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tyre
repair method and is to be used for
one tyre only. This instruction shows
you step by step how to temporarily
seal the puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the TyreMobilityKit".
Notes on the safe use of the
TyreMobilityKit
Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
TyreMobilityKit away from moving
traffic.
To be sure your vehicle won't
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
Only use the TyreMobilityKit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tyres. Only punctured areas locat-
ed within the tread region of the
tyre can be sealed using the tyre
mobility kit.
Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-
cles or any other type of tyres.
When the tyre and wheel are dam-
aged, do not use Tyre Mobility Kit
for your safety.
Use of the Tyre Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tyre damage larger
than approximately 0.24 in (6 mm).
If the tyre cannot be made road-
worthy with the Tyre Mobility Kit,
we recommend that you contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit if a
tyre is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pres-
sure.
Do not remove any foreign objects-
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tyre.
Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
Never leave the TyreMobilityKit
unattended whilst it is being used.
Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
Do not use the TyreMobilityKit if the
ambient temperature is below
-30°C (-22°F).
WARNING
Do not use the TMK if a tyre is
severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air
pressure.
Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the
tyre can be sealed using the
TMK.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:13 PM Page 28
629
What to do in an emergency
0. Speed restriction label
1. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. On/off switch
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tyre inflation pressure
8. Button for reducing tyre inflation
pressure
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Strictly follow the specified sequence,
otherwise the sealant may escape
under high pressure.
WARNING - Expired
sealant
Do not use the Tyre sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tyre failure.
WARNING - Sealant
Keep out of reach of children.
Avoid contact with eyes.
Do not swallow.
Components of the Tyre Mobility Kit
OEL069020
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:13 PM Page 29
What to do in an emergency
306
Using the TyreMobilityKit
1. Detach the speed restriction label
(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driv-
er not to drive too fast.
2. Screw connection hose (9) onto
the connector of the sealant bottle.
3. Ensure that button (8) on the com-
pressor is not pressed.
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw filling hose (2) of the sealant
bottle onto the valve.
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing of the compressor (4) so
that the bottle is upright.
6. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7. Connect between compressor and
the vehicle power outlet using the
cable and connectors.
OEL069019 OEL043150R
WARNING
Only use the front passenger
side power outlet when con-
necting the power cord.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:13 PM Page 30
631
What to do in an emergency
8. With the engine start/stop button
position on or ignition switch posi-
tion on, switch on the compressor
and let it run for approximately 5~7
minutes to fill the sealant up to
proper pressure. (refer to the Tyre
and Wheels, chapter 8). The infla-
tion pressure of the tyre after filling
is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the
tyre and stay away from the tyre
when filling it.
9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tyre valve.
Return the TyreMobilityKit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
4~6 miles (7~10 km or, about
10min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tyre.
WARNING - Carbon
monoxide
Do not leave your vehicle run-
ning in a poorly ventilated area
for extended periods of time.
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation can occur.
CAUTION - Tyre pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tyre pressure is
below 200kpa(29 PSI). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tyre failure.
CAUTION
Do not exceed a speed of 80
km/h (50 mph). If possible, do
not fall below a speed of 20
km/h (12 mph).
Whilst driving, if you experience
any unusual vibration, ride dis-
turbance or noise, reduce your
speed and drive with caution
until you can safely pull off of
the side of the road.
Call for road side service or tow-
ing. When you use the Tyre
Mobility Kit, the tyre pressure
sensors and wheel may be dam-
aged by sealant, remove the
sealant stained with tyre pres-
sure sensors and wheel and
inspect in authorized dealer.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:13 PM Page 31
What to do in an emergency
326
CAUTION - Tyre pressure
sensor
The sealant on the tyre pressure
sensor and wheel should be
removed when you replace the
tyre with a new one and inspect
the tyre pressure sensors in
authorised dealer.
Checking the tyre inflation pres-
sure
1. After driving approximately 4~6
miles (7~10 km or about 10 min),
stop at a safety location.
2. Connect connection hose (9) of
the compressor directly to the tyre
valve.
3. Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4. Adjust the tyre inflation pressure
to the recomended tyre inflation.
With the ignition switched on, pro-
ceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure: Switch on the compressor,
position I. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.
NOTICE
The pressure gauge may show high-
er than actual reading when the
compressor is running. To get an
accurate tyre reading, the compres-
sor needs to be turned off.
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure: Press the button 8 on the
compressor.
WARNING
Do not let the compressor run
for more than 10 minutes, other-
wise the device will overheat
and may be damaged.
CAUTION
If the inflation pressure is not
maintained, drive the vehicle a
second time, refer to
Distributing the sealant. Then
repeat steps 1 to 4.
Use of the TMK may be ineffec-
tual for tyre damage larger than
approximately 4 mm (0.16 in).
We recommend that you contact
a HYUNDAI authorised repairer
if the tyre cannot be made road-
worthy with the Tyre Mobility
Kit.
WARNING
The tyre inflation pressure must
be at least 220 kPa (32 psi). If it
is not, do not continue driving.
Call for road side service or
towing.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:13 PM Page 32
633
What to do in an emergency
Notes on the safe use of the
Tyre Mobility Kit
Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
TMK away from moving traffic.
Place your warning triangle in a
prominent place to make passing
vehicles aware of your location.
To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
Only use the TMK for sealing/infla-
tion passenger car tyres. Do not
use on motorcycles, bicycles or
any other type of tyres.
Do not remove any foreign objects-
such as nails or screws -that have
penetrated the tyre.
Before using the TMK, read the
precautionary advice printed on
the sealant bottle!
Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the TMK unattended
whilst it is being used.
Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
Do not use the TMK if the ambient
temperature is below -30°C (-
22°F).
When both the tyre and wheel are
damaged, do not use Tyre Mobility
Kit for your safety.
Technical Data
System voltage: DC 12 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures:
-30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)
Max. working pressure:
87 psi (6 bar)
Size
Compressor: 6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.
(168 x 150 x 68 mm)
Sealant bottle: 4.1 x ø 3.3 in.
(104 x ø 85 mm)
Compressor weight:
2.31 lbs (1.05 kg)
Sealant volume:
18.3 cu. in. (300 ml)
Sealant and spare parts can be
obtained and replaced at an
authorized vehicle or tyre dealer.
Empty sealant bottles may be dis-
posed of at home. Liquid residue
from the sealant should be dis-
posed of by your vehicle or tyre
dealer or in accordance with local
waste disposal regulations.
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:13 PM Page 33
What to do in an emergency
346
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer or a com-
mercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle. The use
of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommend-
ed.
On 4WD vehicles, your vehicle must be
towed with a wheel lift and dollies or
flatbed equipment with all the wheels off
the ground.
On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to tow
the vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground (without dollies) and the front
wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-
sion components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lift-
ed, not the rear.
OXM069028
dolly
dolly
CAUTION
The 4WD vehicle should never be
towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transaxle or the 4WD
system.
CAUTION
Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
Do not tow with sling-type equip-
ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
OUN046030
OCM054034
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:13 PM Page 34
635
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emer-
gency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tow-
ing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the
lower part of the cover on the front or
rear bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-
nal damage to the transaxle.
OEL063013
OLM069016L
Front
Rear (if equipped)
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:13 PM Page 35
What to do in an emergency
366
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer or a commercial
tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-
tance and at low speed. Also, the wheels,
axles, power train, steering and brakes
must all be in good condition.
Do not use the towing hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other con-
ditions from which the vehicle cannot
be driven out under its own power.
Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequent-
ly.
Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
CAUTION
Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for tow-
ing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
Use only a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
OEL063014
OLM069015
Front
Rear
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:13 PM Page 36
637
What to do in an emergency
Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5
m) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
Release the parking brake.
Press the brake pedal with more force
than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake per-
formance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving manoeuvres which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and tow-
ing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or dam-
age.
If the disabled vehicle is unable
to be moved, do not forcibly con-
tinue the towing. Contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer or a
commercial tow truck service for
assistance.
Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
Keep away from the vehicle dur-
ing towing.
OXM069009
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:13 PM Page 37
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neu-
tral. Be sure the steering is
unlocked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A
driver must be in the towed vehi-
cle to operate the steering and
brakes.
To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transaxle, limit the
vehicle speed to 10 mph (15 km/h)
and drive less than 1 mile (1.5
km) when towing.
Before towing, check the auto-
matic transaxle fluid leak under
your vehicle. If the automatic
transaxle fluid is leaking, a
flatbed equipment or towing dolly
must be used.
638
What to do in an emergency
EL(FL) UK 6.QXP 12/16/2014 8:13 PM Page 38
Maintenance
7
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
• Owners responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
• Engine compartment precautions (Diesel engine) . . . 7-8
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-12
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Brake/clutch fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
• Checking the brake/clutch fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
• Check the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Fuel Filter (For Diesel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
• Draining water from fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
• Extracting air from the fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
• Fuel filter cartridge replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
• Battery capacity label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
• Tyre care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
• Recommended cold tyre inflation pressures . . . . . . 7-33
• Checking tyre inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Tyre rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
• Wheel alignment and tyre balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Tyre replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Tyre traction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Tyre maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Tyre sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Low aspect ratio tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 1
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
• Headlight, position light, turn signal light,
front fog light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
• Headlight and front fog light aiming (for europe) . . 7-60
• Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
• Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-65
• Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
• High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . 7-67
• License plate light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
• Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
• Evaporative emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
• Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
7
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 2
73
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OEL070301R
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
* : if equipped
Petrol Engine (1.6L)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 3
Maintenance
47
OEL073300R
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
* : if equipped
Petrol Engine (2.0L) - MPI/GDI
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 4
75
Maintenance
OEL070302R
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Fuse box
3. Fuel filter
4. Engine oil dipstick
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Negative battery terminal
9. Positive battery terminal
10. Radiator cap
11. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
* : if equipped
Diesel Engine (1.7L)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 5
Maintenance
67
OEL079002R
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Fuse box
3. Fuel filter
4. Engine oil dipstick
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Negative battery terminal
9. Positive battery terminal
10. Radiator cap
11. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
* : if equipped
Diesel Engine (2.0L)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 6
77
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection proce-
dures.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational prob-
lems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or person-
al injury.
Owner’s responsibility
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
We recommend in general that you have
your vehicle serviced by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer. You should retain
documents that show proper mainte-
nance has been performed on your vehi-
cle in accordance with the scheduled
maintenance service charts shown on
the following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance with
the servicing and maintenance require-
ments of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Service Passport. Repairs and
adjustments required as a result of
improper maintenance or a lack of
required maintenance are not covered
when your vehicle is covered by warran-
ty.
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warran-
ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-
rate Service Passport provided with the
vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-
icing or maintenance procedure, we rec-
ommend that the system be serviced by
a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 7
Maintenance
87
Engine compartment precautions
(Diesel engine)
The piezo injector operates at high
voltage (maximum 200v). Therefore,
the following accidents may occur.
- Direct contact with the injector or
injector wiring may cause electric
shock or damage your muscle or
nerve system.
- The electromagnetic wave from the
operating injector may cause the arti-
ficial heart pacemaker to malfunction.
Follow the safety tips provided below,
when you are checking the engine
room whilst the engine is running.
- Do not touch the injector, injector
wirings, and the engine computer
whilst the engine is running.
- Do not remove the injector connector
whilst the engine is running.
- People using pacemakers must not
go near the engine whilst the engine
is starting or running.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured whilst
performing some maintenance
procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, we recommend that the
system be serviced by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Working under the bonnet with
the engine running is dangerous.
It becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewellery or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine whilst work-
ing under the bonnet, make cer-
tain that you remove all jewellery
(especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar
loose clothing before getting
near the engine or cooling fans.
CAUTION
Do not put heavy objects or apply
excessive force on top of the
engine cover (if equipped) or fuel
related parts.
When you inspect the fuel system
(fuel lines and fuel injection
devices), we recommend that you
contact a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Do not drive long time with the
engine cover (if equipped)
removed.
When checking the engine room,
do not go near fire.
Fuel, washer fluid, etc. are flam-
mable oils that may cause fire.
Before touching the battery, igni-
tion cables and electrical wiring,
you should disconnect the bat-
tery "-" terminal. You may get an
electric shock from the electric
current.
When you remove the interior
trim cover with a flat bed (-) driv-
er, be careful not to damage the
cover.
Be careful when you replace and
clean bulbs to avoid burns or
electrical shock.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 8
79
Maintenance
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed at
the frequencies indicated to help ensure
safe, dependable operation of your vehi-
cle. If you have any question, we recom-
mend that you consult a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labour, parts and
lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
Check the engine oil level.
Check coolant level in coolant reser-
voir.
Check the windscreen washer fluid
level.
Look for low or under-inflated tyres.
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns
or other serious injury.
WARNING - Diesel Engine
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High-pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high-pressure pipes are sub-
ject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet pro-
duced by fuel leaks may cause seri-
ous injury, if it touches the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move than 30cm closer to the
ECU or wiring harness within the
engine room whilst engine is run-
ning, since the high currents in the
electronic engine control system
produce considerable magnetic
fields.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 9
Maintenance
107
Whilst operating your vehicle:
Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-
elling on smooth, level road.
When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hard-
to-push” brake pedal.
If any slipping or changes in the oper-
ation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
Check manual transaxle operation,
including clutch operation.
Check automatic transaxle P (Park)
function.
Check parking brake.
Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air condition-
ing system during or after use is nor-
mal).
At least monthly:
Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-
nals and hazard warning flashers.
Check the inflation pressures of all
tyres including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
Check windscreen washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with wash-
er fluid.
Check headlight alignment.
Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
Check for worn tyres and loose wheel
lug nuts.
At least once a year :
Clean body and door drain holes.
Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
bonnet hinges.
Lubricate door and bonnet locks and
latches.
Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
Check the air conditioning system.
Check the power steering fluid level.
Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
Clean battery and terminals.
Check the brake (and clutch) fluid
level.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 10
711
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule
if the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, fol-
low Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
Repeated short distance driving.
Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
Extensive use of brakes.
Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
Driving on rough or muddy roads.
Driving in mountainous areas.
Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 32°C
(90°F).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than
“Normal Maintenance Schedule which is
provied in your Service Passport.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 11
Maintenance
127
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more fre-
quent oil and filter changes are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-
ration and replace if necessary. Drive
belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted as neces-
sary.
Fuel filter (cartridge)
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an exces-
sive amount of foreign matter accumu-
lates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. We recommend that
the fuel filter be replaced by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections for leakage and damage. We
recommend that the fuel lines, fuel hoses
and connections be replaced by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
WARNING - Diesel only
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high pressure pipes are sub-
ject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet pro-
duced by fuel leaks may cause seri-
ous injury, if it touch the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move than 30cm closer to the
ECU or wiring harness within the
engine room whilst engine is run-
ning, since the high currents in the
Common Rail system produce con-
siderable magnetic fields.
CAUTION
When you are inspecting the belt,
place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF or ACC position.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 12
713
Maintenance
Vapour hose and fuel filler cap
The vapour hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those intervals
specified in the maintenance schedule.
Make sure that a new vapour hose or fuel
filler cap is correctly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-
cate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat dam-
age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and cou-
plings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter
We recommend that you use air cleaner
filter for replacement from a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Spark plugs (for petrol engine)
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system parts, such as
radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not be
checked under normal usage conditions.
But in severe conditions, we recommend
that the fluid be changed by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer in accordance to the
scheduled maintenance at the beginning
of this chapter.
NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid colour is basi-
cally red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic
transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.
It is normal condition and you should
not judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed colour.
WARNING
Do not disconnect and inspect
spark plugs when the engine is hot.
You may burn yourself.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 13
Maintenance
147
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of
the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system includ-
ing the parking brake lever and cables.
Brake pads, calipers and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
For more information on checking the
pads or lining wear limit, refer to the
Hyundai web site.
(http://brakeman
ual.hmc.co.kr)
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-
essary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant/
compressor (if equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and con-
nections for leakage and damage.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunc-
tion and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 14
715
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capaci-
ties” in section 8.)
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
CAUTION - Diesel engine
Overfilling the engine oil may cause
severe dieseling due to churning
effect. It may lead to engine damage
accompanied with abrupt engine
speed increment, combustion noise
and white smoke emission.
CAUTION
Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil. If
you drop the engine oil on the
engine room, wipe it off immedi-
ately.
When you wipe the oil level
gauge, you should wipe it with a
clean cloth. When mixed with
debris, it can cause engine dam-
age.
OLM073003 OLM073004
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 15
Maintenance
167
ENGINE COOLANT
Changing the engine oil and filter
We recommend that the engine oil and
filter be replaced by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-
tory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant concentration level at least once
a year, at the beginning of the winter sea-
son, and before travelling to a colder cli-
mate.
WARNING
Prolonged and repeated contact
with used engine oils may result in
serious skin disorders including
dermatitis and cancer. Avoid con-
tact with skin as far as possible and
always wash thoroughly after any
contact. Keep used oils out of
reach of children. It is illegal to pol-
lute drains, water courses and soil.
Use only authorised waste collec-
tion facilities including civic ameni-
ty sites and garages for the dispos-
al of used oil and oil filters. If in
doubt, contact the local authority
for disposal instructions.
CAUTION
When the engine overheats from
low engine coolant, suddenly
adding engine coolant may cause
cracks in the engine. To prevent
damage, add engine coolant
slowly in small quantities.
Do not drive with no engine
coolant. It may cause water pump
failure and engine seizure, etc.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 16
717
Maintenance
Checking the coolant level
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-
rated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring the
level to F (MAX), but do not overfill. If fre-
quent coolant refill is required, we rec-
ommend that the system be inspected by
a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
OLM079006
(Continued)
Even if the engine is not operat-
ing, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug whilst the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
WARNING
The electric motor (cool-
ing fan) is controlled by
engine coolant tempera-
ture, refrigerant pres-
sure and vehicle speed.
It may sometimes operate even
when the engine is not running.
Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan
so that you are not injured by a
rotating fan blades. As the engine
coolant temperature decreases, the
electric motor will automatically
shut off.This is a normal condition.
If your vehicle is equipped with
GDI, the electric motor (cooling fan)
may operate until you disconnect
the nagative battery cable.
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
Never attempt to remove the radi-
ator cap whilst the engine is
operating or hot. Doing so might
lead to cooling system and
engine damage and could result
in serious personal injury from
escaping hot coolant or steam.
Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop.
Step back whilst the pressure is
released from the cooling sys-
tem. When you are sure all the
pressure has been released,
press down on the cap, using a
thick towel, and continue turning
counterclockwise to remove it.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 17
Maintenance
187
Recommended engine coolant
When adding coolant, use only deion-
ized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improp-
er coolant mixture can result in serious
malfunction or engine damage.
The engine in your vehicle has alumini-
um engine parts and must be protected
by an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to
prevent corrosion and freezing.
DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-
lowing table.
Changing the coolant
We recommend that the coolant be
replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pres-
sure causing serious injury.
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Antifreeze
Water
OLM072007-1
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth or fabric around
the radiator cap before refilling the
coolant in order to prevent the
coolant from overflowing into
engine parts such as generator.
WARNING - Coolant
Do not use radiator coolant or anti-
freeze in the washer fluid reservoir.
Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windscreen and may
cause loss of vehicle control or
damage to paint and body trim.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 18
719
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Checking the brake/clutch fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-
odically. The fluid level should be
between MAX (Maximum) and MIN
(Minimum) marks on the side of the
reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area
around the reservoir cap thoroughly to
prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
(Maximum) level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a normal
condition associated with the wear of the
brake linings and/or clutch disc (if
equipped).
If the fluid level is excessively low, we
recommend that the brake system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Use only the specified brake/clutch fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants or
capacities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
NOTICE
Before removing the brake/clutch filler
cap, read the warning on the cap.
WARNING - Loss of brake
fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
we recommend that the system be
inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
OLM079008R
WARNING
Clean filler cap before removing.
Use only DOT3 or DOT4 brake/
clutch fluid from a sealed container.
WARNING - Brake/clutch
fluid
When changing and adding
brake/clutch fluid, handle it careful-
ly. Do not let it come in contact with
your eyes. If brake/clutch fluid
come in contact with your eyes,
immediately flush them with a large
quantity of fresh tap water. Have
your eyes examined by a doctor as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to
contact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result.
Brake/clutch fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an extended
time should never be used as its
quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be properly disposed. Don't
put in the wrong kind of fluid. A few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in your brake/clutch sys-
tem can damage brake/clutch sys-
tem parts.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:04 PM Page 19
Maintenance
207
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid level
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary.
Plain water may be used if washer fluid is
not available. However, use washer sol-
vent with antifreeze characteristics in
cold climates to prevent freezing.
Check the parking brake
Check the stroke of the parking brake by
counting the number of “clicks’ heard
whilst fully applying it from the released
position. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-
ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, we recommend that
the system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Stroke : 6 “clicks’’ at a force of
44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windscreen and may
cause loss of vehicle control or
damage to paint and body trim.
Windscreen Washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under cer-
tain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
Windscreen washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contact-
ing windscreen washer fluid.
Serious injury or death could
occur.
OEL074010
PARKING BRAKE
OLM059016/H
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 20
721
Maintenance
FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)
Draining water from fuel filter
The fuel filter for diesel engine plays an
important role of separating water from
fuel and accumulating the water in its
bottom.
If water accumulates in the fuel filter, the
warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
If this warning light illuminates,
we recommend that the sys-
tem by checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Extracting air from the fuel filter
If you drive until you have no fuel left or if
you replace the fuel filter, be sure to
extract air from the fuel system as it
makes it difficult to start the engine.
1. Pump up and down(1) approximately
50 times until the pump is hard.
2. Extract air from the fuel filter by remov-
ing the bolt(2) with a cross-tip screw
driver and reinstall the bolt(2).
3. Pump up and down(1) approximately
15 times.
4. Extract air from the fuel filter by remov-
ing the bolt(2) with a cross-tip screw
driver and reinstall the bolt(2).
5. Pump up and down(1) approximately 5
times.
NOTICE
Use cloths when you extract air so that
the fuel is not sprayed around.
Clean the fuel around the fuel filter or
the injection pump before starting the
engine to prevent fire.
Finally, check each part if the fuel is
leaking.
CAUTION
If the water accumulated in the fuel
filter is not drained at proper times,
damages to the major parts such as
the fuel system can be caused by
water permeation in the fuel filter.
OEL070304
Type A
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 21
Maintenance
227
Fuel filter cartridge replacement
NOTICE
When replacing the fuel filter cartridge,
we recommend that you use parts for
replacement from a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
OLM079011
Type B
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 22
723
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting
the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed air.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
OLM079012N OLM079014
OLM079013N
OEL070013
Type A
Type B
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 23
Maintenance
247
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-
ment more often than the usual recom-
mended intervals.
CAUTION
Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in exces-
sive engine wear.
When removing the air cleaner fil-
ter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
We recommend that you use
parts for replacement from a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Improper parts could damage the
air flow sensor, turbocharger or
engine.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 24
725
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
If the vehicle is operated in the severely
air-polluted cities or on dusty rough
roads for a long period, it should be
inspected more frequently and replaced
earlier. When you, the owner, replace the
climate control air filter, replace it per-
forming the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
Replace the filter according to the main-
tenance Schedule.
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box and remove the
support strap (1).
2. With the glove box open, remove the
stoppers on both sides.
OLM079015R OLM079016/H
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 25
Maintenance
267
3. Remove the climate control air filter
case whilst pressing the lock on the
right of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
NOTICE
Install a new climate control air filter in
the correct direction with the arrow
symbol(
) facing downwards.
Otherwise, the climate control effects
may decrease, possibly with a noise.
OBK075017OLM079017
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 26
727
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-
matic car washes have been known to
make the windscreen difficult to clean.
Contamination of either the windscreen
or the wiper blades with foreign matter
can reduce the effectiveness of the wind-
screen wipers. Common sources of con-
tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-
ing properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean ade-
quately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use petrol, kerosene,
paint thinner, or other solvents on
or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manual-
ly.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
1JBA5122/H
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 27
Maintenance
287
Front windscreen wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper
blade assembly to expose the plastic
locking clip.
NOTICE
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windscreen.
2. Open the cover of the blade.
3. Compress the clip behind the wiper
arm and lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly until it clicks
into place.
5. Close the cover of blade.
6. Place back the wiper arm to the prop-
er position.
OED070112/H
OED070113/H OED070114/H
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 28
729
Maintenance
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the
wiper blade assembly.
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the centre part into the slot in
the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it slight-
ly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, we recommend that
the wiper blade be replaced by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
OHM078062
OHM078063
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 29
Maintenance
307
BATTERY
For best battery service
Keep the battery securely mounted.
Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the bat-
tery cables.
NOTICE
Basically equipped battery is mainte-
nance free type. If your vehicle is
equipped with the battery marked with
LOWER and UPPER on the side, you
can check the electrolyte level. The elec-
trolyte level should be between LOWER
and UPPER. If the electrolyte level is
low, it needs to add distilled (demineral-
ized) water (Never add sulfuric acid or
other electrolyte). When refill, be care-
ful not to splash the battery and adja-
cent components. And do not overfill the
battery cells. It can cause corrosion on
other parts. After then ensure that tight-
en the cell caps. We recommend that you
contact a HYUNDAI authorised repair-
er.
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
OLM079019R
OEL070019R
Type A
Type B
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 30
731
Maintenance
The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
Battery capacity label
1. CMF60L-BCI : HYUNDAI model name
of battery
2. 12V : Nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : Nominal capacity
(in Ampere hours)
4. 92RC : Nominal reserve capacity
(in min.)
5. 550CCA : Cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 440A : Cold-test current in amperes
by EN
(Continued)
The battery contains lead.
Do not dispose of it after
use. We recommend that
you return the battery to a
HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
tery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warn-
ings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a
pain or a burning sensa-
tion, get medical attention
immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
Pb
CAUTION
If you connect unauthorised elec-
tronic devices to the battery, the
battery may be discharged. Never
use unauthorised devices.
OJD072039
Example
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 31
Maintenance
327
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
whilst the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load whilst the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-
30A for two hours.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
Auto up/down window (See section 4)
Sunroof (See section 4)
Trip computer (See section 4)
Climate control system
(See section 4)
Clock (See section 4)
Audio (See section 4)
(Continued)
Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is discon-
nected.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
Watch the battery during charg-
ing, and stop or reduce the charg-
ing rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1.Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery ter-
minal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery termi-
nal.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 32
733
Maintenance
TYRES AND WHEELS
Tyre care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tyre
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tyre inflation
pressures
All tyre pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tyres are cold. “Cold Tyres” means
the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tyre
wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tyre and wheels” in section
8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
WARNING - Tyre underin-
flation
Severe underinflation (10 psi
(0.7 bar) or more) can lead to
severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tyre failures that can
result in the loss of vehicle con-
trol leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
OEL083008R
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 33
Maintenance
347
WARNING - Tyre inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tyre life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tyre failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tyre pressure
Always observe the following:
Check tyre pressure when the
tyres are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1 mile (1.6
km) since startup.)
Check the pressure of your
spare tyre each time you
check the pressure of other
tyres.
Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
Worn, old tyres can cause
accidents. If your tread is
badly worn, or if your tyres
have been damaged, replace
them.
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tyre pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tyre frequently needs refilling,
we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the centre of the tyre tread,
and a greater possibility of
damage from road hazards.
CAUTION
Warm tyres normally exceed
recommended cold tyre pres-
sures by 4 to 6 psi (0.28 to 0.41
bar). Do not release air from
warm tyres to adjust the pres-
sure or the tyres will be under-
inflated.
Be sure to reinstall the tyre
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 34
735
Maintenance
Checking tyre inflation pressure
Check your tyres once a month or
more.
Also, check the tyre pressure of the
spare tyre.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tyre pressure.You can not tell if your
tyres are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tyres may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tyre's inflation pressure
when the tyres are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tyre
valve stem. Press the tyre gauge
firmly onto the valve to get a pres-
sure measurement. If the cold tyre
inflation pressure matches the rec-
ommended pressure on the tyre and
loading information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the pres-
sure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tyre, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
centre of the tyre valve. Recheck the
tyre pressure with the tyre gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
WARNING
• Inspect your tyres frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tyre pressure gauge.
Tyres with too much or too lit-
tle pressure wear unevenly
causing poor handling, loss of
vehicle control, and sudden
tyre failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
The recommended cold tyre
pressure for your vehicle can
be found in this manual and on
the tyre label located on the
driver's side centre pillar.
Worn tyres can cause acci-
dents. Replace tyres that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tyre.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tyres on your
vehicle.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 35
Maintenance
367
Tyre rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tyres be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tyres for
correct balance.
When rotating tyres, check for
uneven wear and damage. Abnormal
wear is usually caused by incorrect
tyre pressure, improper wheel align-
ment, out-of-balance wheels, severe
braking or severe cornering. Look for
bumps or bulges in the tread or side
of tyre. Replace the tyre if you find
either of these conditions. Replace
the tyre if fabric or cord is visible.
After rotation, be sure to bring the
front and rear tyre pressures to spec-
ification and check lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tyre and wheels” in section
8.
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tyres are rotated.
NOTICE
Rotate radial tyres that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
WARNING
Do not use the compact spare
tyre for tyre rotation.
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tyres under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
S2BLA790
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tyre
With a full-size spare tyre (if equipped)
Directional tyres (if equipped)
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 36
737
Maintenance
Wheel alignment and tyre balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tyre
life and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tyre
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Tyre replacement
If the tyre is worn evenly, a tread
wear indicator will appear as a solid
band across the tread. This shows
there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of
tread left on the tyre. Replace the
tyre when this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tyre.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alumini-
um wheels. Use only approved
wheel weights.
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
CAUTION
When replacing the tyres,
recheck and tighten the wheel
nuts after driving about 620
miles (1,000 km). If the steering
wheel shakes or the vehicle
vibrates whilst driving, the tyre
is out of balance. Align the tyre
balance. If the problem is not
solved, we recommend that you
contact a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 37
Maintenance
387
Compact spare tyre replacement
(if equipped)
A compact spare tyre has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tyre.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tyre.
The replacement compact spare tyre
should be the same size and design
tyre as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tyre
wheel. The compact spare tyre is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tyre wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tyre.
(Continued)
The use of any other tyre size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clear-
ance, stopping distance, body
to tyre clearance, snow tyre
clearance, and speedometer
reliability.
It is best to replace all four
tyres at the same time. If that
is not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tyres as a pair.
Replacing just one tyre can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tyre
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tyres, all 4
tyres must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tyres of a dif-
ferent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System)
and ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) (if equipped) to work
irregularly.
WARNING - Replacing
tyres
Driving on worn-out tyres is
very hazardous and will
reduce braking effectiveness,
steering accuracy, and trac-
tion.
Your vehicle is equipped with
tyres designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capa-
bility. Do not use a size and
type of tyre and wheel that is
different from the one that is
originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety
and performance of your vehi-
cle, which could lead to han-
dling failure or rollover and
serious injury.When replacing
the tyres, be sure to equip all
four tyres with the tyre and
wheel of the same size, type,
tread, brand and load-carrying
capacity.
(Continued)
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 38
739
Maintenance
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tyre traction
Tyre traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tyres, tyres that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tyres should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tyre maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tyre wear. If you find a tyre is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tyres installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tyre life. Additionally, a tyre should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tyre sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tyre and also provides
the tyre identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tyre in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tyre clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 39
Maintenance
407
2.Tyre size designation
A tyre’s sidewall is marked with a tyre
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tyres for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tyre size designation
mean.
Example tyre size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tyre size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P225/55R18 102H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tyres
marked with the prefix “P’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tyres have this marking).
225 - Tyre width in millimeters.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tyre’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tyre construction code (Radial).
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
102 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tyre can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.0JX18
7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tyre speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger cars. The speed
rating is part of the tyre size desig-
nation on the sidewall of the tyre.
This symbol corresponds to that
tyre's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 40
741
Maintenance
3. Checking tyre life
(TIN :Tyre Identification Number)
Any tyres that are over 6 years,
based on the manufacturing date,
tyre strength and performance,
decline with age naturally (even
unused spare tyres). Therefore, the
tyres (including the spare tyre)
should be replaced by new ones.You
can find the manufacturing date on
the tyre sidewall (possibly on the
inside of the wheel), displaying the
DOT Code. The DOT Code is a
series of numbers on a tyre consist-
ing of numbers and English letters.
The manufacturing date is designat-
ed by the last four digits (characters)
of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tyre size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents
that the tyre was produced in the
16th week of 2015.
4.Tyre ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric are in the tyre. Tyre
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tyre, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tyre.Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tyre and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tyre. When
replacing the tyres on the vehicle,
always use a tyre that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tyre.
7. Uniform tyre quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tyre sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
WARNING - Tyre age
Tyres degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tyres generally be replaced
after six (6) years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot cli-
mates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the
aging process. Failure to follow
this Warning can result in sud-
den tyre failure, which could
lead to a loss of control and an
accident involving serious
injury or death.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 41
Maintenance
427
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tyre when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tyre
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tyre graded
100.
The relative performance of tyres
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
because of variations in driving
habits, service practices and differ-
ences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle
tyres.The tyres available as standard
or optional equipment on your vehi-
cles may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tyres ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tyre marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tyre’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high tempera-
ture can cause the material of the
tyre to degenerate and reduce tyre
life, and excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tyre failure. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of per-
formance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by
the law.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tyre is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING - Tyre
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tyre is established for a tyre that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tyre failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 42
743
Maintenance
Low aspect ratio tyre (if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tyres, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tyres
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tyres.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tyre is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tyre
of the low aspect ratio tyre is
easier to be damaged. So, follow
the instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tyres and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tyres and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or kerb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tyres and wheels are not dam-
aged.
- If the tyre is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tyre condition or contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
- To prevent damage to the tyre,
inspect the tyre condition and
pressure every 1,800 miles
(3,000 km).
CAUTION
It is not easy to recognize the
tyre damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slight-
est hint of tyre damage, even
though you cannot see the
tyre damage with your own
eyes, have the tyre checked or
replaced because the tyre
damage may cause air leak-
age from the tyre.
If the tyre is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or kerb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
You can find out the tyre infor-
mation on the tyre sidewall.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 43
Maintenance
447
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 3 (or 4) fuse panels, one
located in the driver’s side panel bolster,
the other in the engine compartment
near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, discon-
nect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and we recommend
that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Four kinds of fuses are used: blade type
for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,
and fusible link for higher amperage rat-
ings.
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
Never install a wire or aluminium
foil instead of the proper fuse -
even as a temporary repair It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
OLM079051N
Normal
Normal
Blade type
Cartridge type
Multi fuse
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
Normal Blown
BFT (Battery fuse terminal)
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 44
745
Maintenance
Inner panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that you
consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigar lighter fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical com-
ponents do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse block in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
OLM079020R
OLM079021N
CAUTION
When replacing a blown fuse or
relay with a new one, make sure
the new fuse or relay fits tightly
into the clips.The incomplete fas-
tening fuse or relay may cause
the vehicle wiring and electric
systems damage and a possible
fire.
Do not remove fuses, relays and
terminals fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuses, relays and termi-
nals may be fastened incomplete-
ly, and it may cause a possible
fire. If fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, we recommend that you
consult with a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause con-
tact failure and system malfunc-
tion.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:05 PM Page 45
Maintenance
467
Memory fuse
Your vehicle is equipped with a memory
fuse to prevent battery discharge if your
vehicle is parked without being operated
for prolonged periods. Use the following
procedures before parking the vehicle for
prolonged periods.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and
pull out the memory fuse.
NOTICE
If the memory fuse is pulled up from
the fuse panel, the warning chime,
audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,
will not operate. Some items must be
reset after replacement. Refer to
“Battery” in this section.
Even though the memory fuse is
pulled up, the battery can still be dis-
charged by operation of the head-
lights or other electrical devices.
Engine compartment panel fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by press-
ing the tap and pulling up.
OLM079022
OLM079023N
OLM079024
Diesel only
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:06 PM Page 46
747
Maintenance
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the engine com-
partment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that
you consult a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
CAUTION
After checking the fuse box in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse box cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water leaking in.
OLM079052R
OEL070305R
Type A
Type B
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:06 PM Page 47
Maintenance
487
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel on the right
side in the engine compartment.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
NOTICE
If the main fuse is blown, we recom-
mend that you consult a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
OLM079025
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:06 PM Page 48
749
Maintenance
Engine compartment
OLM079026R/OLM079053R/OLM079027/
OEL070306R/OLM079028
Fuse/Relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Diesel only
Driver’s side panel
Main fuse
Type A
Type B
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you
inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 49
Maintenance
507
Inner fuse panel (Instrument panel)
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Circuit Protected
1 10A
AUDIO 1
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, DC/DC Converter
2 10A
ROOM LP
IPS Control Module (B+), BCM, A/C Control Module, Data Link Connector,
Instrument Cluster(IND), RF Receiver, Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch,
Auto Light & Photo Sensor, MAP Lamp, Room Lamp,
Luggage Lamp, Driver/Passenger, Vanity Lamp
3 10A MODULE 3
IPS Control Module (ON Input), Electro Chromic Mirror, BCM, PDM, Head Lamp
Levelling Device Switch, Head Lamp Levelling Device Actuator LH/RH,
ICM Relay Box (Rear Seat Warmer Relay Relay LH/RH)
4 10A START
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 4 / 11 - Start / ATM P/N)
Burglar Alarm Relay, ECM
5 10A AIR BAG IND. Instrument Cluster (IND.)
6 10A CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster (IND.), Seat Belt Reminder Switch,
Console Switch, BCM, Smart Key Control Module, Audio,
A/V & Navigation Head Unit, ISG Switch, Alternator
7 10A MODULE 4
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 1 - Blower), Rain Sensor,
Diesel Box (RLY. 2, 3 - PTC Heater Relay #2, #3)
A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer, Sunroof Motor
8 25A
POWER
OUTLET 2
Cigarette Lighter & Front Power Outlet, Rear Power Outlet
9 10A AUDIO 2
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, AMP, PDM, BCM, Power Outside Mirror Switch,
Smart Key Control Module, DC/DC Converter, Sunroof Motor
POWER
CONNECTOR
POWER
CONNECTOR
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 50
751
Maintenance
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Circuit Protected
10 10A AIR BAG SRS Control Module, Passenger Air Bag Lamp
11 10A MODULE 1
IPS Control Module (ON/START Input), 4WD ECM, ICM Relay Box (DBC Relay),
DBC Switch, Multifunction Switch (Light), Steering Angle Sensor, Stop Lamp Switch,
EPS Control Module, Tyre Pressure Monitoring Module, ESC Off Switch, E/R Fuse &
Relay Box (RLY. 8 - ESS), DC/DC Converter, Smart Parking Assist Control Module
12 15A HANDLE HTD Clock Spring (Steering Wheel Heater)
13 10A FOG LP RR ICM Relay Box (Rear Fog Lamp Relay)
14 25A WIPER FRT
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 12 - Front Wiper LO, RLY. 13 - Rain Wiper)
Front Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch (Wiper)
15 15A S/HEATER FRT Console Switch
16 20A POWER OUTLET 1 Cigarette Lighter & Front Power Outlet
17 10A BACK-UP LP
Back-Up Lamp Relay
Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH, Rear Parking Assist Sensor Centre LH/RH
18 15A DR LOCK Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Relay, ICM Relay Box (Dead Lock Relay)
19 7.5A MODULE 2 BCM, Smart Key Control Module, PDM
20 15A WIPER RR ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay), Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch (Wiper)
21 15A SUNROOF Sunroof Motor
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 51
Maintenance
527
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Circuit Protected
22 20A IGN 1 E/R Fuse & Relay Box (FUSE - F23, F24, F25)
23 7.5A A/CON A/C Control Module (Auto)
24 15A S/HEATER RR ICM Relay Box (Rear Seat Warmer Relay LH/RH)
25 25A P/WDW RH
Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch(LHD),
Rear Power Window Switch RH
26 10A
FOLDING
MIRR
FOLDING MIRR Power Outside Mirror Switch
27 10A SMART KEY PDM, Smart Key Control ModuleFOB Holder, Start/Stop Button Switch
28 15A PDM PDM
29 25A P/WDW LH
Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch(RHD),
Rear Power Window Switch LH
30 25A AMP AMP, DC/DC Converter
31 7.5A HTD MIRR
Rear Defogger Switch, ECM(G4FD)
Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
32 20A SAFETY P/WDW Driver Safety Power Window Module
33 7.5A MODULE 5 ATM Shift Lever, Rear Parking Assist Buzzer, Tyre Pressure Monitoring Module
34 15A HAZARD ICM Relay Box (Flasher Sound Relay), BCM
35 10A MDPS MDPS Unit
36 20A P/SEAT DRV FRT DRV Seat
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 52
753
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Circuit Protected
MULTI
FUSE
1 80A MDPS EPS Control Module
2 60A B+1
Smart Junction Box (Fuse - F13 / F20 / F26 / F31 / F37, IPS 4 / IPS 5 / IPS 6
/ IPS 7)
3 40A ABS 2 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
4 40A EMS EMS Box (Fuse - F1 / F2 / F3 / F6)
5 40A ABS 1 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
6 40A BLOWER RLY. 1 (Blower Relay)
7 60A B+3 Smart Junction Box (Fuse - F30 / F35 / F36, Power Connector - F1 / F2)
8 60A B+2
Smart Junction Box (Power Window Relay, Fuse - F23 / F28 / F33, IPS 0 /
IPS 1 / IPS 2 / IPS 3)
FUSE
9
40A(50A)
GSL(DSL)
COOLING
FAN
RLY. 3 (Cooling Fan Low Relay), RLY. 9 (Cooling Fan High Relay)
10 40A
HEATED
GLASS RR
RLY. 6 (Rear Defogger Relay)
11 30A IGN 1
W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch,
With Smart Key - PDM Relay Box (IGN1 Relay)
12 40A IGN 2
RLY. 4 (Start Relay), W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch,
With Smart Key - PDM Relay Box (IGN2 Relay)
13 15A HORN RLY. 2 (Horn Relay), RLY. 5 (Burglar Alarm Horn Relay)
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 53
Maintenance
547
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Circuit Protected
FUSE
14 15A DEICER RLY. 10 (Front Wiper Deicer Relay)
15 10A STOP LAMP Stop Lamp Switch, ICM Relay Box (DBC Relay)
16 10A
AMS
B+ SENSOR Battery Sensor (G4KD/D4HA)
17 20A 4WD 4WD ECM
18 7.5A ECU 2
RLY. 11 (ATM P/N Relay), RLY. 4 (Start Relay), ECM/PCM,
Multifunction Switch (G4KD), Mass Air Flow Sensor (D4FD/D4HA)
19 7.5A ABS
ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector,
Fuel Filter Warning Sensor (D4FD/D4HA), Glow Relay Unit (D4HA),
Diesel Box (RLY. 4 - Fuel Filter Heater Relay)(D4FD/D4HA)
20 7.5A TCU 2 Transaxle Range Switch(G4KD/D4HA), TCM (D4HA), Vehicle Speed Sensor
21 30A B+4 H/LP HI Fuse
22 30A
H/LP
WASHER
RLY (H/LP WASHER)
23 10A H/LP HI RLY (H/LP HI)
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 54
755
Maintenance
Engine compartment sub fuse panel (Disel Engine)
No. Fuse rating Fuse Symbol Circuit Protected Relay Symbol Relay Type
1 50A PTC Heater Relay #1 MICRO PLUG
2 50A PTC Heater Relay #2 MICRO PLUG
3 50A PTC Heater Relay #3 MICRO PLUG
4 30A Fuel Filter Heater Relay MICRO PLUG
5 80A Glow Relay Unit - -
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 55
Maintenance
567
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or washing,
headlight and taillight lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused by
the temperature difference between the
lamp inside and outside. This is similar
to the condensation on your windows
inside your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with your
vehicle. If water leaks into the lamp bulb
circuitry, we recommend that the system
be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position and turn off
the lights to avoid sudden move-
ment of the vehicle and burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
CAUTION
If you don’t have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
we recommend that you consult a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer. In
many cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because other
parts of the vehicle must be
removed before you can get to the
bulb. This is especially true if you
have to remove the headlight
assembly to
get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing
the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 56
757
Maintenance
Headlight, position light, turn sig-
nal light, front fog light bulb
replacement
(1) Front turn signal light
(2) Headlight (High/Low)
(3) Position light (LED) (if equipped)
(4) Position light (LED)/Daytime running
light (if equipped)
(5) Front fog light (if equipped)
Headlight (High/Low)
1. Open the bonnet.
2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-
connector.
4. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining
wire by depressing the end and push-
ing it upward.
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly.
6. Install a new headlight bulb and snap
the headlight bulb retaining wire into
position by aligning the wire with the
groove on the bulb.
7. Connect the headlight bulb socket-
connector.
8. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-
ing it clockwise.
NOTICE
We recommend that the headlight aim-
ing be adjusted after an accident or
after the headlight assembly is rein-
stalled at a authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
OEL073029
OEL074101
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 57
Maintenance
587
Traffic Change (For Europe)
The low beam light distribution is asym-
metric. If you go abroad to a country with
an opposite traffic direction, this asym-
metric part will dazzle the oncoming driv-
er. To prevent dazzle, ECE regulations
demand several technical solutions (ex.
automatic change system, adhesive
sheet, down aiming). Headlamps are
designed not to dazzle opposing drivers.
So you don´t need to change your head-
lamps in a country with the opposite traf-
fic direction.
Headlight (Low, HID type)
If the light does not operate, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
NOTICE
HID lamps have superior performance
vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps are esti-
mated by the manufacturer to last twice
as long or longer than halogen bulbs
depending on their frequency of use.
They will probably require replacement
at some point in the life of the vehicle.
Cycling the headlamps on and off more
than typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent lamps.
If a headlamp goes out after a period of
operation but will immediately relight
when the headlamp switch is cycled it is
likely the HID lamp needs to be
replaced. HID lighting components are
more complex than conventional halo-
gen bulbs thus have higher replacement
cost.
WARNING - HID Headlight
low beam (if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON bulb)
due to electric shock danger. If the
low beam (XENON bulb) is not
working, we recommend that the
system be checked by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 58
759
Maintenance
Turn signal light/Position light
Turn signal light
1. Turn off the engine and open the bon-
net.
2. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
5. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
Position light
If the light bulb does not operate, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked by
a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
(Continued)
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
WARNING -
Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-
ized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never touch
the glass with bare hands.
Residual oil may cause the bulb
to overheat and burst when lit. A
bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
(Continued)
OHD076046
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 59
Maintenance
607
Front fog light bulbs (if equipped)
1. Remove the front bumper under cover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of the
front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector from
the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket counter
clockwise until the tabs on the socket
align with the slots on the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the housing and
turn the socket clockwise.
6. Connect the power connector to the
socket.
7. Reinstall the front bumper under cover.
Headlight and front fog light aim-
ing (for Europe)
Headlight aiming
1. Inflate the tyres to the specified pres-
sure and remove any loads from the
vehicle except the driver, spare tyre,
and tools.
2. The vehicle should be placed on a flat
floor.
3. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines pass-
ing through respective head lamp cen-
tres) and a horizontal line (Horizontal
line passing through centre of head
lamps) on the screen.
4. With the head lamp and battery in nor-
mal condition, aim the head lamps so
the brightest portion falls on the hori-
zontal and vertical lines.
5. To aim the low/high beam left or right,
turn the driver (2) clockwise or coun-
terclockwise.To aim the low/high beam
up or down, turn the driver (1) clock-
wise or counterclockwise.
OEL073257
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 60
761
Maintenance
Front fog light aiming
The front fog lamp can be aimed as the
same manner of the head lamps aiming.
With the front fog lamps and battery nor-
mal condition, aim the front fog lamps.To
aim the front fog lamp up or down, turn
the driver clockwise or counterclockwise.
OEL074256
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 61
Maintenance
627
Vehicle condition H1
H2
W1
W2
Fog Fog
Without driver 35 (897) 20 (510)
55.6 (1413) 53.1 (1350)
With driver 35 (892) 19.9 (505)
Unit: in (mm)
<Ground Height>
<Distance between lamps>
H1 : Height between the head lamp bulb centre and ground (High beam/Low beam)
H2 : Height between the fog lamp bulb centre and ground
W1 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centres (High beam/Low beam)
W2 : Distance between the two fog lamp bulbs centres
Aiming point
OLMB073084
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 62
763
Maintenance
Head lamp low beam
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If head lamp levelling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp levelling device switch with 0 positions.
OMD051055L
Based on 10m screen
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 63
Maintenance
647
Front fog light
1. Turn the front fog lamp on with the driver (75 kg) aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the allowable range (shaded region).
OGDE071056
Based on 10m screen
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 64
765
Maintenance
Side repeater light bulb replace-
ment (if equipped)
Type A
If the light bulb does not operate, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked by
a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Type B
1. Remove the light assembly from the
vehicle by prying the lens and pulling
the assembly out.
2. Reinstall a new light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
OLM079031
OLM079050
OLM073033
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:07 PM Page 65
Maintenance
667
Outside light
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Loosen the light assembly retaining
screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
3. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Inside light
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the service cover using a flat-
blade screwdriver.
3. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
OLM079034
OLM079035
OLM079036
OLM079047
OEL079038
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 66
767
Maintenance
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting it
into the service hole.
Stop and tail light (LED type)
If the light does not operate, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
Rear Fog Light (if equipped)
1. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
3. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
4. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
High mounted stop light bulb
replacement (if equipped)
If the light does not operate, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
OLM079039
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 67
Maintenance
687
License plate light bulb replace-
ment
1. Remove the lens by pressing the tabs.
2. Remove the socket from the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
4. Install a new bulb in the socket and
install the socket to the lens.
5. Reinstall the lens securely.
OLM079055
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 68
769
Maintenance
Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF” but-
ton is depressed to avoid burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
Map lamp
Glove box lamp (if equipped)
Luggage room lamp (if equipped)
Sunvisor lamp
Room lamp
OLM079040/OXM079041/H/OEL079042/OLM07904
4/OLM079045/H
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 69
Maintenance
707
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washers,
make sure to maintain sufficient dis-
tance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component dam-
age or water penetration.
Do not spray the camera, sensors or its
surrounding area directly with a high
pressure washer. Shock applied from
high pressure water may cause the
device to not operate normally.
Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or con-
nectors as they may be damaged if
they come into contact with high pres-
sure water.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-
ing, you should wash it after each off-
road trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits.
A mild soap, safe for use on painted sur-
faces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes whilst driving slowly to see
if they have been affected by water.
If braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly whilst maintaining a slow
forward speed.
CAUTION
Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do
not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
Be careful when washing the side
windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through the
windows and wet the interior.
To prevent damage to the plastic
parts and lamps, do not clean
with chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 70
771
Maintenance
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
CAUTION
Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminium parts.This
may result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause discol-
oration or paint deterioration.
CAUTION
Water washing in the engine com-
partment including high pressure
water washing may cause the fail-
ure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electri-
cal/electronic components inside
the vehicle as this may damage
them.
OJB037800
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 71
Maintenance
727
Bright-metal maintenance
To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preserva-
tive. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may col-
lect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes whilst driving slowly to see
if they have been affected by water.
If braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly whilst maintaining a slow
forward speed.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 72
773
Maintenance
Aluminium wheel maintenance
The aluminium wheels are coated with a
clear protective finish.
Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-
ishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminium wheels. They
may scratch or damage the finish.
Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-
gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads.This helps pre-
vent corrosion.
Avoid washing the wheels with high-
speed car wash brushes.
Do not use any alkaline or acid deter-
gent. It may damage and corrode the
aluminium wheels coated with a clear
protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corro-
sion, we produces cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
car.
Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unpro-
tected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car is
regularly exposed to corrosive materials,
corrosion protection is particularly impor-
tant. Some of the common causes of
accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when tempera-
tures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the car surfaces by mois-
ture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dis-
persed. For all these reasons, it is par-
ticularly important to keep your car clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to
the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from get-
ting started by observing the following:
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 73
Maintenance
747
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your car clean and free of corrosive
materials. Attention to the underside of
the car is particularly important.
If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the compo-
nents under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accu-
mulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly effec-
tive in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favor-
able environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your car in
the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of cor-
rosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-
ly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possi-
ble.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure
the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if
you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 74
775
Maintenance
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cos-
metic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and
air freshener from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause damage
or discoloration. If they do contact the
interior parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions that follow for the
proper way to clean vinyl.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom-
mended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its colour can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-
bing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-
tions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-
cle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components
inside the vehicle as this may dam-
age them.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the colour
of the leather may fade or the sur-
face may get stripped off.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 75
Maintenance
767
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty infor-
mation contained in the Service Passport
in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-
sion control system to meet all emission
regulations.
There are three emission control sys-
tems which are as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is rec-
ommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer in accor-
dance with the maintenance schedule.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
To prevent the vehicle from misfir-
ing during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system off by pressing the
ESC switch.
After dynamometer testing is com-
pleted, turn the ESC system back on
by pressing the ESC switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation sys-
tem is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase.This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control
System
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapours from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
Canister
Fuel vapours generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapours absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is con-
trolled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-
ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-
es so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warms-
up during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 76
777
Maintenance
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions whilst maintaining
good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or dura-
bility and may even violate governmen-
tal safety and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifica-
tion may not be covered under warran-
ty.
If you use unauthorised electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage, bat-
tery discharge and fire. For your safety,
do not use unauthorised electronic
devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever sus-
pect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-
cle for any extended time with the
engine running.
When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain car-
bon monoxide (CO). Though
colourless and odourless, it is dan-
gerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
following to avoid CO poisoning.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 77
Maintenance
787
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
Use only UNLEADED FUEL for petrol
engine.
Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-
formance.
Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control sys-
tem. We recommend that the system
be inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel cause the
engine to misfire, damaging the cat-
alytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
Diesel Particulate Filter (if equipped)
The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) sys-
tem removes the soot emitted from the
vehicle.
Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF
system automatically burns (oxidizes)
and removes the accumulated soot
according to the driving condition. In
other words, the active burning by engine
control system and high exhaust gas
temperature caused by normal/high driv-
ing condition burns and removes the
accumulated soot.
However, if the vehicle continues to be
driven at low speed for long time, the
accumulated soot may not be automati-
cally removed because of low exhaust
gas temperature. In this particular case,
the amount of soot is out of detection
limit, the soot oxidation process by
engine control system may not happen
and the malfunction indicator light may
blink.
When the malfunction indicator light
blinks, it may stop blinking by driving the
vehicle at more than 37 mph (60km/h) or
at more than second gear with 1500 ~
2000 engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
WARNING - Fire
A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehi-
cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as dry grass, paper,
leaves, etc.
The exhaust system and catalytic
system are very hot whilst the
engine is running or immediately
after the engine is turned off. Keep
away from the exhaust system
and catalytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for cor-
rosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 78
779
Maintenance
If the malfunction indicator light contin-
ues to blink in spite of the procedure, we
recommend that the system be checked
by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
If you continue to drive with the malfunc-
tion indicator light blinking for a long
time, the DPF system can be damaged
and fuel consumption can be worsen.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the regu-
lated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)
and unspecified additives, it can
cause the DPF system to be dam-
aged and white smoke can be emit-
ted.
EL(FL) UK 7.QXP 3/4/2015 9:08 PM Page 79
Specifications & Consumer information
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Load and speed capacity tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-6
• Recommended engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
• Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Tyre specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Air conditioner compressor label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8
EL(FL) UK 8.QXP 3/13/2015 5:44 PM Page 1
Specifications & Consumer information
28
DIMENSIONS
Item in (mm)
Overall length 173.6 (4410)
Overall width 71.7 (1820)
Overall height 65.2 (1655)/65.6 (1665)*
1
Front tread 62.6 (1591)*
2
/62.4 (1585)*
3
Rear tread 62.7 (1592)*
2
/62.4 (1586)*
3
Wheelbase 103.9 (2640)
*
1
with roof rack
*
2
with 215/70R16
*
3
with 225/60R17 or 225/55R18
ENGINE
Item Petrol 1.6 Petrol 2.0 Diesel 1.7 Diesel R2.0
Displacement
cu. in (cc)
97.09 (1,591) 121.99 (1,999) 102.8 (1,685) 121.74 (1,995)
Bore x Stroke
in. (mm)
3.03X3.36
(77X85.4)
3.19X3.81
(81X97)
3.04X3.81
(77.2X90)
3.30X3.54
(84X90)
Firing order
1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders
4. In-line 4. In-line 4. In-line 4. In-line
Item Weight of volume Classification
Refrigerant
550±25g R134a
Compressor lubricant
120±10cc PAG oil
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
EL(FL) UK 8.QXP 3/13/2015 5:44 PM Page 2
83
Specifications & Consumer information
BULB WATTAGE
* If equipped
Light Bulb Wattage
Headlights (Low/High) 55 or 35 (HID)
Front turn signal lights 21
Position lights LED
Side repeater lights (Outside mirror)* LED
Side repeater lights* 5
Front fog lights* 27
Rear fog light* 21
Stop and tail lights (Outside) 21/5/LED
Stop and tail lights (Inside) LED
Rear turn signal lights (Outside) 21
Tail light* (Inside) 5
Back-up lights (Inside) 16
High mounted stop light LED
License plate lights 5
Map lamps 10
Room lamps 10
Luggage lamp* 5
Glove box lamp* 5
Vanity mirror lamps* 5
EL(FL) UK 8.QXP 3/13/2015 5:44 PM Page 3
Specifications & Consumer information
48
TYRES AND WHEELS
CAUTION
When replacing tyres, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tyres of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
*
1
LI : LOAD INDEX
*
2
SS : SPEED SYMBOL
Item Tyre size Wheel size
Load Capacity Speed Capacity
LI *
1
kg SS *
2
km/h
Full size tyre
215/70R16 6.5Jx16 100 800 H 210
225/60R17 6.5Jx17 99 775 H 210
225/55R18 6.5J×18 98 750 H 210
LOAD AND SPEED CAPACITY TYRES
*
1
: For Europe
*
2
: Except Europe
Item Tyre size Wheel size
Inflation pressure bar (psi, kPa)
Wheel lug nut torque
kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)
Normal load
()
Maximum load
()
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tyre
215/70R16 6.5Jx16
2.3
(33, 230)
2.3
(33, 230)
2.6 *
1
(38,260)
2.3 *
2
(33,230)
2.7 *
1
(39,270)
2.3 *
2
(33,230)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
225/60R17 6.5Jx17
225/55R18 6.5J×18
EL(FL) UK 8.QXP 3/13/2015 5:44 PM Page 4
85
Specifications & Consumer information
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
Item
1.6 GDI NU 2.0 MPI R2.0
U2 1.7
2WD 4WD 2WD 4WD 2WD
4WD 2WD 4WD
5 seater 4034 (1,930) - 4365 (1,980) 4475 (2,030) 4607 (2,090)
4717 (2,140) 4276 (1,940) -
lbs (Kg)
Min : Behind rear seat to upper edge of the seat back.
Max : Behind front seat to roof.
LUGGAGE VOLUME
ltem 5 Seater
VDA
MIN.
14.7 cu.ft (415 l)
MAX.
49.5 cu.ft (1,402 l)
EL(FL) UK 8.QXP 3/13/2015 5:44 PM Page 5
Specifications & Consumer information
68
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil
*1 *2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
Petrol Engine
1.6L
3.6 l (3.16 Imp. qts.)
ACEA A5 (or above)
2.0L
MPI
4.0 l (3.51 Imp. qts.)
API SM & ILSAC GF-4 (or above),
ACEA A5 (or above)
GDI ACEA A5 (or above)
Diesel Engine
1.7L
with DPF *
3
5.3 l (4.66 Imp. qts.)
ACEA C2 or C3
without DPF *
3
5.3 l (4.66 Imp. qts.)
ACEA B4
2.0L
with DPF *
3
7,6 l (6.68 Imp. qts.)
ACEA C2 or C3
without DPF *
3
ACEA B4
Manual transaxle fluid
Petrol Engine
1.6L
1.8 ~ 1.9 l
(1.58 ~ 1.67 Imp. qts.)
API GL-4, SAE 75W/85
2.0L
MPI
2.1 ~ 2.2 l
(1.84 ~ 1.93 Imp. qts.)
GDI
Diesel Engine
1.7L
1.9 ~ 2.0 l
(1.67 ~ 1.75 Imp. qts.)
2.0L
1.8 ~ 1.9 l
(1.58 ~ 1.67 Imp. qts.)
Automatic transaxle fluid
Petrol Engine
1.6L
7.3 l (6.42 Imp. qts.)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV
NOCA ATF SP-IV, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV
2.0L
7.1 l (6.24 Imp. qts.)
Diesel Engine
7.8 l (6.86 Imp. qts.)
EL(FL) UK 8.QXP 3/13/2015 5:44 PM Page 6
87
Specifications & Consumer information
Lubricant Volume Classification
Coolant
Petrol Engine
6.7 l (5.89 Imp. qts.)
Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminium radiator)
Diesel Engine
8.5 l (7.47 Imp. qts.)
Brake/clutch fluid
0.7 ~ 0.8 l
(0.62 ~ 0.70 Imp. qts.)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Rear differential oil (4WD)
0.65 l ( 0.57 Imp. qts.)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
Transfer case oil (4WD)
0.6 l (0.52 Imp. qts.)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
Fuel
Petrol Engine
58 l (12.7 Imp. gal.)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
Diesel Engine
Recommended Engine oil (For Europe)
Supplier
Product
Petrol Engine Diesel Engine
Shell
HELIX ULTRA AH-E 5W-30
HELIX ULTRA AP 5W-30
HELIX ULTRA 5W-40
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on 8-8 page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
Diesel Particulate Filter
EL(FL) UK 8.QXP 3/13/2015 5:44 PM Page 7
Specifications & Consumer information
88
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operating (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for sat-
isfactory lubrication in hot weather.
Using oils of any viscosity other than
those recommended could result in
engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the range
of temperature your vehicle will be oper-
ated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or drain-
ing any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Diesel
Engine Oil (1.7L)
5W-30
15W-40
10W-30
0W-30
Diesel
Engine Oil (2.0L)
5W-30/40
15W-40
10W-30/40
0W-30/40
Petrol Engine Oil
(1.6L GDI/2.0L GDI)
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-30, 5W-40
Petrol Engine Oil
(2.0L MPI)
20W-50
15W-40
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
EL(FL) UK 8.QXP 3/13/2015 5:44 PM Page 8
89
Specifications & Consumer information
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your vehi-
cle and in all legal matters pertaining to
its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the driver seat. To check the num-
ber, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard.The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windscreen from outside.
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side
centre pillar gives the vehicle identifica-
tion number (VIN).
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
OLM089001
Frame number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OLM089006N
OLM089006N/H
VIN label
Type A (if equipped)
VIN label
Type B (if equipped)
OEL089002R
EL(FL) UK 8.QXP 3/13/2015 5:44 PM Page 9
Specifications & Consumer information
108
The tyres supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best perform-
ance for normal driving.
The tyre label located on the driver's side
centre pillar gives the tyre pressures rec-
ommended for your vehicle.
TYRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.
OEL083008R
Petrol engine (1.6L)
Petrol engine (2.0L)
Diesel engine (1.7L)
Diesel engine (2.0L)
OEL080003/OEL083010/OEL080004/OLM089004
EL(FL) UK 8.QXP 3/13/2015 5:44 PM Page 10
811
Specifications & Consumer information
A compressor label informs you the type
of compressor your vehicle is equipped
with such as model, supplier part num-
ber, production number, refrigerant (1)
and refrigerant oil (2).
The radio frequency components of the
vehicle comply with requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive
1995/5/EC.
Further information including the manu-
facturer's declaration of conformity is
available on HYUNDAI web site as fol-
lows;
http://service.hyundai-motor.com
AIR CONDITIONER
COMPRESSOR LABEL
OHC081001
DECLARATION OF
CONFORMITY
CE0678
Example
EL(FL) UK 8.QXP 3/13/2015 5:44 PM Page 11
549

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln
1

Forum

hyundai-ix35-2015
  • Temperaturanzeige umstellen von Fahrenheit nach Grad Eingereicht am 20-5-2021 13:36

    Antworten Frage melden
  • Hyundai X35 Bj. 2013: Komponenten die ein Reset nach Batteriewechsel benötigen sind auf Kapitel 4 in der Betriebsanleitung zu finden. Diese finde ich nicht ! Hilfe! Eingereicht am 11-1-2021 17:15

    Antworten Frage melden

Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für Hyundai ix35-2015 wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Andere Handbücher von Hyundai ix35-2015

Hyundai ix35-2015 Bedienungsanleitung - Deutsch - 628 seiten

Hyundai ix35-2015 Bedienungsanleitung - Französisch - 594 seiten


Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info